IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi! I am Chris Breen and I am
here to welcome you to Mac OS X Lion Essential Training.
| | 00:09 | My goal in this course is to help you
understand the operating system and the
| | 00:12 | bundled applications that make a Mac a Mac.
| | 00:16 | We will start by customizing the
interface, so that it's both an efficient work
| | 00:19 | environment and nice to look at.
| | 00:21 | I will provide insight into
putting Lion's touch gestures to good use.
| | 00:25 | I will help you make Safari the most
effective web browser you've ever used.
| | 00:30 | We will walk through the essential
bundle of applications, organizing e-mail
| | 00:33 | messages with Mail, managing contacts
with Address Book, and scheduling your
| | 00:38 | busy life with iCal.
| | 00:40 | And I will take you on a tour of Lions'
most important settings, allowing you to
| | 00:44 | completely configure your Mac.
| | 00:45 | I am excited to show you what
Apple's new operative system can do.
| | 00:49 | Let's get started with Mac
OS X Lion Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you are premium member of the
lynda.com Online Training Library or if you are
| | 00:04 | watching this tutorial on a DVD-ROM,
you have access to the exercise files used
| | 00:09 | throughout this tile.
| | 00:10 | I have a very few exercise files on the desktop.
| | 00:14 | They include a smattering of still
images, motion captures and audio files that
| | 00:18 | you can drag into iMovie, and
that's it, because it's just that simple.
| | 00:22 | If you are a monthly subscriber or
annual subscriber to lynda.com, you don't
| | 00:26 | have access to the exercise files,
but you can follow along from scratch
| | 00:30 | with your own assets.
| | 00:31 | Now let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Installation and MigrationInstalling Lion| 00:00 | Now of course before you can run
Lion you have to actually install it.
| | 00:04 | What you're looking at now is the
Desktop of a Mac that's running Snow Leopard
| | 00:09 | and this is how many of you are going
to upgrade. Because you need to have
| | 00:12 | Snow Leopard on your machine before you can go
to the App Store and download a copy of Lion.
| | 00:18 | So I am going to go to the Apple menu, choose
App Store, and here we are at the App Store.
| | 00:26 | Now if I wanted to, I could use a
Search field to look for Lion, but Apple was
| | 00:32 | kind enough to put a link to it
right here in the Quick Link sidebar.
| | 00:37 | Now normally, if you haven't purchased
Lion before, you are going to see this
| | 00:41 | box here contains the
price of the OS and that's $30.
| | 00:45 | In this case I've already purchased it,
so I am just going to install it again.
| | 00:49 | The reason I can do this is because
the license is such that you can download
| | 00:53 | and install it on any Macintosh that
you have authorized with your Apple ID.
| | 01:00 | So we will go ahead and Install
simply by clicking on Install.
| | 01:03 | It will ask me for my password.
Sign in, and there it goes, and now it's
| | 01:14 | downloading and you see that it is,
because it appears in the dock.
| | 01:19 | And now it's finished downloading.
| | 01:21 | When it does that up pops a
window called Install Mac OS X Lion.
| | 01:26 | Now at this point to start the
installation all I have to do is click Continue.
| | 01:30 | But before we do that I want to make
a copy of the installer and the reason
| | 01:34 | I want to do that is because once the
installation completes it throws out the installer.
| | 01:39 | It deletes it.
| | 01:41 | Now that may be fine in most cases,
but there are times that you may want to
| | 01:44 | have a copy of that installer if you
want to move it to another Mac for example.
| | 01:47 | The license allows you to do this and
it's particularly helpful if you don't
| | 01:52 | want to go through that
4 gigabyte download again.
| | 01:55 | So you'll find the installer inside
your Applications folder and here it is.
| | 02:01 | I am going to hold down the Option key
and drag this file to the desktop, and it
| | 02:06 | will make a copy of the installer.
| | 02:09 | Now that I have that copy, I will close
this window, and we will click Continue
| | 02:14 | to proceed with the installation.
| | 02:16 | You must Agree to license agreement,
because if you don't, it won't install.
| | 02:21 | Yes, I've read every single word, I promise.
| | 02:24 | At this point you can choose
which hard drive to install to.
| | 02:26 | I have just a single hard
drive, so I will click Install.
| | 02:29 | Again, enter your username and password and OK.
| | 02:34 | Note that we are performing an upgrade.
| | 02:36 | So all the information that's on my
computer now will remain there. All we are
| | 02:40 | doing is updating the operating system.
| | 02:42 | So during this initial phase, the
installer will install a few files and then it
| | 02:47 | will restart your Mac.
| | 02:48 | If you don't want to wait
through this ticker just click Restart.
| | 02:51 | I am going to Close Other Applications,
which is the App Store, and now we restart.
| | 03:00 | And then the Mac will reboot and you
will see the Apple logo and you'll see the
| | 03:04 | progress wheel below the Apple logo.
| | 03:07 | And then you see the Installing screen
and it shows you a progress bar along the
| | 03:11 | bottom of the window.
| | 03:13 | And this is going to take some time,
so feel free, go ahead and have a cup of
| | 03:16 | coffee, and wait while it finishes installing.
| | 03:19 | Fortunately for you, we are going to zip
through this part, so you don't have to
| | 03:22 | sit around and wait many minutes
for it to get to where it needs to go.
| | 03:27 | So, after the installation completes,
you'll see a little notice indicating that
| | 03:30 | it has completed. Wait a little bit and
the computer will restart all by itself
| | 03:35 | and it will boot into the login screen.
| | 03:37 | Now you can tell that you're at the
Lion login screen because you'll see this
| | 03:41 | gray sort of cloth background that
you wouldn't have seen in Snow Leopard.
| | 03:46 | So this indicates that indeed we are in Lion.
| | 03:49 | Any user accounts that were on your computer
in Snow Leopard are still on your computer.
| | 03:53 | They are represented by these
little circles with the name of the
| | 03:57 | account underneath.
| | 03:58 | In order to log into an account, all
you have to do is select the account you
| | 04:02 | want to log into, click on it, and
you'll be prompted for your password.
| | 04:07 | Your password will remain just as it
was in Snow Leopard. And here's your
| | 04:12 | desktop and as you'll notice, it looks
exactly the same as it did under Snow Leopard.
| | 04:18 | There is your Hard Drive icon in the
right corner and as you recall, I made a
| | 04:23 | copy of the Lion installer, I put it on
the Desktop, and it's still there on the
| | 04:27 | Desktop, ready for me to copy
to another drive if I care to.
| | 04:31 | And it's really just as easy as that.
| | 04:33 | It may take half an hour or an hour so,
for the installation of complete, but
| | 04:37 | once it's done, you'll have your
computer back ready to use Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Getting Familiar with the InterfaceTouring the Finder| 00:00 | Let's take a tour of the Finder.
| | 00:03 | The Finder is an application like
any other application on your Mac.
| | 00:07 | The difference is the Finder is your
way of looking at the contents of your Mac
| | 00:12 | and interacting with the interface.
And we know that Finder is active, because
| | 00:16 | up here at the top of
the menu bar we see Finder.
| | 00:20 | Whenever you have an active application you will
see its name right here next to the Apple menu.
| | 00:25 | Now let's create a new Finder window
so that we can examine the way it works.
| | 00:31 | At the very top left corner of any
Finder window you have will be three buttons.
| | 00:37 | There's the red button, the
yellow button, and the green button.
| | 00:41 | The red button closes the
window. Good bye, window!
| | 00:45 | So now we have to make a new window.
| | 00:48 | The yellow button minimizes the window
so that it goes down into the dock, which
| | 00:52 | is at the bottom of the Mac.
| | 00:54 | So I would click the yellow button
and there it goes. It's minimized.
| | 00:57 | To bring it back, simply
click on it and back it comes.
| | 01:01 | This is one way to get rid of
the clutter on your desktop.
| | 01:04 | Here is a cute trick, hold down the Shift
key and click on the yellow minimize button.
| | 01:09 | Ooo, slow mo!
| | 01:15 | And to bring it back up in the slow mo,
I hold down the Shift key, click on the
| | 01:18 | minimized window and ooo, again!
| | 01:24 | That leaves us with a green zoom button.
| | 01:26 | A third one, and honestly
its behavior changes depending on the
| | 01:30 | contents of the Window.
| | 01:31 | So let's make this window wider.
| | 01:34 | I will click on the green
button and it makes it smaller.
| | 01:37 | I will click again and it
restores to the original position.
| | 01:41 | Let's change it again.
| | 01:42 | I am going to make it quite thin.
| | 01:47 | Look, it makes it longer this time.
And I click green again at it's back to
| | 01:52 | its original position.
| | 01:54 | I urge you to try this on your own.
| | 01:56 | Some programs, what the green button
will do is actually expand the window to
| | 02:00 | full screen or nearly full screen, and
click it again, and it restores it to
| | 02:04 | its original position.
| | 02:05 | So again, it depends on the context to
the window and the application you're using.
| | 02:10 | Let's take a look at the sidebar.
| | 02:12 | In the sidebar are favorite items.
| | 02:14 | These are locations that you are
going to visit fairly routinely.
| | 02:18 | By default you see all my files,
let's expand that window, and these are
| | 02:24 | organized by the kinds of files
that you have, but you can change that.
| | 02:28 | Applications folder, these are
the applications on your computer.
| | 02:31 | I am showing you some that are on
this computer that will not be on your
| | 02:34 | computer necessarily.
| | 02:36 | Files on the Desktop, we don't
have anything on the desktop.
| | 02:38 | So there is nothing there.
| | 02:39 | Contents of your Documents folder.
Downloads, if you have downloaded anything
| | 02:44 | via Safari are going to appear in
this folder, and you have other common
| | 02:47 | locations such as Movies, Music, and Pictures.
| | 02:51 | So how do you add something to the sidebar?
| | 02:54 | That's fairly simple.
| | 02:55 | First thing I am going to do is I am
going to click on the Desktop, so I am
| | 02:58 | outside of this window.
| | 03:00 | Now the desktop is active.
| | 03:02 | I am going to create a
new folder on the desktop.
| | 03:04 | To do that, File > New Folder. This is
also Shift+Command+M, which is a shortcut
| | 03:10 | worth knowing. And here's
my new folder on the desktop.
| | 03:15 | The name is highlighted.
| | 03:16 | I can change the name when it
has that highlight and Return.
| | 03:22 | Here is a cool shortcut for
renaming folders or files.
| | 03:27 | Select the item, tap the Return
key, and you get the highlight.
| | 03:36 | Return, and it's named.
| | 03:38 | Now I want to add this to the sidebar.
| | 03:41 | Drag it over to the sidebar and you
see this blue line indicating where it's
| | 03:45 | going to go on the list. I am going to put
it right under Applications and here it is.
| | 03:50 | Currently there's nothing in there, but you
notice that it hasn't moved from the desktop.
| | 03:55 | That's still where it's located.
| | 03:57 | This is just a shortcut
over here in the sidebar.
| | 04:00 | I don't want this thing anymore,
so I am going to throw it in the Trash.
| | 04:02 | And to do that select it, drag it down
to the Trash, and the window closes and
| | 04:09 | the item is in the Trash.
| | 04:11 | To empty the Trash, I go to the Finder
menu, choose Empty Trash, shortcut is
| | 04:17 | Shift+Command+Delete.
| | 04:21 | It will check with me, are you sure you
want to empty the Trash? Yes indeed I do.
| | 04:25 | I click Empty Trash and the Trash is empty.
| | 04:30 | Now let's open the Finder
window. Where is the shortcut?
| | 04:36 | Why, it's gone. And why is it gone?
| | 04:38 | Because I threw away that folder.
| | 04:40 | So I don't need a shortcut,
because the folder is gone.
| | 04:43 | Now let's take a look up in the menus.
| | 04:46 | The File menu at least here in the Finder
is for doing things as I have shown you.
| | 04:51 | New Finder Window, New Folder, New Smart
Folder, which is something we are going
| | 04:55 | to look at smart items in another movie.
| | 04:58 | You can open things from here, you can
close things, you can Get Info, again,
| | 05:02 | some of the stuff we are
going to look at in other movies.
| | 05:04 | Then there is the Edit menu.
| | 05:06 | This is where you find common commands,
such as Cut, Copy, Paste and Select.
| | 05:11 | Now let's look at some of the symbols here.
| | 05:13 | Next to this A is this symbol here.
| | 05:16 | It's called a number of different things,
but the official name for it is Command.
| | 05:20 | This is the Command key.
| | 05:21 | This appears next to the spacebar,
both on the left and on the right
| | 05:27 | on standard keyboards.
| | 05:28 | The arrow up symbol indicates the Shift key.
| | 05:31 | Let's go back to the File menu for
a second and look for a new symbol.
| | 05:36 | Under New Smart Folder, you see this
symbol here which looks kind of like a
| | 05:40 | slide with a little line above.
| | 05:42 | That stands for the Option key.
| | 05:44 | On the standard keyboard, the Option key
is just to the left of the Command key.
| | 05:48 | Now I am going to hold down the Control
key, which is the last key on the bottom
| | 05:52 | row at the very left, and you see this
symbol right here, which is this caret
| | 05:56 | key key or this triangle key, and
that stands for the Control key.
| | 06:00 | Let's go the View menu.
| | 06:03 | In the View menu, you are going to
find a list of ways to sort items in a
| | 06:07 | window, as Icons, as List,
as Columns, and as Cover Flow.
| | 06:12 | Now rather than do that from a menu, I
am going to actually do it in the Window.
| | 06:16 | So right now we are in Icon view.
| | 06:18 | Here is List view, and you see it
takes all the files there and puts them in
| | 06:22 | this nice convenient list.
| | 06:25 | This is called Column view.
| | 06:27 | So within Column view you have a hierarchy.
| | 06:29 | So let's go to Applications. I will
select a folder and you see we start
| | 06:35 | marching through the hierarchy.
| | 06:36 | So this is the contents of this Adobe folder.
| | 06:40 | AdobePatchFiles. Again, we keep marching
through the hierarchy as we go to the right.
| | 06:47 | And then there is Cover Flow view.
| | 06:49 | This is something that came out of
iTunes originally, and the idea is that you
| | 06:53 | have your files here at the top of the
window and by dragging, you can scroll
| | 06:59 | through little previews, and as you do, the
largest icon is highlighted below in the list.
| | 07:05 | Next to this is a Tools menu.
| | 07:08 | Common commands are found here, Open,
Open With, Open Enclosing Folder, move
| | 07:12 | items to the Trash and so on.
| | 07:16 | And then you can organize things
within a list by various criteria.
| | 07:20 | So let's go to List view.
| | 07:23 | Currently files are organized by Kind,
but I can organize them by Name if I
| | 07:27 | like, by Application, Date Added,
Date Modified, Date Created and so on.
| | 07:34 | A few more menu commands.
| | 07:37 | The Go menu is helpful for
going to common places on your Mac.
| | 07:41 | So for example if I wanted to go to the
Documents folder, I click on Go, choose
| | 07:45 | Documents and here is the
contents of my Document's folder.
| | 07:50 | Back to the Go menu.
| | 07:51 | I can go to other places like
my User folder for example.
| | 07:55 | That's Home, here is my User folder, I
can view it in List, and use various views.
| | 08:02 | Here's another little trick.
| | 08:04 | While you're in the Go menu, hold down
the Option key and you'll notice that a
| | 08:08 | new item appears in this list.
| | 08:10 | This is the Library folder that
appears within your user's folder.
| | 08:13 | Well, where is that?
| | 08:14 | Here I will show you. Here is the Library.
| | 08:16 | Now how can you tell where you are?
| | 08:19 | Here is cool little trick.
| | 08:21 | You click on the folder that's at
the top of the window and hold down the
| | 08:24 | Command key and you see the hierarchy.
| | 08:28 | This is the path to this folder.
| | 08:30 | So I'm in the Library folder that's
within my User folder, which is within the
| | 08:34 | Users folder, which is also
within the Hard Drive on my Macintosh.
| | 08:39 | So that's how you find the path.
| | 08:42 | Now above that Library folder. Again, when
you click on the Go menu, you don't see it.
| | 08:46 | It's hidden by default and the reason
is that most people don't need to get
| | 08:50 | to the Library folder.
| | 08:51 | This holds settings that most
people don't need to mess around with.
| | 08:54 | However, if you're a more advanced user,
you may want to go to this folder and
| | 08:58 | one easy way to get there, is again, to
hold down the Option button and then you
| | 09:03 | can get to the Library folder.
| | 09:07 | The Windows menu will show you the name
of any windows that happened to be open
| | 09:10 | within a specific application.
| | 09:13 | So let's suppose that we have TextEdit
running for example and I've got five
| | 09:16 | different documents.
| | 09:18 | The names of those documents
will appear within this menu.
| | 09:21 | Currently we just have the one window
open and so that's the only name we find here.
| | 09:26 | And then there is the Help
menu, which is actually quite helpful.
| | 09:30 | One of the nice things you can do here
is search for commands that are buried
| | 09:33 | in a menu somewhere.
| | 09:34 | So let's enter Copy.
| | 09:37 | The first item there where it says Menu
Items indicates that there is a command
| | 09:41 | that contains the word copy.
| | 09:43 | I select it and this helpful blue arrow
appears and shows me exactly where that command is.
| | 09:49 | So if you have a program that has lots
and lots of menu and lots of commands
| | 09:53 | within those menus, and you need to find
the command, this is one cool way to find it.
| | 09:57 | Then if you're looking for something in
Apple's online help, you can also select
| | 10:00 | one of Help topics. The Help viewer
will open and it will show you the
| | 10:05 | information you are looking for.
| | 10:08 | Close the Help menu, and close our window
here, and that's the basics of the Finder.
| | 10:14 | Later in the course, I am going to
show you how to configure the Finder so it
| | 10:17 | better suits your needs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Launching and working with apps| 00:01 | Your Mac has a lot of helpful
applications, also known as programs installed on it.
| | 00:05 | In this movie we will look at the
various ways you have of launching and working
| | 00:09 | with those applications.
| | 00:10 | Now one way to launch an application is to
simply find it in the dock and click on its icon.
| | 00:16 | So we have launched Safari
that way. Now quit Safari.
| | 00:20 | Now I will go to the Spotlight menu which is
this magnifying glass up in the right corner.
| | 00:25 | Start typing its name, and there is Safari.
| | 00:29 | To launch it, I press the Return key.
| | 00:32 | Once again there is Safari.
| | 00:33 | I will use a keyboard shortcut to quit
it, which is Command+Q. Now, we will go
| | 00:38 | to the Go menu > Applications.
| | 00:42 | I'll start typing Safari's name here,
safe, and there is Safari. Double-click on it,
| | 00:47 | and I launch the
application. And we will quit that.
| | 00:51 | Now these are the fairly typical
ways of launching applications.
| | 00:54 | There is another one called Launch Pad,
which we are going to look at in another movie.
| | 00:58 | Let's talk about some of the
behavior of these applications.
| | 01:00 | Let's launch Safari again. In an earlier
movie I showed you that when you click
| | 01:06 | on the red button that closes a window,
but doesn't quit the application necessarily.
| | 01:11 | So I'll close the window.
| | 01:13 | You can see that Safari is still
active because the Safari name still
| | 01:16 | appears in the menu bar.
| | 01:17 | I will click on the desktop. That goes away.
| | 01:20 | Well, how do I know that
Safari is still running?
| | 01:22 | I have to go down to the dock and
I notice that there's a little blue
| | 01:26 | button underneath Safari.
| | 01:28 | This indicates that that
application is still live.
| | 01:32 | I see the same kind of thing under the
Finder indicating that the Finder is live.
| | 01:37 | So I click on Safari.
| | 01:39 | I closed the window before, but
Safari knows I want to surf the web, so it
| | 01:43 | creates a new window.
| | 01:45 | Now the thing about this red close
button is it's not necessarily consistent.
| | 01:49 | So let's quit Safari.
| | 01:50 | I will go back to Spotlight to launch
another application and this will be TextEdit.
| | 01:58 | Launch it.
| | 02:00 | I have a TextEdit file that happens to be open.
| | 02:02 | I will click on that to close it.
| | 02:04 | I will be prompted to save.
| | 02:09 | That's fine. I've saved and TextEdit is active.
| | 02:13 | Now watch what happens when I click on
the desktop, and the way you will be able
| | 02:17 | to tell is watch this TextEdit icon
right here in the dock. TextEdit quits.
| | 02:25 | This doesn't happen for all applications.
| | 02:27 | It happens for some of them.
| | 02:29 | So it's a matter of you using the
application and finding out what kind
| | 02:32 | of behavior it has.
| | 02:34 | Let's launch it again.
| | 02:38 | So I have one file here.
| | 02:41 | I'll save it and I'll make a second file.
| | 02:43 | The shortcut for that is Command+N.
I'll save that and the shortcut for that is
| | 02:50 | Command+S. Press Return to save.
| | 02:55 | Now I will close one of these windows.
| | 02:58 | Return to the desktop and when I
click on the desktop, TextEdit is still
| | 03:03 | open and the reason it's still open is
because there is a file that's still open there.
| | 03:07 | If however I close this by clicking on
that window, making TextEdit live, I close
| | 03:13 | that window, now I click on
the desktop, and TextEdit quits.
| | 03:19 | Let's launch Safari again
and we will launch Address Book.
| | 03:24 | Now, suppose you want to
move between applications.
| | 03:26 | The One way you can do that is again from
the dock, but you can also press Command+Tab.
| | 03:31 | This nice overlay appears and then
you can select the application you want.
| | 03:36 | So I have moved to Address Book.
| | 03:38 | Command+Tab, back to Safari,
Command+Tab, and to the Finder.
| | 03:43 | I have got a Safari window on the background.
Now what if I want to get rid of it?
| | 03:47 | Finder > Hide Others and
now I just see the Finder.
| | 03:52 | I'd like to clean things up a little bit.
| | 03:54 | So I will go to Command+Tab.
| | 03:57 | I select Address Book. Now
while the Command key is held down,
| | 04:00 | I press Q. That quits that application.
| | 04:04 | Highlight Safari, Command key is down,
press Q and I quit that application.
| | 04:10 | And again, you can confirm that these
applications have been quit, because
| | 04:14 | there is no blue dot under their icon,
and that's the basics of working and
| | 04:19 | launching applications.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sorting and starting apps with Launchpad| 00:00 | Lion includes a new feature called Launch Pad.
| | 00:03 | Like some of Lion's other new features,
this one is inspired directly by Apple's
| | 00:07 | iOS, the operating system used by
the iPhone, iPod Touch, and iPad.
| | 00:12 | To invoke you just click on
the Launch Pad in the dock.
| | 00:18 | You can also use Spotlight to launch it
by typing in its name, or if you have a
| | 00:22 | Mac with a trackpad, you can use a
four fingered gesture pinch to invoke it.
| | 00:27 | We are going to look at
gestures in another movie.
| | 00:29 | This is what you see when
you first launch Launch Pad.
| | 00:31 | You see the applications that are on your Mac.
| | 00:34 | Now if you have just one page of
these, this is pretty convenient.
| | 00:37 | They are all organized in
nice alphabetical order.
| | 00:40 | It's easy to find the default
applications that are on the Mac.
| | 00:43 | But suppose you have more
than these applications.
| | 00:45 | Well, click the mouse on the second dot. Ah!
| | 00:49 | I have more applications.
| | 00:50 | Let's look at the third dot.
| | 00:52 | Wow, even more applications!
| | 00:55 | So you can see one of the issues
that you are going to face when you are
| | 00:58 | using Launch Pad is if you have a lot
of applications, you are going to find
| | 01:02 | screen after screen of these apps and it may
be difficult to find just the one you want.
| | 01:07 | Apple provides a solution for this.
| | 01:09 | Let's go to our second screen.
| | 01:11 | I have a lot of Adobe applications here.
| | 01:13 | I am going to create a
folder for these applications.
| | 01:15 | I will just grab one application
and I am going to drag it on top of a
| | 01:20 | related application.
| | 01:21 | Drop it and you see that I've created a folder.
| | 01:25 | We haven't seen the folder yet,
but you will in just a second.
| | 01:27 | At this point I can name this if I choose.
| | 01:30 | By double-clicking on it, I will type
in Adobe, Return, and then click in launch
| | 01:37 | bar and the folder disappears.
| | 01:39 | You can tell this is a folder by this icon.
| | 01:42 | You get this little square.
| | 01:44 | It's kind of gray and you see
a couple of icons within it.
| | 01:46 | Now I can drag other applications in there.
| | 01:50 | Try and target it, and there
it is, and that's added as well.
| | 01:54 | I can keep repeating this procedure
until I have added all the applications
| | 01:57 | I like to the folder.
| | 01:58 | Another thing you do in Launch Pad is
change the order of the applications.
| | 02:02 | We will go back to our first page.
| | 02:03 | This is alphabetical, but I
can change where things are.
| | 02:06 | Take Calculator and I am going to
move it over here next to Keynote.
| | 02:09 | iDVD is going over here next to the
App Store, and so on and so forth.
| | 02:14 | I can change the order of things if I like.
| | 02:17 | And to launch an application is very simple.
| | 02:19 | All you have to do is
click on it and here is iCal.
| | 02:24 | You notice when I do that
that Launch Pad disappears.
| | 02:27 | Click iCal and I go back to
the regular Finder interface.
| | 02:32 | Again, if I want it back,
Launch Pad and there I am.
| | 02:36 | Here is one other trick.
| | 02:37 | Let's go back to our second page
where all those Adobe applications are.
| | 02:40 | I am going to click and hold on an
application until they all start shaking.
| | 02:45 | Now when I add this to my Adobe
folder, but I don't really want to see
| | 02:49 | the entire folder, and all I have to do is
let go and it's just added to the folder.
| | 02:53 | Let's see if we can scoot it out
of the way and there you are.
| | 02:59 | To get rid of shaky mode, click on
the desktop and they stop shaking.
| | 03:04 | Another way to get out of Launch Pad is
just to hit the Esc key on the keyboard
| | 03:08 | and it disappears, and there
you have it, the basics of Launch Pad.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing workspaces with Mission Control| 00:00 | Mission Control is another new Lion feature.
| | 00:03 | If you have been using Mac for a while,
you may recognize some of its features,
| | 00:06 | its combination of Spaces and Expose.
| | 00:09 | Again, this is another feature that
you'll find helpful to invoke via gesture,
| | 00:13 | but for now we are going to use a mouse.
| | 00:14 | We will look at gestures
and Mission Control later.
| | 00:18 | To launch Mission Control just click on
the Mission Control icon in the dock or
| | 00:22 | you can press F3 on a standard keyboard.
| | 00:26 | You see two windows by
default, representing two workspaces.
| | 00:30 | Dashboard is on the left and
the Finder is on the right.
| | 00:35 | Click on Dashboard and we move
into something called Dashboard.
| | 00:39 | This is where they keep little utilities,
things like clocks and calculators and weather.
| | 00:43 | We are going to look at
Dashboard in a separate movie.
| | 00:46 | For now I am just showing you that
you can see it within Mission Control.
| | 00:49 | I am going to press F3 on my
keyboard and go back to Mission Control.
| | 00:53 | If I want to go back to the Finder
environment, I select that window at the
| | 00:57 | very top of the Mission Control window,
click on it, and I move to that work environment.
| | 01:03 | Press F3 and we are back to Mission Control.
| | 01:07 | That's helpful enough, being able to
toggle between Dashboard and my regular
| | 01:10 | workspace, but what if I
want to add another workspace?
| | 01:13 | That's easy enough.
| | 01:14 | I drag the mouse to the right and I click
on the plus button that appears to the right.
| | 01:21 | Now I have an additional work environment.
| | 01:23 | So I have got Dashboard work
environment 1 and work environment 2.
| | 01:29 | What good does this do me?
| | 01:30 | Well, I'll click on work environment
2 and I will click and hold on iPhoto.
| | 01:36 | Select Options and you see
I have an Assign To command.
| | 01:41 | This allows me to sign this
application to a particular work environment.
| | 01:48 | I'm going to assign it to the
desktop that I currently have, and now I
| | 01:52 | will launch iPhoto.
| | 01:55 | Now, here is iPhoto.
| | 01:56 | I will go back to Mission Control.
| | 01:58 | I will select the first work
environment, and where is iPhoto?
| | 02:03 | Well, it's not in this work environment.
| | 02:04 | It's in the other one.
| | 02:06 | F3, work environment 2, and there is iPhoto.
| | 02:12 | F3, let's add another work environment.
| | 02:17 | This time I am going to
have Safari be in this one.
| | 02:20 | Options > Assign To > This
Desktop. Launch Safari, F3.
| | 02:28 | Here is Safari in work environment 3,
iPhoto is in the second work environment,
| | 02:36 | nothing in the first one, and once
again, here's Dashboard. Back to F3.
| | 02:42 | Let's go back to Safari.
| | 02:45 | I am going to click this double arrow
button and that gives me full screen app mode.
| | 02:52 | I will go to F3 and you notice
when I hover my cursor over that work
| | 02:56 | environment nothing happens.
| | 02:58 | If I hover it over the third work
environment I see this little x. This little x
| | 03:03 | indicates that I can quit that environment.
| | 03:07 | Click it and it's gone.
| | 03:09 | Now why doesn't that work with Safari?
| | 03:11 | The reason is, and we return to that
environment, is that I have to be out
| | 03:14 | of Full Screen mode. Back to F3.
| | 03:21 | Now I put my cursor there and
I can quit that environment.
| | 03:24 | So all I am saying is that if you go
into Full Screen mode, you have to reduce
| | 03:29 | the window back to Standard view,
and then you can quit that environment.
| | 03:34 | Now I'll click the Desktop, and you
notice when I do that Safari still exists.
| | 03:39 | It's just moved to the next environment over.
| | 03:41 | Now let's go back to F3, so we
can look at our environments again.
| | 03:44 | So what exactly good is this?
| | 03:47 | Well, the good of it is that you
can set up separate environments for
| | 03:50 | different kinds of tasks.
| | 03:52 | So say for example you want
to organize your personal life.
| | 03:55 | Well, in that environment you may add
Mail, Address Book, and iCal for example.
| | 04:01 | Another environment may be
just for your iLife work.
| | 04:03 | So for that environment you may add
iMovie and iPhoto and maybe even iTunes.
| | 04:08 | Now, when you want to move from task
to task, instead of having to close a
| | 04:12 | bunch of applications and then open
them again, instead, you could just move to
| | 04:16 | a different work environment and Mission
Control is very convenient for doing exactly that.
| | 04:20 | So we will return to our main work environment.
| | 04:25 | I am going to quit Safari, I am going
to quit iPhoto, and here we are back in
| | 04:30 | the standard Finder view. And
that's our look at Mission Control.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using trackpad gestures| 00:00 | Lion has a number of new features,
but one of the most important is the
| | 00:04 | expanded use of gestures.
| | 00:06 | With the help of a trackpad, either one
on your Apple laptop or on a device like
| | 00:10 | Apple's Magic Trackpad, you can
control your Mac in a variety of ways.
| | 00:14 | In the next few minutes we will look
at some of the most important gestures.
| | 00:18 | Now before we do that I am going to
configure the Trackpad System Preference.
| | 00:24 | So I will go up to System Preferences.
| | 00:25 | I go to Trackpad and here are the preferences.
| | 00:34 | Now the first preference is off by default.
| | 00:37 | This is called Tap to click.
| | 00:38 | Now watch what happens when I enable it.
| | 00:43 | Go over to my Desktop and then rather
than clicking on the hard drive, all I
| | 00:47 | have to do is tap on it and
that's just like clicking.
| | 00:51 | Now sometimes I tend to leave my hand on
the trackpad, so I don't like this gesture on.
| | 00:56 | So I am going to turn it off.
| | 00:57 | There is another gesture that I am going
to show you later called Three finger drag.
| | 01:03 | So I will turn that on.
| | 01:04 | We will go to Scroll & Zoom tab.
| | 01:08 | Now by default Apple has something
called Natural Scrolling turned on. This is a
| | 01:15 | new feature in Lion.
| | 01:17 | Now once upon a time when you scrolled,
a page would move in a certain direction.
| | 01:22 | Apple has changed that. They
have reversed the direction.
| | 01:24 | So now when you scroll, the page moves
in the opposite direction that it used to.
| | 01:29 | Now why did they do this?
| | 01:30 | It's because of iOS devices like the
iPad, the iPod Touch, and the iPhone.
| | 01:36 | When you scroll a certain direction it
moves a certain way on those devices.
| | 01:40 | They've made that direction
scrolling work the same way on the Mac OS.
| | 01:45 | Some people like it; other
people don't care for it so much.
| | 01:48 | I'm an old-time Mac user so I
prefer to turn that option off.
| | 01:54 | So I will go ahead and turn it off
here, and we will go to More Gestures.
| | 02:00 | There's also App Expose.
| | 02:04 | This is something else I am going to show you
in another movie, so I am going to turn that on.
| | 02:07 | Now we can get out of the System Preferences.
| | 02:11 | So the first gesture I am going
to show you is the single click.
| | 02:15 | To highlight my Macintosh hard drive,
all I do is click once on the trackpad.
| | 02:22 | Now if you have a mouse with more
than one button, you're used to a gesture
| | 02:26 | called right click, or if you have a single
button you hold down the Control key and you click.
| | 02:32 | So I tap with two fingers and
I pull up a contextual menu.
| | 02:36 | This works on the Desktop as
well as within Applications.
| | 02:42 | Now let's add one more finger.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to open a new Finder window,
which is Command+N, place my cursor at
| | 02:49 | the top of the window, and then with
three fingers I can move that window around.
| | 02:54 | I am going to go to the View menu,
enable Show Status Bar, and that shows the
| | 03:03 | status bar at the bottom of the window.
| | 03:05 | With this exposed, I can also take
three fingers and drag the window this way,
| | 03:11 | and we will close that window.
| | 03:15 | You can also use this gesture
to drag other objects around.
| | 03:18 | You can drag an item out of a window
and onto the Mac's desktop for example.
| | 03:22 | So, new Finder window, select Documents,
I'll select a few documents, and then I can
| | 03:31 | three finger drag these to
the desktop, if I want to.
| | 03:35 | I don't. I am going to put
them right back where they were.
| | 03:38 | You can also go to a document and
you can select things within a document
| | 03:44 | using three fingers.
| | 03:45 | Here is Microsoft Word.
| | 03:49 | I place my cursor at the beginning
of this text and with three fingers I
| | 03:52 | can select that text.
| | 03:55 | Return to the desktop.
| | 03:58 | You can also use three fingers to define a word.
| | 04:00 | So we will go to Safari.
| | 04:01 | So I will find a word I want to define.
| | 04:05 | Let's find controversy.
Double tap with three fingers.
| | 04:11 | It highlights in yellow and I see the
Dictionary definition as well as thesaurus entries.
| | 04:16 | I will move back to the Finder. Note the
dictionary is not supported in all applications.
| | 04:22 | To zoom-in on a page in a compatible
application, just stretch two fingers.
| | 04:27 | So go back to Safari, stretch and to
shrink it down, pinch with those two fingers.
| | 04:37 | I can also do something called Smart Zoom,
which is to tap with two fingers in a
| | 04:41 | column of text. And double tap again
and we are back to the normal view.
| | 04:49 | You can also zoom in an application like iPhoto.
| | 04:51 | Here is our picture.
| | 04:53 | We will stretch, zoom in,
and we pinch to zoom out.
| | 05:02 | You can also rotate images in iPhoto by
using the rotate gesture, which is two
| | 05:06 | fingers, as if you're turning a knob.
| | 05:08 | So I rotate it left and I rotate
right and back to the Desktop.
| | 05:17 | But we are not done yet.
| | 05:18 | You know that you can swipe two fingers
up and down to scroll a page, but swiping
| | 05:23 | those two fingers to this
side invokes actions too.
| | 05:26 | Let's go to Microsoft Word.
| | 05:30 | I am going to scale this document down a
little bit so it goes off the side of the page.
| | 05:34 | If I take my two fingers and move them
to the side, you see that I can scroll to
| | 05:40 | the right, and of course going
up and down, I scroll up and down.
| | 05:47 | You can also use two figure gestures in
Safari to move back and forward pages.
| | 05:51 | So we go over to Safari, two fingers to
the left and I have gone back a page.
| | 05:58 | Two fingers to the right
and I move forward a page.
| | 06:02 | You can also use this gesture move
through multiple files when you're opening
| | 06:06 | those files in Quick Look.
| | 06:08 | So I will make a new Finder window,
Documents folder, I'll select a few files,
| | 06:16 | press the Spacebar, and there's Quick Look.
| | 06:20 | So with my two fingers, I can move
through different documents within Quick Look.
| | 06:32 | By default, if you swipe four fingers
to the side, you move between apps that
| | 06:36 | have been expanded to full screen.
| | 06:38 | You can still see this effect
because of the Dashboard screen.
| | 06:41 | So I will take my four fingers and
swipe to the left and there's the
| | 06:45 | Dashboard environment.
| | 06:47 | I want to return to the Finder environment.
| | 06:49 | Four fingers, swipe to the right.
| | 06:51 | If you have multiple workspaces you
can flip between them in this way too.
| | 06:57 | To enter Mission Control, which is
something we talked about in another movie,
| | 07:00 | swipe up with four fingers and to
leave Mission Control swipe down.
| | 07:09 | You can also use four fingers to
invoke App Expose, and it works like this.
| | 07:12 | You are in application that has multiple
documents open and you want to see all
| | 07:17 | of the document windows.
| | 07:18 | Swipe down with four fingers
and you see the document windows.
| | 07:21 | So I can choose either one of these
documents simply by clicking on it.
| | 07:26 | Another four finger gesture-- well
actually three fingers and a thumb-- is
| | 07:30 | used to show Launch Pad.
| | 07:32 | Just pinch with your thumb and
three fingers and there's Launch Pad.
| | 07:39 | To make it go away just
spread those same digits.
| | 07:42 | And finally, to show the desktop when
you aren't in Launch Pad, just spread with
| | 07:46 | your thumb and three fingers.
| | 07:47 | So I will go back to Word.
| | 07:48 | Now to show the desktop I
spread with thumb and three fingers.
| | 07:53 | There's the Desktop and now by
pinching back, I am in my application.
| | 07:57 | Now you can apply different
gestures to some of these actions.
| | 08:01 | To do that you go to the Trackpad
System Preference and look for any gestures
| | 08:08 | that have a triangle next to them.
| | 08:10 | Click on the triangle and you see that
you have alternate gestures that you can
| | 08:13 | apply. And that's gestures on the Mac.
| | 08:17 | At first they may seem a little foreign
to you, but after a while you'll start
| | 08:20 | to depend on some of them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using mouse gestures| 00:00 | The trackpad isn't the only
Apple device that can use gestures.
| | 00:03 | There's also Apple's
current wireless Magic Mouse.
| | 00:07 | Like the trackpad, the Magic
Mouse has a touch sensitive surface.
| | 00:11 | Apple uses that service to
take advantage of gestures.
| | 00:14 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:15 | The first thing we're going to do is go
back to System Preferences, select the
| | 00:22 | Mouse preference, and here once again at the
very top, you see Scroll direction: natural.
| | 00:28 | Now on the trackpad, this Scroll
direction:natural stuff works pretty well.
| | 00:33 | it's actually intuitive,
particularly if we've used an iOS device.
| | 00:37 | However, on the mouse, the analogy
breaks down a little bit and some
| | 00:40 | people aren't comfortable.
| | 00:42 | I'm one of those people, so
I'm going to turn that off.
| | 00:45 | However, I always turn on Secondary click,
because that gives me the right-click
| | 00:49 | option when I'm using my mouse.
| | 00:51 | So I flip over to the desktop, click
once on the right side of the mouse, and
| | 00:56 | there's my contextual menu.
| | 01:02 | So what else can we do?
| | 01:04 | Well, there is smart zoom.
| | 01:05 | So we're back in Safari. I'll find a
column of text and I double tap with
| | 01:11 | one finger to zoom in.
| | 01:14 | I'll double tap with one
figure to zoom back out again.
| | 01:19 | Now while we're in Safari,
let's move between pages.
| | 01:22 | To do that, take one finger and
swipe to left to go back and swipe to the
| | 01:28 | right to go forward.
| | 01:31 | The other thing you can do with this
swiping, for example, take two fingers,
| | 01:35 | swipe to the left and you move environments.
| | 01:37 | So now here I am in Dashboard. I
swipe to the right with two fingers and
| | 01:42 | I'm back in the Finder.
| | 01:45 | One more gesture: lightly tap twice
with two fingers on the mouse and you
| | 01:51 | enter mission control.
| | 01:52 | To get out, lightly tap two fingers again.
| | 01:56 | Now I mention this lightly stuff,
because if you tap too hard, it'll register
| | 02:00 | as a click and Mission
Control won't appear and that's it.
| | 02:04 | The Magic Mouse supports fewer gestures
than the Magic Trackpad and it also has
| | 02:08 | a smaller surface, which makes some of
these gestures difficult to perform if
| | 02:13 | you have large hands.
| | 02:14 | Still if you prefer a mouse to a
trackpad and would like to take advantage of
| | 02:18 | Lion's gestures, the
Magic Mouse is the way to go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding file saving in Lion| 00:00 | There are couples of new Lion features
that have to do with saving your files.
| | 00:04 | One is called Versions and the
other is called Restore Windows.
| | 00:08 | For applications that support it, Lion
saves your documents when you open it.
| | 00:12 | Then once an hour, Lions
saves the version of the file.
| | 00:15 | You can also create a version by
choosing Save a Version from the File menu.
| | 00:19 | So let's take a look at that in TextEdit.
| | 00:25 | So here's a new TextEdit window.
| | 00:27 | Command+S to save it. I'll
call that Test 1. Return to save.
| | 00:35 | Now I'll edit the document some more.
| | 00:40 | Now let's look in the File menu.
| | 00:44 | There is now a new command called Save
a Version. Not Save, but Save a Version.
| | 00:49 | Select that or I could press Command+S.
Now I've saved a version of the file.
| | 00:55 | How is that reflected?
| | 00:56 | Let's go up to the top of a
window and you see the small triangle.
| | 01:01 | I click on that and I have the
option to Browse All Versions.
| | 01:05 | I'll select that and up comes this
cool space-age-like interface that looks a
| | 01:11 | bit like time machine which is
something we're going to look at later in the
| | 01:15 | course and that's Apple's backup utility.
| | 01:17 | So on the left side, we see the
current version of the document.
| | 01:20 | We also see the current
version of the document on the right.
| | 01:23 | However, if I click the previous version
behind it, I see the first saved version.
| | 01:29 | Another way to get there is go
to the right side of the window.
| | 01:34 | The last entry is the most recently
saved version. The one previous to that is
| | 01:40 | the prior saved version.
| | 01:43 | So suppose I want to go back to the
original version. All I have to do is click
| | 01:47 | Restore and that's the version that returns.
| | 01:51 | Now suppose I want to see the updated version.
| | 01:54 | I'll go back, Browse All Versions, here
comes the interface, and here's the most
| | 02:01 | recently saved version I can
restore to that and there we are.
| | 02:07 | This is a great feature when you've
accidentally edited a file or you want to
| | 02:11 | return to a previous
version to see what you've done.
| | 02:14 | Now a quick TextEdit, Command+Q. Now
let's take a look at the Restore Windows
| | 02:19 | feature. I'll open a few
applications. ere's Safari. What the heck.
| | 02:25 | We'll open the TextEdit
again, and there is my file.
| | 02:28 | I'll choose from the Apple menu, Restart.
| | 02:32 | When I do this, you see an option that
says Reopen windows when logging back in.
| | 02:38 | I'm not going to do that right now.
| | 02:39 | I'll hit Cancel because I don't want this to restart.
| | 02:42 | But what this means is when I restart
my Mac, both of these applications will
| | 02:47 | open again and they will show me the
documents that are open when I restarted my Mac.
| | 02:51 | Now let's look at Shut Down. Same idea.
| | 02:56 | Reopen windows when logging back in.
| | 03:00 | So this is a good feature if you want
to maintain your work environment, you
| | 03:03 | need to restart your Mac.
| | 03:05 | That way you don't have to restart all
those applications again and find out
| | 03:08 | where you were when you
last restarted or shut down.
| | 03:11 | This Restore feature can also work
when quitting and launching applications.
| | 03:15 | So go to the Apple menu > System
Preferences > General, and at the bottom
| | 03:21 | here you see this option that reads
Restore windows when quitting and re-opening apps.
| | 03:26 | Let's see how that works.
| | 03:28 | Quit System Preferences. Let's save this.
| | 03:36 | I'll create a new file without saving
it and then I'm going to quit TextEdit.
| | 03:44 | Now let's launch TextEdit
again and here are both files.
| | 03:50 | You notice the untitled window is still here.
| | 03:52 | This is the document that I just created,
but I didn't save it, because it was
| | 03:56 | held in a saved state in the background.
| | 03:58 | Again, a great feature if you happen
to work on a document, you quit the
| | 04:03 | application, you launch it again, and
back comes the work that you're working on
| | 04:07 | even though you may not
have saved that document.
| | 04:10 | Something to note about this.
| | 04:11 | This feature works only with
those applications that are written to
| | 04:14 | take advantage of it.
| | 04:15 | So it works perfectly well with TextEdit.
| | 04:17 | As you saw with Safari, it brought us
back to the state we were in before, but
| | 04:21 | some third-party apps may
not currently work with it.
| | 04:24 | Hopefully, they'll be updated so they will.
| | 04:26 | Quit TextEdit, quit Safari, and now
we're back to the Finder. And that's the
| | 04:32 | lowdown on Versions and Restore Windows.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Text to Speech| 00:00 | Let's take a look at Text to Speech,
a very cool feature found in Lion.
| | 00:04 | Go to System Preferences,
we're going to go to Speech.
| | 00:08 | Before we go to the Text to
Speech, I just want to mention the
| | 00:12 | Speech Recognition tab.
| | 00:13 | It would be a really great thing if we
could talk to our Macs and they would do
| | 00:16 | exactly what we want and I hope that
happen someday, but currently I'm afraid
| | 00:20 | that Lion's speech recognition
isn't quite capable of doing this.
| | 00:23 | This really is I hit or
miss feature. I've tried it.
| | 00:26 | Sometimes it works; other times
it doesn't work quite so well.
| | 00:29 | Feel free to experiment with it if
you like, but I find it much easier to
| | 00:33 | control my Mac with a
keyboard, mouse and trackpad.
| | 00:37 | Let's move to Text to Speech.
| | 00:39 | Your Mac can talk to you.
| | 00:42 | Before we play Alex, I'm going to
give you an idea what Mac's used to sound
| | 00:45 | like when they talk to. Here is Bruce.
| | 00:46 | (Bruce: I sure like being inside this fancy computer.)
| | 00:50 | As much as Bruce may like being inside
this computer, I hate listening to him,
| | 00:54 | because he sounds like a computer.
| | 00:56 | Now check out Alex.
| | 00:58 | (Alex: Most people recognize me by my voice.)
| | 01:02 | And the reason they recognize Alex by
his voice is because it sounds so human.
| | 01:06 | This is a very nice feature if you want
your computer to read things to you or
| | 01:11 | for example you have the option to
have it announce alerts or announce when an
| | 01:15 | application requires your attention.
| | 01:17 | But Alex isn't the only
natural sounding voice on your Mac.
| | 01:20 | This is new with Lion. Go to Customize
and you'll find that they're not only
| | 01:26 | English voices here, but there are
also voices for other languages.
| | 01:30 | So if you use your Mac and use a
different language, you'll get a voice that
| | 01:34 | sounds similar to your language instead
of a computer resounding voice. But you
| | 01:39 | could also find accented English voices.
| | 01:42 | So let's move down the list and here's this
voice and you can audition all your voices here.
| | 01:49 | (Female voice: Hello, my name is
Karen. I'm an Australian English voice.)
| | 01:53 | I very much like Karen's voice.
| | 01:55 | So I'm going to use that and click
OK and she now appears in my list
| | 02:02 | of available voices.
| | 02:03 | When you add some of these voices they
may need to be downloaded from the Internet.
| | 02:08 | Some of these very natural sounding
voices can be about 450 megabytes.
| | 02:12 | So be aware of that before you
download one of these things.
| | 02:16 | So we've already heard her voice.
| | 02:17 | Now where can we hear it elsewhere?
| | 02:19 | Well, let's go to my Documents folder.
| | 02:23 | I'm going to open this TextEdit file,
highlight the text, from the Edit menu,
| | 02:32 | choose Speech > Start Speaking.
| | 02:34 | (Karen: Now is the time for all good people to come
to the aid of their party. What party? The OS X Lion party!)
| | 02:42 | Right! So when you're in Text to Speech and
you choose a system voice, you can have
| | 02:47 | applications such as TextEdit and other
supported applications read the document to you.
| | 02:53 | Now, of course, this is helpful to
people with vision issues, but you may get
| | 02:57 | tired of looking at the computer screen
and you may want your computer to read
| | 03:00 | something to you and this is the way you do it.
| | 03:02 | So Text to Speech on Lion,
new voices that sound very natural.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Installing software| 00:00 | Lion comes with some great software,
but it doesn't have everything that you
| | 00:05 | need or certainly not
everything that you might want.
| | 00:07 | So how do you get new
software and how do you install it?
| | 00:10 | That's what I'm going to show you now.
| | 00:12 | Apple would love it if you would click
on the Apple and choose App Store and
| | 00:16 | honestly, App Store has some terrific
software in it and it's organized in
| | 00:20 | various ways. Featured.
| | 00:22 | We're going to look at Top Charts.
| | 00:23 | I'm going to find a popular
free app, how about Evernote?
| | 00:29 | You see where it says Free.
| | 00:31 | That tells you what it costs.
| | 00:32 | Absolutely nothing!
| | 00:33 | However, if you're going to buy
something, up here we're looking at
| | 00:36 | Aperture, that's $80.
| | 00:38 | So click on the Price, Install
App, and the app will install.
| | 00:44 | So Launch Pad appears and it
shows you the application launching.
| | 00:49 | You see the icon bouncing up and down
that indicates that something has been
| | 00:54 | downloaded to Launch Pad.
| | 00:56 | At this point, all I have to do to run
the program is single click it and it
| | 01:00 | launches. And we'll quit the App Store.
| | 01:05 | Again, the App Store has some
great software, but it doesn't have
| | 01:08 | everything available to you.
| | 01:09 | So you may wish to go out onto the
Internet and find software there, and we can
| | 01:13 | do that by going to Safari.
| | 01:17 | Let's get a copy of Firefox.
| | 01:20 | This is another browser that's
similar to Safari. Click on Download.
| | 01:26 | When we do this, up pops the software
and it will appear in our Downloads list.
| | 01:35 | When it becomes available, you see the
Downloads folder pop-up and down a little bit,
| | 01:39 | and we'll look in that folder
and sure enough, here is Firefox.
| | 01:43 | I'm going to open that folder.
And this is called a disk image.
| | 01:48 | Now here's one way to think about a disk image.
| | 01:50 | Imagine you hold in your hand a CD.
| | 01:53 | That's your disk image.
| | 01:55 | Now you can't play the music on
this disk image just from your hand.
| | 01:59 | You have to put it into something,
so you have to put it into a player.
| | 02:03 | So you have to get the music out
of the disk in order to play it.
| | 02:06 | That's kind of what the disk image is about.
| | 02:08 | So I'm going to double-click on this disk
image and inside, you'll find the good stuff.
| | 02:13 | So I'm inside the image now and
here's Firefox, my application.
| | 02:18 | Some application installers will do what
they've done with Firefox, which is very nice.
| | 02:22 | They show you an image of the
application, a little arrow, and then an image of
| | 02:28 | your Applications folder.
| | 02:30 | To install this application, as hinted
in the picture, all I'd have to do is
| | 02:35 | click, drag on the application, bring
it over to the Applications folder, and
| | 02:39 | then it's installed.
| | 02:41 | However, you may not see this picture
and if you don't, what are you going to do?
| | 02:46 | Well, you have to get into
your Applications folder somehow.
| | 02:48 | That's pretty easy to do.
| | 02:49 | Find a window, look for Applications
in the sidebar, and drag the application
| | 02:55 | there and that's just what I'll do now.
| | 02:56 | So I'll take Firefox, drag it to
Applications, let go, and it's installed.
| | 03:02 | So I look into Applications, there's
Firefox. Launch it by double-clicking on it.
| | 03:10 | Yes, indeed I do want to open it,
and at that point I would go through
| | 03:16 | configuring Firefox, but that's
not what this course is really about.
| | 03:20 | So I'll quit Firefox, close these
windows, quit Safari. You're done installing,
| | 03:27 | but that disk image is still mounted.
| | 03:29 | So let's open a new Finder window. If we
scroll down, we'll see devices, and here
| | 03:35 | is the Firefox disk image.
| | 03:37 | To eject it, click on the Eject arrow
and it's gone. And that's locating and
| | 03:44 | installing applications under Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Setting Up the SystemPersonalizing the interface| 00:00 | As you watch this course, you may be
thinking, hey, my Desktop doesn't look like that!
| | 00:04 | What's the deal?
| | 00:05 | The deal is that I've customized this Mac's
interface to better suit the way I'd like to work.
| | 00:10 | The Mac offers plenty of ways to
customize its interface, some which may suit
| | 00:14 | me better than you.
| | 00:15 | Let's look at some of those ways by
working through the changes I make when
| | 00:19 | configuring a new Mac OS installation.
| | 00:21 | Now first thing, I find that this
desktop is a little bit too busy, so what I'm
| | 00:26 | going to do is right-click on the desktop.
| | 00:29 | Now if you have a single button mouse,
the way you can do this is press the
| | 00:32 | Control key and then click and
you get this contextual menu.
| | 00:36 | I'm going to choose Change Desktop Background.
| | 00:39 | I'll go to Solid Colors and I'm going to
check this second blue here. Ah, much calmer.
| | 00:47 | Now you notice the menu bar, it's kind
of light blue and the reason is because
| | 00:51 | it's translucent. The
background is shining through.
| | 00:54 | I preferred the standard menu bar,
which is kind of this gray color. I find it
| | 00:58 | easier to read, so I turn that off.
| | 01:01 | I'll click Show All in System
Preferences and now let's go to Trackpad
| | 01:07 | and Scroll & Zoom.
| | 01:08 | Notice this first option,
Scroll direction: natural.
| | 01:12 | Now if you have an iOS device like an
iPad or an iPod touch or an iPhone,
| | 01:17 | this scrolling direction is going to look
natural to you because that's the way it
| | 01:21 | works on iOS devices.
| | 01:23 | However, this is a change for the Mac OS.
This works in the opposite direction
| | 01:28 | than it used to work.
| | 01:30 | Now you may be perfectly happy
trying this-- and you really should.
| | 01:33 | it's worth trying it if you have
a trackpad to see how you like it.
| | 01:37 | If you don't care for it you can
turn it off as I'm going to right now.
| | 01:41 | You'll notice that the illustration
on the right changes to reflect the way
| | 01:45 | it's going to work.
| | 01:47 | So again, give it a shot. If you like it,
great; if you don't you can turn it off.
| | 01:52 | Now go back to Show All and while we're
talking about scrolling, let's go to the mouse.
| | 01:56 | Point & Click and again notice
that you have the option to enable or
| | 02:02 | disable the natural scrolling.
| | 02:06 | Again, the illustration to the
right shows you how that's done.
| | 02:09 | Again, I'm going to leave it unchecked.
| | 02:14 | Show All. Let's go to the General System
Preference, and for this, I'm going to launch Safari.
| | 02:20 | Now here's my Safari page.
| | 02:25 | Watch the right side of this page as I scroll.
| | 02:28 | As I scroll, the scrollbar appears and you
see this gray thumb within the scrollbar.
| | 02:37 | I stop scrolling and it disappears.
| | 02:41 | Now this is the option that's
used when you're using a trackpad.
| | 02:44 | I'll go back to System Preferences and
here in General, it says Show scroll bars.
| | 02:52 | The default option is automatically
based on the input device and what I've just
| | 02:55 | shown you, is the default for that
input device which is a trackpad.
| | 02:59 | So when you're scrolling on a trackpad,
you will see the scrollbars as long as
| | 03:03 | you are scrolling and then they'll disappear.
| | 03:05 | If you're using a mouse, however,
you'll always see the scrollbars.
| | 03:08 | Now I'm an old-time Mac user and I
prefer to see the scrollbars all the time and
| | 03:13 | all I have to do to make
that happen is to select Always.
| | 03:17 | We'll go back to Safari and you see
here's the scrollbar, I can drag it, I can
| | 03:22 | stop dragging, and it's
still there. And quit Safari.
| | 03:27 | Now let's look at
configuring the Finder windows.
| | 03:33 | Here's a new Finder window.
| | 03:34 | Now one thing you're going to notice is
if you're an old-time Mac user that your
| | 03:37 | User folder is no longer here.
| | 03:40 | Now your User folder is where
Mac OS X stores all your stuff.
| | 03:44 | So your movies, your music, your
pictures are going to be found in your User
| | 03:49 | folder. So how you do bring that back?
| | 03:51 | Go to Finder > Preferences > Sidebar, and
then you can choose to enable your User folder.
| | 03:59 | So you do that and here's my User folder.
| | 04:05 | I select it and now I can see all the
stuff that's stored within my user folder.
| | 04:11 | Go back to Finder
Preferences. Now let's click General.
| | 04:15 | One another thing I like to do is to
be able to see the hard drives that are
| | 04:18 | connected to my Mac, because
sometimes I'd like to navigate that way.
| | 04:22 | Enable hard drives and here is
the hard drive for my Macintosh.
| | 04:26 | I'm going to create a new Finder window and
notice that it opens by default to all my files.
| | 04:35 | This is an okay way to view your files,
unless you have a ton of files, in which
| | 04:39 | case it's not really all that helpful.
| | 04:41 | So in this case, I'm going to change the
behavior of new Finder windows so that
| | 04:45 | they always show my Home folder.
| | 04:48 | I'll show you how this works.
| | 04:49 | Again, we'll close this Finder window,
open a new one, and there are the
| | 04:55 | contents of my Home folder because I've
configured the Finder to show it that way.
| | 05:00 | Now let's take a look at the dock.
| | 05:02 | Here in the dock, we see two
things that are called stacks.
| | 05:07 | This is the Documents stack
and this is the Downloads stack.
| | 05:11 | Essentially what these are, are
folders and within them are documents.
| | 05:15 | So I'll click and hold on that.
| | 05:17 | In the Documents folder, it's
showing me something called Grid View.
| | 05:20 | When a folder in the dock has a lot of
files in it, they appear in Grid View.
| | 05:24 | This is great when you've got maybe 10
to 20 files, but let's say you have 150.
| | 05:29 | This isn't such a great view.
| | 05:32 | When you choose instead Downloads, it's
going to show then to me and something
| | 05:37 | called a fan, and so you have five or
six folders, so you get a fan out this way.
| | 05:41 | This is not a view that I prefer.
| | 05:42 | Instead what I prefer is a
folder that's viewed in List View.
| | 05:47 | So I right-click on this, I choose
Folder and now it looks like a folder.
| | 05:53 | I'll do the same thing for the
other one, and now I change the view.
| | 05:58 | Right-click and choose List.
| | 06:04 | So to view its contents, all you have
to do is click on it and here you see the
| | 06:08 | contents, presented in List View, and
then I can simply select one of these
| | 06:14 | things and it launches in
the host application, Preview.
| | 06:20 | One last thing with a dock, I find
it takes up a little more room on my
| | 06:24 | screen than I care for.
| | 06:25 | So I go to the Apple menu, I choose
Dock and Turn Hiding On, and then it
| | 06:31 | disappears. But I need my dock. No problem!
| | 06:34 | Take your cursor down to the bottom,
there is the dock, do what you need to do
| | 06:38 | with it, and when you're finished,
out goes the cursor and the dock disappears.
| | 06:44 | I'm going to change one
more sitting in Finder windows.
| | 06:47 | If you're an old-time Mac user, notice
at the bottom of the window there doesn't
| | 06:51 | seem to be too much there.
| | 06:52 | That's because it's missing
something that used to be there by default.
| | 06:56 | Choose View > Show Status Bar.
| | 06:59 | The status bar shows you how many items
are in a window, plus it shows you the
| | 07:03 | amount of hard drive space available to you.
| | 07:06 | I find this really helpful because I
tend to put a lot of stuff on my hard drive
| | 07:10 | and I like to know when
I'm running out of space.
| | 07:13 | Having the status bar there
helps me find out. I'll close that.
| | 07:18 | Again, you're not required to
perform any of these tweaks.
| | 07:21 | These are simply the things I do
to make a Mac more useful for me.
| | 07:24 | At the very least, you now know
how to get some of these settings.
| | 07:28 | Try the ones that make sense to you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Staying current with Software Update| 00:00 | Although you may have just installed
a fresh copy of Lion, there is a good
| | 00:03 | chance that you don't have the latest and
greatest Apple software running on your Mac.
| | 00:08 | Apple routinely offers updates to not
only its operating system, but other
| | 00:12 | applications such as those
in the iLife and iWork suites.
| | 00:16 | It also issues security updates that are
important to help keep your Mac secure.
| | 00:20 | For these reasons you should run the
software update as soon as you install Lion,
| | 00:24 | and here's how you go about it.
| | 00:26 | The Apple menu is the easiest way.
| | 00:28 | Just click on the Apple menu
and choose Software Update.
| | 00:32 | You could also go to System
Preferences, click Software Update, and click
| | 00:38 | the Check Now button.
| | 00:41 | Your computer, which has to be
connected to the Internet, will then search
| | 00:44 | Apple's update servers.
| | 00:46 | Up pops a message indicating
that there are indeed some updates.
| | 00:50 | I always check Show Details, because I
want to know what Software Update intends
| | 00:55 | to install on my Mac.
| | 00:56 | In this case we've got a few iLife
updates plus there is an update to OS X.
| | 01:01 | One thing to notice about that update to
OS X is this little triangle next to it.
| | 01:06 | That indicates that when you
install this update, you are going to have
| | 01:09 | to restart your Mac.
| | 01:11 | So whenever you see that triangle,
understand that at the end of the update you
| | 01:15 | will be asked to restart your Mac.
| | 01:16 | Now in this case, I am not
going to update them right now.
| | 01:20 | You can also update things directly
from Apple's website, and you do that by
| | 01:27 | selecting the Update menu and
then Go To Apple's Downloads Page.
| | 01:32 | That will launch Safari.
| | 01:33 | It will take you to the Downloads page
and then you can choose the updates that
| | 01:36 | you'd like to download.
| | 01:37 | But what's the advantage of doing this
if you can use Software Updates instead?
| | 01:41 | Let's suppose that you are working in
a business where you have a really fast
| | 01:44 | Internet connection and at home you
have a really slow Internet connection.
| | 01:48 | Well, as long as you have approval
from your boss naturally, it would be a
| | 01:52 | wise thing to download a huge update
on your work computer and then copy that
| | 01:57 | update to a hard drive or a key drive
or something and they take it home and
| | 02:01 | perform the update there.
| | 02:03 | This way not only can you can use your
company's bandwidth, but it happens much faster.
| | 02:07 | We are going to quit Safari, because
we are not going to do it that way.
| | 02:10 | Now note that when you install an
update, if there's an application that's
| | 02:14 | running that's going to be updated,
you are likely going to be prompted to
| | 02:17 | quit that application.
| | 02:19 | Now maybe that after you've installed updates,
there are more updates for you to install.
| | 02:23 | So what happens is Software Update
will run, it will download the latest
| | 02:27 | stuff and then it will check again to make
sure that there isn't something else you need.
| | 02:31 | So in some cases you may download a
security update for example and then
| | 02:35 | another application will become
available to you because it needed that
| | 02:40 | security update to be in place.
| | 02:42 | Software Update isn't the only place
that you can find updates for your software.
| | 02:46 | So we are going to quit Software
Update, and I will get out of System
| | 02:49 | Preferences and we are going to take a
look at the App Store, which again is
| | 02:52 | found under the Apple menu.
| | 02:56 | Now you know that you download Lion
from the App Store, but you can also
| | 02:59 | purchase apps from the App Store, and
when you purchase these apps from the App Store,
| | 03:03 | updates become available through
the App Store, through the Updates tab.
| | 03:07 | So I will click on Updates and it
turns out, hey look, there is a new version
| | 03:11 | of Angry Birds with two new episodes,
and I can hardly wait to get them, but I
| | 03:15 | won't make you sit through that download.
| | 03:16 | So we won't do it right now, but if I
wanted to, click on Update, it would
| | 03:20 | download and then I could have
the new version of angry birds.
| | 03:23 | Another cool feature here is the Purchases tab.
| | 03:27 | Click on this and you can see every
application that you've purchased through
| | 03:31 | the App Store. This is useful, because
if you have multiple computers, you can
| | 03:36 | then go to this Purchase tab and you
can download Apps that you've already
| | 03:40 | purchased on a different computer.
| | 03:42 | So for example, if I wanted a copy of
OS X Lion server that I've purchased
| | 03:47 | elsewhere and put it on this computer,
all I'd have to do is click Install.
| | 03:51 | It would install to this
computer and I'd be ready to go.
| | 03:55 | So it's a nice way to keep track of your
purchases plus be able to download them
| | 03:58 | on multiple computers, or if you've
lost that application on your current
| | 04:03 | computer, you can download it
again to your current computer.
| | 04:07 | So quit the App Store. And with that
your Mac should be completely up-to-date.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring Mail, Address Book, and iCal| 00:00 | Prior to Lion, you had to configure
Mail, Contacts, and Calendars in three
| | 00:04 | separate applications.
| | 00:06 | Much like Apples iOS, under Lion you now
configure all three in a single system preference.
| | 00:12 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:12 | We have got a System
Preferences > Mail, Contacts & Calendars.
| | 00:19 | Now if you set up an iPod touch, iPhone,
or iPad this looks familiar to you and it
| | 00:23 | works much the same way.
| | 00:24 | So all you have to do is you select a
type of account that you want to set up
| | 00:28 | and you click on it.
| | 00:29 | So for example, we are
going to set up Gmail account.
| | 00:33 | It asks for my name.
| | 00:34 | That's already filled in
because it knows who I am.
| | 00:36 | I enter my email address, and enter a password.
| | 00:42 | I then click Set Up and it verifies my account.
| | 00:46 | I have the option to
enable three services with this.
| | 00:49 | One is Mail & Notes, so I can set
up an account in my Mail client.
| | 00:53 | Calendars is another one.
| | 00:54 | So this would sync with Google
Calendars and if I wanted to set this up with
| | 00:58 | Chat this would work with Google Talk.
| | 01:01 | What I want to do right now is
disabled Chat because I don't want to use this
| | 01:05 | with Google Talk but rather use
it just with mail and calendars.
| | 01:09 | And now I click Add Account
to indeed add that account.
| | 01:12 | It then checks with Google, makes sure
everything is okay, and then it does the syncing.
| | 01:17 | Now let's watch Mail and
see if it's really there.
| | 01:21 | Click on the Mail icon, I will click Show
Tab and sure enough here's my Gmail account.
| | 01:28 | So indeed it has been added.
| | 01:30 | We are going to talk about Mail later.
| | 01:32 | I am just showing you that it does show
up in Mail when you added the account.
| | 01:35 | So let's quit Mail, Command+Q, and it's gone.
| | 01:38 | Now let's look at it in iCal.
| | 01:42 | Now there is no evidence that it's here.
| | 01:45 | However, if I go to iCal Preferences,
and then I look at Accounts, I will see
| | 01:52 | that Gmail has indeed been added.
| | 01:54 | Now let's click on the Delegation
account and in here it's going to look for any
| | 01:59 | calendars that I have in Gmail.
| | 02:01 | I have to enable those in order
for them to appear in my calendar.
| | 02:05 | In this case I have added US Holidays
and those would appear in my Calendar.
| | 02:09 | If I had other calendars that I have
added to Google, these too would appear
| | 02:12 | here and again if you want them to
appear in iCal, you have to enable them
| | 02:16 | in the Delegation tab.
| | 02:18 | That's enough in iCal, good bye,
and we are back in Mail, Contacts &
| | 02:23 | Calendars, under System Preference.
| | 02:24 | Let's click Add Account again.
| | 02:26 | You see we have other options here. One
is Microsoft Exchange, MobileMe, we have
| | 02:30 | done Gmail, Yahoo, AoL and other.
| | 02:34 | MobileMe, Yahoo, and AoL
works essentially the same way.
| | 02:38 | You will click one of these, your
name will appear and you enter your User
| | 02:43 | Name and your Password.
| | 02:44 | Lion is aware of the details of each
of these accounts, so you don't have to
| | 02:48 | enter a lot of information.
Again user name and password will do.
| | 02:52 | Exchange, however, requires that you
not only know your user name and password
| | 02:56 | but you also have to know the
name of the Exchange server.
| | 02:58 | If you have an Exchange account, which
is likely setup through your work, the IT
| | 03:03 | person that your business
can provide that information.
| | 03:06 | If you have a personal exchange
account, contact your ISP for the
| | 03:09 | necessary settings.
| | 03:11 | If you have a POP or an IMAP account
through an ISP, you click the other setting.
| | 03:16 | At this point you choose to Add
a Mail Account and click Create.
| | 03:20 | When you do this once again, you will
enter your email address and your password.
| | 03:24 | Now let's try this with a
fake address. And I click Create.
| | 03:29 | It tells me that it can't discover the setting.
| | 03:31 | So it doesn't automatically have them.
| | 03:33 | I can go on to Configure by clicking Continue.
| | 03:36 | When I do this, Mail launches and then it
asked me to fill in the proper settings.
| | 03:40 | First off I would choose whether I
have a POP or an IMAP account just so you
| | 03:44 | know the difference.
| | 03:45 | The POP account is one where your mail is
downloaded to your computer and stored there.
| | 03:50 | With an IMAP account, the mail is stored
on the server and you access it from there.
| | 03:54 | So you can access it from a variety
of devices. Again POP downloads to your
| | 03:58 | computer and you look at it there.
| | 04:00 | Here again you edit the description.
This is a good idea so you can tell one
| | 04:04 | account from another one.
| | 04:06 | So for example I might put an Example
account because that's what this is.
| | 04:10 | Then you have to know your Incoming Mail
Server, your User Name, and your Password.
| | 04:14 | You march through these settings.
| | 04:16 | What you need to know is well what's
the name of your incoming mail server.
| | 04:20 | It may be called mail.
| | 04:21 | It may be called POP.
| | 04:22 | You also have to configure the
outgoing server and this again maybe mail or
| | 04:26 | maybe something called SMTP.example.
com or whatever the name of your ISP is.
| | 04:32 | So again if you have an account that's
setup through some kind of ISP, they are
| | 04:35 | going to have the settings, they will
provide those to you and then you can just
| | 04:39 | enter them as needed.
| | 04:40 | And I will Cancel out of this and quit Mail.
| | 04:44 | And that's pretty much all you need to know
to configure Mail, Contacts and Calendars.
| | 04:48 | There are more esoteric settings for
things like adding CalDAV, CardDAV, and LDAP
| | 04:53 | accounts, some of which
will get to another movie.
| | 04:55 | In the meantime you've learned how to
set up your e-mail account which is likely
| | 04:59 | one of your first concerns.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up printers| 00:00 | Much as we talk about the paperless
office, printing documents created on our
| | 00:05 | computer is still a fact of life,
and because it is, you need to know how to add
| | 00:08 | printers to your Mac.
| | 00:10 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:11 | And to do that we go to System
Preferences, select Print & Scan, and here is the
| | 00:19 | Print & Scan window.
| | 00:22 | In order to add a printer, you click
on the plus button, choose Add Other
| | 00:27 | Printer or Scanner, or if there's a
nearby printer that is sharing via Bonjour,
| | 00:33 | which is a zero configuration setup,
it will appear in your list of printers.
| | 00:38 | We happen to have one so
let's go ahead and add that.
| | 00:41 | And the reason it shows up is
because it's connected to my local network.
| | 00:44 | If you don't yet have a printer and
you're looking for something that's this
| | 00:47 | easy to set up, what you want to look
for is a printer that's Bonjour compatible
| | 00:52 | or zero configuration compatible.
And there's our Bonjour printer.
| | 00:57 | Yeah, many of you won't have access to
this kind of printer. Oftentimes you'll
| | 01:01 | have a USB printer and we'll see how that looks.
| | 01:03 | So I'll plug a USB cable
from my printer into my Mac.
| | 01:10 | When you plug in your printer, you
may be prompted to download and install
| | 01:13 | software for this printer if it isn't
already on the Mac or sometimes this will
| | 01:17 | update the software that's
currently installed on your Mac.
| | 01:20 | So we will click Install. We Agree,
and it goes out and searches for the
| | 01:25 | software drivers for your printer.
| | 01:28 | Note that this may take a few minutes
to download the proper software, but this
| | 01:32 | is much better than the way it used to be.
| | 01:34 | Sometimes you would get a new printer,
you would connect it to your Mac, the
| | 01:37 | driver wouldn't be there, you'd have to
go to the manufacturer's website, see if
| | 01:42 | you can find the driver, download it,
hope that it was the right driver, and then
| | 01:46 | configure it that way.
| | 01:47 | This is much faster and this is a vast
improvement in setting up your printer.
| | 01:51 | When you have a couple of printers set up,
you can choose one to be the default
| | 01:55 | printer, from the Default printer pop-up menu.
| | 01:58 | In this case, we are going to make
this first D110 be our default printer.
| | 02:03 | So these are the two kind of
easy-does-it set ups for a printer.
| | 02:06 | But suppose you have something a little more
obscure, for example, you have a network printer.
| | 02:10 | In order to add that, click the plus
button and then click the IP button.
| | 02:17 | What you need in order to do this is
to have the IP address for that printer.
| | 02:21 | Oftentimes you can get this address simply
by printing out a test sheet on that printer.
| | 02:26 | So we happen to have a network
printer nearby. I am going to enter that
| | 02:30 | address and press Return.
| | 02:36 | It tells me that it is a valid and
complete address, and now it's going to
| | 02:39 | look on the network to see if it can find
that printer, and sure enough it did find it.
| | 02:44 | Here we have this now Aficio MP C4500 printer.
| | 02:50 | One thing you want to do before you click
the Add button to add this printer is name it.
| | 02:55 | Right now you are only named for the IP
address and most people have no idea what that is.
| | 02:59 | So we are going to call that Upstairs printer,
click Add, and it will set up the printer.
| | 03:06 | Again, it's downloading the software
update and it's installing that software.
| | 03:10 | Once it's done that, you can
choose some options on this.
| | 03:13 | For example, I can choose to tray the
pape'rs in, and there may be some more
| | 03:17 | arcane printer setting, so you can deal with.
| | 03:18 | In this case I am just going
to click OK, and we are set.
| | 03:21 | So now we see we have our USB printer,
we have the Bonjour printer, and we have
| | 03:27 | the network printer added
to our Print & Scan window.
| | 03:32 | For the most part this is all
you need to know about printing.
| | 03:35 | We are going to look at sharing
your printer in another movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Backing up with Time Machine| 00:00 | I don't want to be a downer, but like
you, your hard drive will eventually die.
| | 00:04 | And when it does, your documents,
photos, music, and movies are going to die
| | 00:09 | with it, unless you make a backup
of those files. And really you must.
| | 00:14 | The reason many people give for not backing
up is that it's too difficult to configure.
| | 00:19 | Apple addresses that issue with Time
Machine, the bundled backup utility that
| | 00:22 | makes backing up your data incredibly easy.
| | 00:25 | It works like this. First of all get a
new hard drive that your Mac has never
| | 00:29 | seen and plug it in to your Mac.
| | 00:33 | Time Machine will ask you if you'd like
to use this hard drive to back up your
| | 00:37 | data, and yes of course, you do want to,
so I am going to Use as Backup Disk.
| | 00:41 | I am going to rename this, so that I know
what this is for. I want to call it Backup.
| | 00:47 | As you can see, it's going to tell me how
soon it will be before I start backing up.
| | 00:52 | Now let's look at Options.
| | 00:53 | Here you can decide what
you don't want to backup.
| | 00:57 | So I will click the plus
button, backup to my hard drive.
| | 01:03 | I don't really want to backup the System
folder, because I can always reinstall Lion.
| | 01:06 | So I am going to click Exclude.
| | 01:08 | Now when I choose this Option, it will tell me
that I've chosen to exclude the System folder.
| | 01:13 | I can choose to either Exclude Just
The System Folder or All System Files.
| | 01:18 | If I do that, I will also exclude
things like the library files, and
| | 01:22 | that's okay, because I can always
reinstall Lion and have this stuff back
| | 01:26 | and then bring back my data.
| | 01:27 | I'm really concerned about my data, not
nearly so much about the system itself.
| | 01:33 | Now let's exclude a more typical folder.
| | 01:35 | I will go to the Plus button,
go to my Documents folder.
| | 01:38 | Now I am going to go down to my Work folder.
| | 01:40 | I do want to back that up; however, I don't
want to back up this old Blueprints folder.
| | 01:45 | I have lots of old files in
there that I no longer need.
| | 01:48 | I don't need to use up space, particularly
because these are big files on my backup drive.
| | 01:53 | So I click Exclude and now I see
that those are excluded as well.
| | 01:59 | Now that I've set things up as
I want them, I click on Save.
| | 02:02 | I see a counter that tells me it's
going to backup in hundred and some odd
| | 02:06 | seconds, and let's just show the
Time Machine's status in the menu bar.
| | 02:12 | When Time Machine kicks in, you'll
actually see this thing move and I can make
| | 02:15 | it move by selecting Back Up Now. And
as you can see, the arrow was turning,
| | 02:22 | indicating that my machine is being
backed up to my backup drive, and if you'd
| | 02:27 | look in the Time Machine system
preference, you see what it's doing.
| | 02:30 | It's preparing backup, and then once
it's ready to do that, it will do a counter
| | 02:34 | to show me how much data is being copied over.
| | 02:39 | Also in the Finder, when this is
happening, you will see that it's
| | 02:42 | calculating size, and this tells you that I'm
not quite ready to back up yet, but I will soon.
| | 02:48 | So for now I'm going to click the Stop
Backup button and that's how it stops backing up.
| | 02:54 | There are other options. You can also
go to the menu bar, and if it is backing
| | 02:58 | up, you can also stop the
backup from the menu bar.
| | 03:01 | Now suppose I want to use a
different disk. I'll just click Select Disk.
| | 03:06 | I don't happen to have another disk.
| | 03:07 | If I did, it would be available here.
| | 03:10 | I would select Install for example if I
had a Time Capsule, I could select it,
| | 03:14 | Use Backup Disk, and then it
will back up to that other disk.
| | 03:18 | This is one option if you've already
filled up a disk and you want to use
| | 03:21 | another disk to continue to back up.
| | 03:23 | We won't do that now, and we'll Cancel.
| | 03:27 | Now let's go forward in time. I have
been backing up this during the past
| | 03:30 | several days, and so let's see how this works.
| | 03:33 | So I will open my Documents folder.
I am going to take these documents here.
| | 03:41 | I am going to throw them away,
so off they go to the Trash.
| | 03:49 | Now I am going to enter Time Machine by
clicking on the Time Machine icon in the
| | 03:52 | dock, and keep an eye on this Documents folder.
| | 03:56 | Now here is our current state. Now
watch what happens when I go back in time by
| | 04:02 | clicking these arrows. Aha!
| | 04:06 | There are those files that I just tossed out.
| | 04:08 | I can also navigate by clicking on
window title bars and along the right side
| | 04:14 | here, you see these bars indicating
dates and times when backups were performed.
| | 04:19 | So I can go back to yesterday for example,
and I see that I have files here that
| | 04:25 | have since been deleted.
| | 04:26 | If I want to get those files back, I
select them within Time Machine and I
| | 04:31 | simply click Restore, and here they are.
My file has been copied from the backup
| | 04:41 | drive onto my regular drive,
and they have been restored.
| | 04:46 | This is something you want to check
every so often, because it's great that you
| | 04:49 | set up a Time Machine back up, but if
you don't verify that it actually works,
| | 04:53 | in case of an emergency, you may be
disappointed, if it doesn't actually do
| | 04:58 | what you wanted to do.
| | 04:58 | I will show you one other interface element of
Time Machine. I am going to open Address Book.
| | 05:03 | Here is the Address Book. I can go
back in time in Address Book as well.
| | 05:09 | However, when I do it here, I
maintain the Address Book iInterface.
| | 05:15 | So let's go back a bit, until I
find a contact that I have deleted.
| | 05:18 | Keep going, no, there it is. David
Banner, I accidentally tossed him out and I
| | 05:30 | shouldn't, because he is a superhero.
| | 05:31 | So let's bring him back by clicking
Restore, yes indeed I do, and David is
| | 05:44 | back in my Address Book.
| | 05:47 | So as you can see, restoring from Time
Machine is not only effective, but it's
| | 05:51 | real easy and it's awfully darn pretty.
| | 05:54 | If you've been using Time Machine in
previous versions of the OS, one thing to
| | 05:59 | be aware of, while you can restore
from Time Machine using the Address Book
| | 06:03 | interface, you can no
longer do this with iPhoto.
| | 06:06 | It used to be, you could open iPhoto,
select an Album, go back in time and stay
| | 06:10 | within that iPhoto interface.
| | 06:12 | You can no longer do that.
| | 06:13 | Now what you have to do is actually
restore your entire iPhoto Library.
| | 06:18 | That's a new and not necessarily
improved feature of Lion. And that's how to
| | 06:22 | backup and restore your data with Time Machine.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. SearchingFinding files with Spotlight| 00:00 | If you've had your Mac for a while, you
have a lot of files on it and even if
| | 00:04 | you have a new Mac, it won't be long
before you've packed it with documents.
| | 00:08 | As you put more files on your Mac,
regardless how organized you may be,
| | 00:11 | you'll find it increasingly
difficult to locate your files by opening
| | 00:15 | folders and looking around.
| | 00:17 | Fortunately, OS X Lion has a couple of
features that would help you search for your files.
| | 00:22 | The first is called Spotlight,
and this is how it works.
| | 00:25 | You have a couple of ways to open Spotlight.
| | 00:28 | One is to click on the magnifying
glass icon in the upper right corner.
| | 00:32 | Another way is to press Command+Space.
| | 00:35 | Now Quick Searches are easy. All you
have to do is type your query. So let's put
| | 00:39 | in my name, and there you have it.
| | 00:43 | Now you'll notice that some of these
documents actually have my name in the
| | 00:47 | title and others don't.
| | 00:50 | These are documents that contain
my name, but aren't titled with it.
| | 00:54 | You'll also notice that when I highlight
things, they eventually show you the content.
| | 01:00 | You get a little preview
of what that document is.
| | 01:02 | This is incredibly helpful if you've
got like 200 documents, for example, that
| | 01:06 | use a particular search term. You can
use this and then see a preview of the
| | 01:10 | documents, so then you can later open it.
| | 01:12 | And preview works in such a way that you
can see not only text, but can you also
| | 01:16 | see images, you can play audio, and also movies.
| | 01:19 | If you move down to the bottom of the
list, you see a couple of other searches.
| | 01:22 | One is you can search the web for
whatever it was you were looking for.
| | 01:26 | So for example, let's look on the web for me.
| | 01:29 | I click that, Safari launches, and it
shows you a Google page that has my name on it.
| | 01:36 | close that, go back to Spotlight and
let's check Wikipedia to see if I am in there.
| | 01:42 | Now the Dictionary app opens, and I'm
searching Wikipedia, and sure enough,
| | 01:45 | look, there I am in
Wikipedia. And we'll quit out of that.
| | 01:49 | You can also put searches in quotes so that
you end up searching for the exact phrase.
| | 01:55 | So we will do my name in quotes.
| | 02:02 | You put your phrase in quotes and
then only the documents that contain that
| | 02:06 | phrase appear in your list of results.
| | 02:09 | You could also narrow your search by
defining exactly what you're looking for,
| | 02:12 | and you do it this way. name:Breen, for example.
| | 02:20 | So what you'll find are any
documents that contain the name Breen within
| | 02:23 | the name of the file.
| | 02:25 | If I want to narrow that further,
I can add another search term.
| | 02:28 | So for example, kind:e-mail. Now I see
only those e-mail messages that contain Breen.
| | 02:37 | Spotlight can perform other tricks.
| | 02:39 | For example, it can do calculations for you.
| | 02:42 | So in case you didn't know,
2+2=4, and here is the result here.
| | 02:49 | Of course, you can do more complicated
calculations, but that gives you the idea.
| | 02:53 | Enter a calculation there and the
results will appear in Spotlight.
| | 02:56 | It can also act as a dictionary.
| | 02:59 | This is a great word to
use in Scrabble. Numbles.
| | 03:03 | When you type-in a word that is in the
dictionary, it will show across from a Look Up entry.
| | 03:08 | So I can highlight that,
and out pops the definition.
| | 03:12 | Just in case you didn't know, it's
the entrails of an animal, especially a
| | 03:16 | deer used for food.
| | 03:18 | It sounds disgusting, but again, in
Scrabble, it's a terrific word to use.
| | 03:23 | If you have a lot of results, you may
not be able to see them all in this list,
| | 03:30 | because it's a limited list.
| | 03:31 | What you can do though is choose Show
All in Finder. When you do that, all your
| | 03:37 | results appear in the Finder window.
| | 03:39 | We are going to look at finding
items in the Finder in another movie.
| | 03:44 | So we will close that window.
| | 03:46 | You can also limit what Spotlight
searches and you do that within
| | 03:49 | System Preferences.
| | 03:53 | So here's the Spotlight entry. So you
can choose exactly the kinds of items
| | 03:57 | that you want to search.
| | 03:58 | So for example, I want to search for
documents, but I don't want to look in
| | 04:01 | System Preferences or Applications
or in Contacts or Images for example.
| | 04:07 | So again, configure this the
way it makes sense for you.
| | 04:10 | Let's shift the window up. You will
also see that you can change the Spotlight
| | 04:14 | menu keyboard shortcut.
| | 04:16 | By default, it's Command+Space and
if you want to show that Spotlight
| | 04:20 | window that appeared in the Finder,
you can choose Option+Command+Space, but
| | 04:25 | you can change that.
| | 04:26 | There's also a Privacy tab. Select
Privacy and click the Plus button or you can
| | 04:32 | drag folders in, and you can choose to
Exclude items that you don't want to have searched.
| | 04:38 | So let's say for example I have
some super-secret financial data and I
| | 04:41 | don't want anybody to just to be able to sit
down on my computer and pull up my tax documents.
| | 04:46 | So I will go to my Documents
folder and there are my Tax Documents.
| | 04:50 | So I am going to exclude that from search.
I click Choose and now when I conduct
| | 04:56 | a Spotlight search, or more importantly
somebody else does, they won't be able to
| | 04:59 | see results from that folder.
| | 05:01 | Of course, there's no substitute for
organizing your files and applications
| | 05:06 | so you have a good idea of where they
can be found, but for those times when
| | 05:10 | you can't find them or would rather
not bother digging through folders,
| | 05:14 | there's Spotlight.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digging deeper with Finder searches| 00:00 | Spotlight is one way to find items on your Mac.
| | 00:02 | It's fast and it's convenient, but there
are times when you need to perform more
| | 00:06 | complete searches and save
those searches for a rainy day.
| | 00:10 | That's when you turn to the Finder search
feature, which we are going to look at now.
| | 00:15 | To invoke that you can go to the File
menu within the Finder and choose Find or
| | 00:20 | you can type Command+F. This works
pretty much the way you'd use Spotlight.
| | 00:25 | Go under Search term, and you see this
entry in the menu that appears below.
| | 00:32 | It says Filename Contains. This is
important. If you're looking for a file that
| | 00:37 | contains the search term, select this option.
| | 00:40 | If you don't, and as you can see, in
the window, you get not only files that
| | 00:45 | contain the name, but also files that
have that term within them somewhere.
| | 00:50 | So we'll select Filename Contains.
| | 00:53 | You can also choose where
you are going to search.
| | 00:55 | By default, you will search your entire
Mac, but you also search the environment
| | 00:59 | you're searching from.
| | 01:00 | So in this case it would be
Desktop or you can choose Shared.
| | 01:03 | We will go back to the entire Mac.
| | 01:05 | I will go up to Name and we are going
choose Everything, so we can see all the
| | 01:09 | files that contain my name.
| | 01:11 | Now you see these pop-up menus below.
This allows you to narrow your search.
| | 01:15 | So Kind in this case is we
are going to look for Images.
| | 01:20 | It turns up then just
pictures that contain my name.
| | 01:24 | You can also save your searches. So to
do that click Save and name your search.
| | 01:31 | It will go on the Save Searches folder,
but you can also add it to the sidebar.
| | 01:37 | Add it over here, and whatever I'm
looking for me on this computer, by name, I
| | 01:45 | can click that and pull up that list of files.
| | 01:48 | Back to Find window. Using the Search
window, you can also build searches.
| | 01:52 | So let's say I will enter iPad.
| | 01:54 | That will be for everything. So
Kind is Any. Click the plus button.
| | 02:00 | We'll say that the name contains
template, and that pulls up that one file.
| | 02:08 | So this is another way of narrowing my search.
| | 02:11 | Now there are other things you can
search for using these pop-up menus and I
| | 02:15 | find this really helpful in this one case.
| | 02:17 | So I'll go to the first pop-up menu.
| | 02:19 | I choose Other and down comes a sheet
of all the things that I can search for.
| | 02:24 | And you can see it's a very, long list.
| | 02:26 | Well, there is one thing that I
always want to search for, and I want to search
| | 02:30 | within my Library folder and within my System
folder, but by default the Mac won't do that.
| | 02:35 | So all I have to do is type in system.
When I do that, I see that I can search
| | 02:40 | for system files, and again, it
will look in the System folder.
| | 02:43 | It will also look in Library folders.
| | 02:45 | I then enable the In menu and click OK.
| | 02:51 | So by default, it will say system
files are not included, but I can also add
| | 02:56 | are included, and you see when I do
that, a whole bunch of files appear that
| | 03:01 | weren't there before and that's because
they were contained in a Library folder
| | 03:05 | or in the System folder.
| | 03:06 | So if you're doing a very deep
search, this is worth adding.
| | 03:10 | You could also look for things by size.
| | 03:15 | So I go to Other, type in size, File
Size. I am going to add that and click OK.
| | 03:24 | So let's say I'm looking for
really big files that are on my Mac.
| | 03:27 | Okay, I want them to be
greater than let's say 300 megabytes.
| | 03:39 | This shows me where I've got big files,
and this is worthwhile, because let's
| | 03:42 | suppose your hard drive has become
crammed full of stuff and it's getting
| | 03:46 | really, really full.
| | 03:47 | This is a quick way to find out what's
taking up a lot of space on your hard drive.
| | 03:52 | You may go through these things and
find well, I don't really need that file
| | 03:56 | after all, so this is one way
that you can get rid of them.
| | 03:59 | Again you can save this. We'll call it
Big Files, put it in Saved Searches, plus
| | 04:06 | add it to the sidebar, and now
once again we've got another search.
| | 04:10 | So when were looking for
big files, we can use that.
| | 04:13 | Before we finish up, I will
close that. And a couple of tips.
| | 04:17 | To search specifically by filename, hold
down Control+Command+F. And when you do
| | 04:24 | that you are going to search by file
name, and you can tell that will work,
| | 04:27 | because if you hold down the Control
key, you will see that the Find command
| | 04:31 | changes to Find by Name.
| | 04:34 | So in this case all search results
return only those files that include the
| | 04:38 | search term in their name.
| | 04:40 | Now I mentioned saving searches.
| | 04:43 | Another way to do that is build one of
these searches through a Smart Search,
| | 04:48 | and it looks like this. New Smart Folder
and then you define what you're looking for.
| | 04:53 | So the same idea, you can gang
together searches and then you can save them,
| | 05:05 | and it's added as a Smart Search.
| | 05:07 | Apple's search and Spotlight
technologies are found all over Mac OS and in
| | 05:13 | Apple's applications. Not only can
you find used for it in the Finder, but
| | 05:17 | you'll find it in Address Book, Mail,
iCal, and some of the iLife applications.
| | 05:22 | Third-party applications can use it as well.
| | 05:24 | Wherever you find a search field on
your Mac, there is a very good chance that
| | 05:28 | Spotlight is behind it.
| | 05:30 | Give it a go and I think you'll find it helpful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Configuring System PreferencesConfiguring basic personal preferences| 00:00 | And now it's time to delve in the
system preferences, specifically those for
| | 00:03 | configuring the look and
feel of the Mac's interface.
| | 00:06 | I am going to start with General.
| | 00:07 | So we are going to System Preferences and
we'll click on the General system preference.
| | 00:13 | First thing you can do is
change a couple of the colors.
| | 00:15 | When you click on the menu bar, you'll
notice that the top of the menu is blue.
| | 00:20 | You can change that if you like.
| | 00:22 | You can change that to Graphite.
| | 00:24 | Click up here, and we've got gray menu, plus
| | 00:29 | notice the buttons here
have changed color as well.
| | 00:32 | We'll go back to blue.
| | 00:34 | You can also change the highlight color of text.
| | 00:36 | By default it's blue, but you can
change that to gold, which is really yellow.
| | 00:41 | Red, orange, green, purple or tutti frutti.
| | 00:43 | When we first set up our Mac we
changed the way the scroll bars work.
| | 00:48 | As a reminder if you choose
Automatically based on input device.
| | 00:52 | If you use a mouse that's plugged into your
Mac, the scroll bars will appear at all times.
| | 00:59 | If you use a trackpad, they will
appear only when you're scrolling.
| | 01:03 | I like to see scroll bars all times, so
I'll leave the Always option enabled.
| | 01:07 | Now when you click in the scroll
bar a couple of things can happen.
| | 01:10 | By default if you click in the
scroll bar it will jump to the next page.
| | 01:15 | However, you can also choose to
jump to the spot that's clicked.
| | 01:18 | So if you have a long scroll bar, you
can click way down the scroll bar and the
| | 01:23 | thumb of the scroll bar will move all
the way down to where you've clicked.
| | 01:26 | So you can more easily move to
the end of a document, if you like.
| | 01:30 | The Use smooth scrolling option means
exactly what it says, and what that is,
| | 01:35 | is when you drag on a thumb with this
option on, the scrolling will be very smooth.
| | 01:40 | The page will move very smoothly.
| | 01:42 | If you turn this off you may be able to
scroll more quickly, but the look will
| | 01:47 | be a little jumpier.
| | 01:48 | You could also double-click a
window's title bar to minimize.
| | 01:51 | Let me turn that on to
show what that looks like.
| | 01:53 | Double-click and down it goes
minimized into the dock. And bring it back.
| | 01:59 | I am going to turn that off for now.
| | 02:01 | You can change the size of
the Finder sidebar icons.
| | 02:05 | Currently, they're set to Medium, but
you can make them Small or you can make
| | 02:11 | them Large, and back to Medium.
| | 02:15 | Also, within the Apple menu you
will find a Recent items command.
| | 02:18 | Here you will find a list of items.
| | 02:20 | So, Applications, Documents, and Servers.
| | 02:24 | By default you will see up to 10 of
these items, but you can change that so you
| | 02:28 | see none at all or up to 50.
| | 02:31 | Same settings for all of these.
| | 02:34 | We touched on this in another movie,
but I will remind you what this means.
| | 02:37 | Restore windows when
quitting and re-opening apps.
| | 02:40 | So if I have launched TextEdit for
example and I have five windows open, when I
| | 02:44 | quit TextEdit and then relaunch it,
those windows will appear again. And then
| | 02:48 | there's Use LCD font smoothing when available.
| | 02:52 | This makes your fonts look a
little crisper and nicer when it's on.
| | 02:55 | It's worth keeping on.
| | 02:56 | Now let's look at Desktop & Screensaver.
| | 02:58 | Now there are a couple of
ways that we can get there.
| | 03:00 | We could of course click Show All and
then choose it here, but you could also go
| | 03:04 | to the View menu and choose your
Preference from there, which we've done.
| | 03:10 | This is a desktop that we are using, this
blue color, but you can change that as well.
| | 03:15 | There are desktop pictures that come with a Mac.
| | 03:18 | Some of them are very pretty, but you
can add your own and a way to do that is
| | 03:22 | click the plus button and then navigate
to the pictures that you want to find.
| | 03:26 | So in this case I'm in my Documents folder.
| | 03:29 | I've created this folder called Pretty Pictures.
| | 03:32 | Here are the images and
here's the preview of this image.
| | 03:34 | So I can choose that and
that becomes my desktop pattern.
| | 03:39 | I will go back to my solid color and
now let's take a look at Screensaver.
| | 03:46 | There are a number of
screensaver options offered with the Mac.
| | 03:49 | Here is Arabesque. Click Test
and ooh, isn't that pretty?
| | 03:56 | There are some other pretty ones too.
| | 04:02 | Flurry is another popular one.
| | 04:08 | So what's the point of these things?
| | 04:09 | Well, back in the old days when we
were using CRT monitors, those big tube
| | 04:14 | monitors like TVs, there was
something called screen burn-in.
| | 04:18 | If you left your computer on for a long
time and it was showing the same thing,
| | 04:21 | eventually that image
would burn into the screen.
| | 04:24 | Particularly you'd see things
like menu bars that were burned in.
| | 04:27 | This isn't really a problem with
the kind of monitors we have today.
| | 04:31 | So why do we have these?
| | 04:32 | For one, they're nice to look at, but
also it's part of a security setting.
| | 04:36 | You can for example turn on your
screensaver, walk away from your computer, and
| | 04:42 | set a setting so that when you come back
you cannot restore your computer to its
| | 04:46 | regular desktop until you enter a password.
| | 04:49 | So if you're working somewhere where you
have a Mac and there are a lot of other
| | 04:52 | people around and you don't want
them to see your work, just kick in the
| | 04:55 | screensaver and then they won't be able
to see your stuff without being able to
| | 04:58 | enter your password.
| | 05:00 | And we'll cover that later
when we talk about security.
| | 05:02 | One other screensaver worth
looking at is RSS Visualizer.
| | 05:07 | Now RSS stands for Really Simple
Syndication and essentially it is the
| | 05:11 | headlines from various websites.
| | 05:13 | Currently, it's got it set up so it's showing
you Apple's Hot News and it looks like this.
| | 05:17 | I will click Test.
| | 05:21 | Here is Apple's site, and then you'll see
headlines for that day appear on the screen.
| | 05:25 | Hmm, Creating Media-Savvy Journals
with Mac, I should look into that.
| | 05:33 | And we'll get out of that.
| | 05:35 | Now you'll see that the Hot
Corners button appears here.
| | 05:37 | This appears in a couple of other
places, and this is what it does.
| | 05:41 | You click on it and then you can
choose things to happen when you put
| | 05:44 | your cursor in a corner.
| | 05:46 | So for example, Start Screen Saver.
| | 05:48 | I drag my cursor down to left
bottom, and here's the screensaver.
| | 05:56 | To make it stop, I does drag my cursor out.
| | 05:59 | So there are lots of options here.
| | 06:01 | You can disable the screensaver, you
can kick in Mission Control, you can
| | 06:05 | share application windows, Desktop, Dashboard,
Launchpad, and you can put the display to sleep.
| | 06:10 | I'll leave this off most of the time,
and for new Mac users, it's not a bad idea
| | 06:15 | to leave that off, because
oftentimes we are sitting at a computer,
| | 06:18 | we are not paying attention, and oh,
look I've just dragged my cursor to the
| | 06:21 | corner and something happens.
| | 06:23 | This can be confusing for some people,
because, well, I don't know what happened.
| | 06:26 | Why did that start?
| | 06:27 | Well, it's because a Hot Corner has been set.
| | 06:30 | So if you know what you're doing, if
you really want something to happen when
| | 06:33 | you drag your cursor to a
corner, fine, turn that on.
| | 06:36 | But for a lot of people
it's really not worth it.
| | 06:40 | And we click OK to get out of there.
| | 06:42 | Now let's take a look at dock settings.
| | 06:44 | I am going to invoke this again by
going to the View menu and choosing Dock.
| | 06:50 | Now one thing we set up when I originally
set up this computer is to turn Dock Hiding on.
| | 06:55 | I am going to turn it off now so that we
can see the dock and see what I'm doing here.
| | 06:59 | The first thing you can do is change
the Size of the dock, and you use this
| | 07:02 | Size slider to do that.
| | 07:04 | So I can make it as big as that
and I can reduce its size so it's
| | 07:09 | really, really tiny.
| | 07:10 | I'll put it back to its medium size.
| | 07:13 | One reason to use this slider is
because you don't really want this dock
| | 07:16 | getting in your way taking up a lot of real
estate where you could be putting some other stuff.
| | 07:20 | Now note that when you put more things
in the dock, the dock is going to get
| | 07:24 | bigger to accommodate those things.
| | 07:26 | So let's say I've got it on to Large.
| | 07:28 | Now you see it's taking up pretty
much the entire bottom of the screen.
| | 07:32 | As I add more items to it, the icons in
the dock will get smaller to accommodate
| | 07:37 | the items that I put into it.
| | 07:38 | I'll put it back to a reasonable size there.
| | 07:45 | You also have a Magnification setting.
| | 07:47 | Turn that on and I will
show you what that effect is.
| | 07:49 | As you drag your cursor across the
dock, the icons get bigger as your
| | 07:55 | cursor passes over them.
| | 07:57 | I'll make this really extreme here. Really big.
| | 08:02 | So this is just a visual cue to see
what your cursor is over so that you can
| | 08:06 | more easily launch these applications.
| | 08:11 | I will now turn Magnification off.
| | 08:13 | You can also show the dock in three positions.
| | 08:15 | By default it's at the bottom, and
when it's at the bottom it's in 3D.
| | 08:21 | Click Left and it appears on the left
side of the screen, but it becomes a
| | 08:24 | two-dimensional dock.
| | 08:25 | So it appears flat.
| | 08:28 | On the right it's the
same idea, 2D on the right.
| | 08:32 | It's up to you where you want to put it.
| | 08:34 | I really find it convenient to keep it
on the bottom, but some people I know put
| | 08:37 | on the left or they put on the right.
| | 08:39 | Then there's the effect that
occurs when you minimize a window.
| | 08:43 | So by default we have Genie effect.
| | 08:44 | I am going to show you how
this works in slow motion.
| | 08:46 | So I'll hold down the Shift key and
click on the Minimize button, and it gets
| | 08:52 | sucked down into the dock, and
that's called the Genie effect.
| | 08:55 | I'll bring it back in real time.
| | 08:58 | There's one other effect.
| | 08:59 | It's called the Scale effect.
| | 09:01 | I'll do this in slow motion.
| | 09:02 | So again hold down Shift key, minimize,
and you see it doesn't get sucked out,
| | 09:08 | but rather the rectangle
is reduced proportionally.
| | 09:13 | Back to Genie, back to the desktop.
| | 09:16 | This option, Minimize windows into
application icon, changes the way application
| | 09:22 | windows are put into the dock.
| | 09:24 | Let me open TextEdit to
show you how that works.
| | 09:29 | I have a TextEdit document.
| | 09:31 | By default when I minimize it, it
occupies the right side of the dock.
| | 09:38 | However, if I turn on Minimize windows
into application icon and minimize it,
| | 09:45 | it goes into the application icon itself.
| | 09:48 | Well, how do I find that document if I want it?
| | 09:50 | All I have to do is click and there it is.
| | 09:53 | Here is my test file.
| | 09:55 | I choose it and it comes out of the dock.
| | 10:01 | I'll put it back to its
default setting which is off.
| | 10:05 | You can animate opening applications, so
that you get a little bounce in the dock.
| | 10:09 | You get things swooping around.
| | 10:10 | That's the default.
| | 10:12 | If you have a recent Mac,
go ahead and leave this on.
| | 10:14 | It really doesn't take up much processing
power and it doesn't slow down your Mac.
| | 10:17 | So it's a perfectly fine thing to leave on.
| | 10:20 | In a bit I am going to re-enable the
Automatically hide and show Dock, so that
| | 10:25 | the dock will disappear when I want it to.
| | 10:26 | The last option is to Show
indicator lights for opening applications.
| | 10:32 | Live applications, the ones that are
currently running, have a little blue
| | 10:36 | dot underneath them.
| | 10:37 | So the Finder is active and we can see
that System Preferences is also active.
| | 10:42 | If I turn that off, those blue dots disappear.
| | 10:47 | So you can't see what's currently running.
| | 10:49 | I am not sure why you'd want to turn that
option off, but some people may choose to.
| | 10:53 | In my case, I am going to turn it back on.
| | 10:56 | So let's clean things up.
| | 10:58 | I am going to automatically hide
my dock as I originally did it.
| | 11:03 | Close this Finder window
and quit System Preferences.
| | 11:09 | And there's your look at
configuring general system preferences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Optimizing Mission Control preferences| 00:00 | In another movie we looked at Mission
Control. This is a Lion's feature for
| | 00:03 | creating separate work environments.
| | 00:06 | We're now going to look at the preference
that allows you to configure Mission Control.
| | 00:09 | So go up to System Preferences, here's
Mission Control, and here are the options.
| | 00:16 | Now the first one, Show Dashboard as a
space, on my trackpad I'm going to swipe
| | 00:22 | to the left with three fingers and
here is the Dashboard Space or the
| | 00:26 | Dashboard Environment.
| | 00:28 | I'll swipe back with three
fingers and we're back again.
| | 00:31 | If I turn this off and I swipe to the
left, and believe me I'm doing it, nothing
| | 00:36 | happens and that's because
we've turned that off as a space.
| | 00:39 | So how do you get to Dashboard?
| | 00:41 | Look down here at your keyboard
shortcuts and it says Show Dashboard, F12.
| | 00:46 | These are F keys at the top of your
keyboard. So I will press F12 and sure
| | 00:52 | enough here is Dashboard.
| | 00:54 | We're going to look at Dashboard in another
movie, so we won't linger here, turn that back on.
| | 01:01 | Next option, Automatically
rearrange spaces based on most recent use.
| | 01:05 | What the heck does that me? I will show you.
| | 01:07 | I swiped up to get to Mission
Control and I'll add a few spaces.
| | 01:15 | Okay, we'll go to Desktop 4. Within
here I'm going to launch Pages, type some
| | 01:26 | nonsense, go back to Mission
Control, go back to Desktop 1.
| | 01:32 | Now take a look, Desktop 1 is where I'm
currently. Desktop 4 is where I created
| | 01:39 | my Pages document. So I'm Desktop 1.
| | 01:42 | Now if I switch to Pages by clicking on
it, let's take a look and see what it's
| | 01:47 | done in Mission Control.
| | 01:49 | Notice that Desktop 4 has now
moved to the second position.
| | 01:53 | It's still called Desktop 4, but it's
moved closer because of that option I set.
| | 01:57 | So back to Desktop 1.
| | 01:59 | Again, Automatically rearrange space
based on most recent use, so when I
| | 02:03 | switch to another application in another
environment, it moved in closer to the one I'm at.
| | 02:09 | That way so I can swipe between, so
I can quickly move between the two
| | 02:12 | environments, without having to
go through other environments.
| | 02:14 | The last option is a little confusing.
When switching to an application, switch
| | 02:19 | to a space with open window for the application.
| | 02:23 | Again that's another huh. I go back to
my second environment. I'm going to close
| | 02:27 | this Pages dock. I'll save it.
| | 02:31 | Pages is still active. I'll
swipe back. I go to Pages again
| | 02:37 | and let's find out which environment
I'm in. I'm still on Desktop 1, and the
| | 02:41 | reason is because there is no open
window in Desktop 4 as there was before, so
| | 02:48 | I stay in the environment that I was
originally in because of this preference.
| | 02:55 | It's a little confusing, but
that's the way it works in Lion.
| | 02:58 | And again, we briefly looked at
shortcuts. These are the shortcuts that are set
| | 03:02 | by default, Mission Control,
Application window, Show Desktop, Show Dashboard.
| | 03:08 | You can choose different shortcuts if
you like. These are the ones that happen
| | 03:11 | to be configured here and they're not
all configured the same way. On a laptop
| | 03:14 | you may see different shortcut keys.
| | 03:18 | As you see, you've plenty of options
here, and again, this upward pointing
| | 03:22 | triangle means the Control key.
| | 03:25 | And finally, Hot Corners, we looked at
this in another movie. You can choose
| | 03:29 | what these Hot Corners will do
when you drag your cursor there.
| | 03:33 | Again, I leave them off. You're welcome
to assign them if you like. And that's a
| | 03:38 | look at Mission Control preferences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring basic Audio and Video preferences| 00:00 | It's within the basic hardware
preferences that you configure the behavior of
| | 00:04 | the CDs and DVDs you insert in your Mac,
how your Mac's display is configured,
| | 00:08 | and the noises your Mac makes and
receives. Let's start with DVDs and CDs by
| | 00:13 | going to System Preferences here under Hardware.
| | 00:18 | If you are tired of your Mac doing the
wrong thing when you insert a CD or DVD,
| | 00:22 | here's where you change that behavior.
| | 00:25 | So for example you inserted a blank CD.
By default it says ask what to do.
| | 00:29 | You can also have it, Open Finder, Open
iTunes, Open Disk Utility or Open another
| | 00:35 | application. For example, blank DVD, same idea.
| | 00:40 | When you insert a music CD, by default
it opens iTunes and that make sense given
| | 00:44 | that iTunes is the Mac's default music player.
| | 00:48 | When you insert a picture CD,
it's going to open up in iPhoto.
| | 00:51 | That makes sense, but if you're using a
different photo viewing application, say
| | 00:54 | Aperture for example, you
may want to change that.
| | 00:58 | If you have Aperture installed,
it will appear in this menu.
| | 01:00 | Otherwise you can choose to
open it in another application.
| | 01:03 | And when you insert a video DVD.
| | 01:06 | Open DVD Player, again, you can choose
a different application if you want to
| | 01:11 | use that application with your DVDs.
| | 01:13 | Now take a look at Displays
by going to the View menu.
| | 01:18 | It's within displays that you choose
your Mac's display resolution. The larger
| | 01:22 | the number, the smaller the
objects onscreen and the more that fit.
| | 01:27 | In some cases you'll also be
able to control brightness.
| | 01:30 | It depends on what kind of setup
you've got, whether you've got a laptop or
| | 01:34 | whether you've got a monitor
that accepts brightness controls.
| | 01:36 | If you click the Color tab, you'll
find that you can choose different display
| | 01:41 | profiles and this will change the look
of your monitor. Maybe it'll make it a
| | 01:45 | little more yellow or
little hotter or little bluer.
| | 01:47 | You can also calibrate your monitor,
if you want. You do that by clicking
| | 01:51 | Calibrate, and then you walk through
this little wizard that will help you tweak
| | 01:55 | the look of your monitor.
| | 01:58 | We won't run through that right now.
| | 02:00 | Here's a little tip for you.
| | 02:01 | If you don't happen to be in the
Display system preference, you can easily move
| | 02:04 | to it by holding down the Option key
and then pressing F1 or F2, and that
| | 02:09 | automatically opens the
Display System Preference.
| | 02:12 | Now let's take a look at Sound.
Here's our Sound system preference.
| | 02:18 | The Sound system preference not only
controls your Mac system's sounds, but it
| | 02:21 | also controls the inputs and outputs.
| | 02:24 | So here are the sound effects you Mac
make when it makes an error, and funk.
| | 02:32 | You can also choose an output device if you
happen to have it, so it can be Internal
| | 02:37 | Speakers, Line Out, Digital Out. We
have an advanced audio interface connected
| | 02:42 | to this computer. You can choose
whether you want to play user interface sounds
| | 02:45 | or not, and you can also play feedback
when the volume is changed and that means
| | 02:51 | if you've hit the volume control, we
hear this little blip, blip, blip, blip,
| | 02:55 | blip, blip, blip, blip, blip, blip, as you go on.
| | 02:58 | And you can see that the volume slider
changes as you do that and that's what that's for.
| | 03:02 | That drops the volume or raises it
or you can mute things altogether by
| | 03:06 | clicking on the Mute button.
| | 03:07 | If you like you can show the volume in the
menu bar, and then change the volume from there.
| | 03:16 | Also, hold down the Option key click on
that Volume menu and you can get directly
| | 03:21 | to your Sound preferences.
| | 03:23 | I want to take that out of the menu bar.
| | 03:28 | Output, again, you decide where
you want the sound to come out.
| | 03:31 | You can have it come out your Line
Out, Digital Out, Internal Speakers or
| | 03:34 | other audio interfaces.
| | 03:35 | You can also change the balance, so you
have the audio come out completely from
| | 03:39 | the right speaker, completely from
the left, or somewhere in between.
| | 03:44 | You have a separate output volume
control just for the output port.
| | 03:51 | Again, Show volume in menu bar if you
like, and then there's the Input tab
| | 03:55 | too and there's my voice. You can tell that I'm
talking because here's the input level meter.
| | 04:01 | Same idea, you can choose how the
sound is going to come into your Mac,
| | 04:04 | either with your Line In, Digital
In as we're using, or some kind of
| | 04:08 | interface that's connected.
| | 04:12 | And there is one more trick for
getting to the Sound system preference.
| | 04:15 | If you hold down Option+F10, F11 or F12,
up pops the Sound system preference.
| | 04:25 | And simple enough. You now understand
how to configure your Mac's Display and
| | 04:28 | Sound system preferences, as well as
command what disks do when you insert
| | 04:32 | them in your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting Input Device preferences| 00:00 | Although it's possible with the help of
third-party software to control your Mac
| | 00:04 | with your voice, most of us still rely
on a physical device to command our Macs
| | 00:08 | and that would be a keyboard, mouse, or trackpad.
| | 00:10 | We'd look at configuring those
system preferences now. We are going to
| | 00:14 | start with keyboard.
| | 00:15 | Now Apple has packed a lot of
functionality into this single system preference.
| | 00:23 | At the very top you have Key Repeat.
| | 00:25 | This slider indicates how quickly a key
will repeat when you press and hold on it.
| | 00:30 | So if you press and hold on the X key,
how quickly you get multiple access.
| | 00:34 | If you have kind of slow fingers, the
idea is you want to move this slider down
| | 00:38 | to Slow and then it won't
repeat nearly so quickly.
| | 00:42 | Delay Until Repeat.
| | 00:44 | Similar idea, how long is the
delay until the keys starts repeating.
| | 00:48 | Now there's the option for using the F keys.
| | 00:51 | Let's take a look at what F keys are.
| | 00:53 | F keys are this row here at the very top
of the keyboard, starting with F1 and on
| | 01:01 | this keyboard going to F12.
| | 01:03 | As we see they have little icons on it.
| | 01:05 | First couple are for brightness and
after that you've got an Expose button,
| | 01:11 | and then you have play controls for
iTunes, and then you have volume controls
| | 01:15 | here along the top.
| | 01:16 | Now by default when you
press one of these F keys,
| | 01:19 | that special function will initiate.
| | 01:21 | So if I were to press F1,
| | 01:23 | that will control the
brightness on this particular keyboard.
| | 01:26 | So let's go back to System Preferences.
| | 01:29 | So if I were instead to enable this
option, in order for me to invoke those
| | 01:34 | special features, I would have to
hold down the Fn key or the Function key
| | 01:39 | to make that happen.
| | 01:40 | Otherwise, they act exactly like F keys.
| | 01:43 | So let's say that in a program I've
assigned a certain command to an F key.
| | 01:48 | So if I press F6 for
example, my documents print.
| | 01:52 | Turn this on, press F6, I've
got my documents printing.
| | 01:55 | Instead, if I want F6 to do the special
feature assigned to it, I would have a
| | 02:00 | hold down the Fn key.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to turn that off for now.
| | 02:03 | Next option is Showing Keyboard &
Character Viewers in the menu bar.
| | 02:08 | I turn that on and I have a
new menu up here in my menu bar.
| | 02:13 | This, if I were to choose them out,
would show me the Character Viewer and
| | 02:17 | the Keyboard Viewer.
| | 02:18 | I am going to show these
to you in another movie.
| | 02:20 | So we are not going to look at them right now.
| | 02:22 | Just know that that's the
way to expose this menu.
| | 02:26 | So I am going to remove that.
| | 02:29 | Finally, there is a really important
feature buried in the Ssystem preference,
| | 02:33 | and that's modifier keys.
| | 02:34 | Click on this, I don't know about you,
but every so often I'll hit the Caps
| | 02:39 | Lock key by mistake. I'll start typing
and everything is in all caps and I am
| | 02:43 | going, what is going on?
| | 02:44 | And then I look down at my keyboard and
I see that little green light indicating
| | 02:47 | that Caps Lock is on.
| | 02:50 | There's a way to disable
that and this is the way.
| | 02:52 | Caps Lock > No Action.
| | 02:56 | Now from now on, you can bang on that Caps
Lock key until doomsday and it won't do anything.
| | 03:01 | So this is one of the things I do when I first
set up my Mac, is to disable the Caps Lock key.
| | 03:06 | The real purpose of this other than
that is it allows you to assign other
| | 03:11 | functions to these keys.
| | 03:12 | So the Control key can now be the
Command key or the Option key, or again, you
| | 03:15 | can disable it altogether.
| | 03:17 | Not a good thing to do with the
Control key or the Option key or the Command key,
| | 03:20 | but certainly with Caps Lock > No Action.
| | 03:24 | Now let's go to Keyboard Shortcuts.
| | 03:29 | The Mac has a lot of keyboard
shortcuts and this is where you can view them
| | 03:33 | as well as edit them.
| | 03:34 | So to edit them, you just click
to the right side of a shortcut.
| | 03:40 | That highlights and then you
can change what that shortcut is.
| | 03:43 | So currently it's assigned F11. I
could change that to F6, if I cared to, by
| | 03:48 | just tapping F6 on my keyboard.
| | 03:50 | I am not going to do that right now.
| | 03:52 | What I really want to focus on is Services.
| | 03:55 | Now Services are functions that
are available within all or specific
| | 03:59 | applications, and I can
illustrate that by going to TextEdit.
| | 04:03 | So here we have a line of text in TextEdit.
| | 04:06 | I'll go to the TextEdit
menu and I choose Services.
| | 04:10 | You see there a couple functions built in that
don't really have anything to do with TextEdit.
| | 04:15 | However, if I highlight this text,
go to TextEdit, and then choose Services,
| | 04:20 | you see that they're more options.
| | 04:22 | So I can make a sticky note of this
text for example, or I could have new email
| | 04:27 | based on the selection or
new note with this selection.
| | 04:30 | So Services allows you to
have this kind of power.
| | 04:34 | So one reason that Services appears
here is because you can assign keyboard
| | 04:38 | shortcuts to Services, just
as you could for other things.
| | 04:41 | So for example, Send File To
Bluetooth Device by default is set up as
| | 04:45 | Shift+Command+B. But you can also
add keyboard shortcuts and I find
| | 04:50 | this extremely helpful.
| | 04:52 | Let's move to Pages so that I
can show you how that works.
| | 04:54 | So let's go to the Edit menu.
| | 04:56 | Let's say I routinely track changes in
my documents, and I'm tired of having to
| | 04:59 | go down into the menu to invoke this command.
| | 05:02 | I can assign this within the Keyboard
Shortcuts area, and I'll do that now.
| | 05:09 | So I'll go to Application Shortcuts and
click on plus. I choose the application
| | 05:15 | that I wanted to assign
that keyboard shortcut for.
| | 05:19 | I don't see Pages here, so I
am going to have to add it.
| | 05:29 | Then all I have to do is type in the name
of the shortcut, and that's Track Changes.
| | 05:35 | And now I'll assign a keyboard shortcut.
| | 05:39 | I will make the Command+Option+T and click Add.
| | 05:43 | Let's go over to Pages and see
if it's there. And here it is.
| | 05:49 | So now I have a new keyboard shortcut
in Pages that I can invoke whenever I
| | 05:53 | want track changes.
| | 05:54 | Now also within the system preference
that you can set a Bluetooth keyboard.
| | 05:58 | We are going to do that in
another movie. So just know that.
| | 06:00 | that option is in here.
| | 06:03 | Now let's take a look at Mouse.
| | 06:06 | This is a little bit similar to
the Keyboard system preferences.
| | 06:09 | You can change your tracking speed here,
how much ground the mouse covers when
| | 06:12 | you move it around, your double-
click speed, your scrolling speed.
| | 06:17 | Also, if you're a lefty you can decide
which is going to be left-click and which
| | 06:20 | is going to be a right-click
or primary or secondary click.
| | 06:23 | For right-handed people the primary
mouse button is the left, but if you use a
| | 06:27 | mouse with your left hand, you can
change that so that it's on the right.
| | 06:32 | At the bottom is a very useful
feature and that's Zoom using scroll wheel
| | 06:37 | when holding Control.
| | 06:39 | So I've enabled that.
| | 06:40 | I'm holding down the Control key and now I
am using the scroll wheel to zoom in and out.
| | 06:49 | Now for some people with aging eyes or
not the greatest eyesight, this is very
| | 06:52 | helpful because you can zoom in on
small text and even if you have really good
| | 06:56 | eyesight, sometimes you'll visit a
webpage or you'll be somewhere else in an
| | 07:00 | application that has really tiny text.
| | 07:03 | This is an easy way to zoom in on that text.
| | 07:07 | And this also works with a trackpad.
| | 07:08 | If you want to zoom in, hold down the
Control key and with two fingers swipe up,
| | 07:13 | and then to zoom out again, Control
key down swipe with two fingers down.
| | 07:19 | There's one the other input device that
you can configure and that's Trackpad.
| | 07:23 | We've been through all this already
when we were looking at gestures, so
| | 07:27 | we've taken a tour.
| | 07:29 | Point & Click option, Scroll & Zoom,
More Gestures, and again, at the bottom you
| | 07:35 | have the option to set up a Bluetooth trackpad.
| | 07:37 | We are going to talk about setting
up Bluetooth devices in another movie.
| | 07:42 | There you have it,
configuring your input devices.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring Bluetooth input devices| 00:00 | As you're probably aware by now,
Lion is friendly to wireless devices,
| | 00:05 | particularly those that can do gestures.
| | 00:07 | For example, a Magic Trackpad or
Apple's Magic Mouse and the way you set these
| | 00:12 | things up is through
Bluetooth, so let's set them up now.
| | 00:15 | I'll go to Apple menu > System Preferences.
We are going to do the easy way to begin with.
| | 00:21 | I'll select Trackpad.
| | 00:23 | it will now look for my Trackpad.
| | 00:26 | These things connect through
something called Pairing Mode.
| | 00:28 | Now Bluetooth devices do this
differently. On some you have to push a button.
| | 00:32 | Some you've to press and hold
the button to make this work.
| | 00:35 | On this Magic Trackpad I'm using right now.
| | 00:37 | It's off, so I've to turn it on, and I
hold the Power button until it blinks and
| | 00:43 | that indicates that it's in pairing mode.
| | 00:45 | It's found it. All I have
to do now is click Continue.
| | 00:52 | Little indication on the screen shows
me that it's connected and I go to the
| | 00:56 | Trackpad system preference.
| | 00:58 | Now I also have a Magic Mouse here.
| | 01:02 | I could also do this the easy way by
clicking on the mouse, but instead I'm
| | 01:05 | going to do it through the
Bluetooth system preference.
| | 01:08 | So I click on that system preference,
I click Plus and now it will go out and
| | 01:13 | search for devices in the area that
are on in pairing mode. We see that the
| | 01:18 | mouse is one. You may see
other things on here as well.
| | 01:21 | Other computers, maybe somebody
has a mobile phone nearby that has
| | 01:24 | Bluetooth switched on.
| | 01:26 | We found our Magic Mouse, which is
exactly what we're looking for, so I click on
| | 01:30 | Continue, and now it's
attempting to pair with the Magic Mouse.
| | 01:35 | It's established the connection, and
we should see that little overlay of the
| | 01:39 | mouse, showing you that it's connected.
| | 01:41 | And now, here's my mouse. I'm actually
moving that mouse and it shows that it's working.
| | 01:46 | If I needed to set up another device,
all I do is click Setup other device, so
| | 01:50 | we move back to that Bluetooth screen
and we'd start adding other devices.
| | 01:54 | At this point, congratulations!
| | 01:56 | You're at Apple. I'm very
happy. I click on Quit.
| | 01:59 | Now when you return to the Bluetooth
system preference, you see all the devices
| | 02:02 | that you've paired with your Mac.
| | 02:05 | You can also remove these things if
you no longer want to have them there.
| | 02:08 | All you can do is select the device that you
want to remove and click this minus button.
| | 02:13 | Now why would you want to do that?
| | 02:14 | Well, suppose you have a couple of
different computers in the same room.
| | 02:18 | I've got a Magic Trackpad I want
use that with my MacBook Pro, great!
| | 02:23 | And now I want to use it
with my iMac, so how do I do it?
| | 02:25 | Well, I unpair it from my MacBook
Pro and then I pair it to my iMac.
| | 02:29 | That way I'm sure that I'm controlling
the computer that I want work with.
| | 02:33 | And that's how you set up
Bluetooth devices with your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying Date & Time Preferences| 00:00 | You probably know that your Mac can tell time,
so let's see how that happens. And here's a hint.
| | 00:07 | It all happens in the Date
& Time System Preference.
| | 00:10 | This you'll find in the System row.
Select it and here's Date & Time.
| | 00:14 | Near the top of this window
you'll see the option to Set date and
| | 00:18 | time automatically.
| | 00:20 | What this means is if your Mac is
connected to the Internet, every so often
| | 00:24 | it will check with the Time Server, and it
will synchronize your Mac's clock with it.
| | 00:29 | You have three options by default. So
depending on where you're located, make
| | 00:36 | sure that that Time Server is selected.
| | 00:39 | If you have that selected you can't
do anything in the calendar and on the
| | 00:44 | clock, because they're
locked down to the Time Server.
| | 00:46 | However, if you turn that option off,
then you can set the date and time manually.
| | 00:51 | So if I want to live in the future,
I can click here on the 31st and I go
| | 00:55 | back to today's date.
| | 00:56 | You can also use the arrow buttons to
move through months, dates, and years.
| | 01:04 | Same idea with the clock. If I wanted
to change the clock I can move into the
| | 01:07 | future and go back into the past.
| | 01:11 | You can also use number keys to enter
values. So for example, I'll make this 9:13.
| | 01:16 | Of course, if I enable this Set date
and time automatically, then I go back to
| | 01:24 | the current date and time.
| | 01:26 | Time zone is where you select your time zone.
| | 01:29 | East Coast time, East Africa time,
and some kind of Russian summer time.
| | 01:36 | We are on the West Coast, so
I'll set my time zone back there.
| | 01:41 | And clock, you can choose to
Show date and time in the menu bar.
| | 01:45 | You can see either a digital or an analog clock.
| | 01:48 | This is what the analog clock is, so
it's very discrete but a little hard to see.
| | 01:53 | Back to digital. You can also
show the date in the menu bar.
| | 01:56 | This is something that you couldn't
do with older versions of the Mac OS.
| | 01:59 | Now it's one of the options.
| | 02:01 | It's a very easy way to see what the date is.
| | 02:03 | Also, your Mac can announce the time.
| | 02:06 | So we'll do it on the hour, on the
half hour, or on the quarter hour.
| | 02:10 | You can also customize that voice.
| | 02:12 | We're going to looking at speech
settings for doing that in another movie.
| | 02:15 | Now quite honestly this is a feature
that I don't think I'd ever seen anybody
| | 02:19 | use, because I find it distracting to
have my computer tell me what time it is.
| | 02:23 | All I have to do is glance up into the menu
bar and I can see what time it is when I need to.
| | 02:28 | So we'll switch that off, and also I'm
going to turn off the menu bar option.
| | 02:34 | And that's date and time in Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Getting on the internet| 00:00 | Let's take a look at the Network system preference,
and here it is down in the Internet & Wireless area.
| | 00:08 | There is awfully good chance that if you're
watching this movie, you're already connected
| | 00:13 | to the Internet, because after all
you're streaming the movie via lynda.com.
| | 00:18 | So I don't need to show you how to get
connected to the Internet, but there are some things
| | 00:21 | in the Network system preference
that you should pay attention to.
| | 00:24 | Start looking at the left column and here
you're going to see the kind of ways you can
| | 00:29 | connect to the Internet.
| | 00:30 | We've got Ethernet, Wi-Fi, and FireWire.
| | 00:33 | If you see a green button next to something,
that means that that Internet connection is
| | 00:37 | connected and you've got a good connection.
| | 00:40 | So we'll look at Ethernet.
| | 00:41 | Along the right side, you see how you
configured to the Internet and that can be Using DHCP.
| | 00:47 | You can also use DHCP with a manual address
where you are going to enter the address.
| | 00:51 | BootP, we're not going to worry
about that, and then Manually.
| | 00:55 | If you signed up with an Internet service
provider and you have a static IP, which means
| | 01:00 | you have an address that's only yours, that's
not being shared, you would select Manually
| | 01:06 | and then within these fields you would enter
the information that you have from your ISP,
| | 01:11 | which includes your IP address, the
subnet mask, and the router address.
| | 01:17 | We don't, however.
| | 01:18 | We're being assigned via DHCP.
| | 01:20 | I select that, I'll click Apply and
then the address appears. Next is Wi-Fi.
| | 01:26 | In this area you can turn Wi-Fi on or off if you choose.
| | 01:30 | You can also choose the network
name that you're connected to.
| | 01:33 | Now by default, here I'm connected to a
network called Guest, but if I click on this menu,
| | 01:38 | I see other Wi-Fi hotspots within the
neighborhood that I could connect to.
| | 01:42 | If you see a lock icon next to one of these
networks, it indicates that that network is
| | 01:46 | password protected.
| | 01:48 | You're going to need to know the
password to get onto that network.
| | 01:50 | There is also another option
that says Join Other Network.
| | 01:54 | You can select that one.
| | 01:55 | You need to know the name of the network.
| | 01:58 | It's not being broadcast publicly,
but instead you have to enter it.
| | 02:01 | So for example, if I have a private network
called Chris's Network, you would have to
| | 02:05 | enter Chris's Network there.
| | 02:08 | Then you have to know the kind of security
that that network is protected by and these
| | 02:12 | are various security schemes.
| | 02:14 | There is WEP, WPA.
| | 02:17 | This is more than we need to get into here.
| | 02:19 | I'll cancel that.
| | 02:21 | Either one of these cases, you can click an
Advanced button and there's a lot of stuff
| | 02:25 | in the Advanced button which is more
advanced than we need to speak about right here.
| | 02:29 | However, I do want to
point you to the TCP/IP tab.
| | 02:34 | If you're getting an address over DHCP, which
is the way most of us get our addresses, every
| | 02:38 | so often things can get a little confused,
that your IP address somehow gets scrambled
| | 02:44 | or you've lost the connection to your
Internet provider because the IP address is wrong.
| | 02:49 | What you can do in this case is click the
Renew DHCP Lease button, and it goes out checks
| | 02:56 | with your router and it
assigns you an address.
| | 02:59 | This maybe the same address you had
before or it may assign you a new address.
| | 03:02 | For example, if another device is latched
onto that old address and that's why you're
| | 03:06 | not able to get through.
| | 03:08 | We'll cancel out of that and there we are.
| | 03:11 | You can also connect via FireWire.
| | 03:13 | We're not going to do that.
| | 03:14 | That's a very unusual way to connect and often times
that's a connection between one computer and another.
| | 03:20 | You'll connect to FireWire cable to your laptop,
the other end of it may go to your desktop
| | 03:26 | Mac, for example, and then you can network
between the two, but that's not something
| | 03:30 | that we're going to look at.
| | 03:32 | And finally, at the bottom of these windows, you can show
Wi-Fi status in menu bar if you like. Click that on.
| | 03:38 | When you click on that, it will search for
networks and then it will call up any network
| | 03:44 | that's within range of you.
| | 03:45 | Again, if you see the Lock icon you're going to
need to know what the password is for that network.
| | 03:53 | And that's a look at the
Network system preference.
| | 03:56 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using an alternate startup disk| 00:00 | Let's take a look at the
Startup Disk system preference.
| | 00:04 | System Preference. Startup Disk.
| | 00:08 | If you have only one hard drive
attached to your Mac, and that's often the
| | 00:12 | internal hard drive, it will start up
from that disk every time you start it up.
| | 00:16 | However, you have the option to start
it up from a different disk if you've
| | 00:21 | attached a different disk to your Mac.
| | 00:24 | Alternatively, if you've partitioned
your disk into two or more volumes, you can
| | 00:29 | install the OS on another partition.
| | 00:32 | So for example, you might have Lion on
one partition and you might have Snow
| | 00:36 | Leopard on another one, if your Mac
supports booting from Snow Leopard.
| | 00:41 | In this case, we have two
hard drives attached to this Mac.
| | 00:44 | There is the internal drive here,
which we see as Macintosh HD, and I have an
| | 00:50 | external FireWire drive,
which is this Porsche drive.
| | 00:53 | You notice it too has a version of OS X on it.
| | 00:58 | If you don't have a version of OS X
on a drive, it will not appear in the
| | 01:02 | Startup Disk system preference
because you can't boot from it.
| | 01:06 | If you want to boot from a
different volume, it's easily done.
| | 01:08 | All you have to do is select
that volume and then click Restart.
| | 01:13 | The next time your Mac boots, it will
boot from the volume that you've chosen.
| | 01:18 | One other option here is Target Disk Mode.
| | 01:20 | Here is how it works.
| | 01:22 | You have two Macintoshes.
| | 01:23 | You string a FireWire cable between the two,
| | 01:27 | Mac A and Mac B. Let's say I want
to boot Mac B into Target Disk Mode.
| | 01:32 | What I do is I restart Mac B while
holding down the T key on the keyboard.
| | 01:37 | When I do that, the Mac will boot
and it will show a FireWire symbol.
| | 01:42 | This indicates that it's in Target Disk Mode.
| | 01:45 | On Mac A, I'll see Mac B's hard
drive as an external hard drive.
| | 01:51 | Okay, so what good is this?
| | 01:52 | Well, really it's good for troubleshooting.
| | 01:54 | If I'm having a problem starting up
from Mac B because there it seems to be
| | 01:58 | something wrong with its hard drive, I
can boot Mac B into Target Disk Mode.
| | 02:03 | Then on Mac A, I can troubleshoot
its hard drive using diagnostic and
| | 02:09 | recovery utilities.
| | 02:11 | This is a good troubleshooting tip to keep
in your back pocket, should you have two Macs.
| | 02:15 | And honestly, that's it.
| | 02:17 | That's Startup Disk.
| | 02:19 | Now this isn't the only way that you can
start up from another drive if you have
| | 02:22 | more than one bootable drive or
partition. Here's the secret.
| | 02:26 | Restart your Mac and hold down the Option key.
| | 02:29 | When you do that, you'll see every
volume that can boot on your Mac screen and
| | 02:35 | then to boot from that volume, simply
select that volume and then login, and
| | 02:39 | that's Startup Disk.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. DashboardUnderstanding Dashboard widgets| 00:00 | Like earlier versions of the Mac OS,
Lion ships with small single-purpose
| | 00:04 | applications called widgets.
| | 00:06 | These widgets run in the
OS's Dashboard environment.
| | 00:10 | There are multiple ways to get to the dashboard.
| | 00:12 | You can swipe on your trackpad
with three fingers to the left.
| | 00:17 | You can also press the
F4 key on many keyboards.
| | 00:21 | If you want, you can go to the Applications
folder and then double-click on Dashboard.
| | 00:33 | And you can also configure a Hot Corner
in System Preferences to expose Dashboard.
| | 00:38 | Now by default you are
going to see four widgets.
| | 00:40 | It's Calculator, Clock, the
Calendar and the Weather widgets.
| | 00:47 | Those widgets that can be configured
will have a little I in the corner.
| | 00:51 | For example, here in the Weather widget,
and I can configure a new location.
| | 00:56 | I am going to type in a zip code,
see what happens, and press Return, and
| | 01:03 | it's Arcata, California.
| | 01:04 | Click Done, right up there in Humboldt County.
| | 01:07 | That is the weather as we speak.
| | 01:09 | Now flip that back around.
| | 01:11 | I can also include a Lows forecast,
click Done, and you see here we have the
| | 01:17 | Highs and Lows along here.
| | 01:19 | Of course you can also enter just the
name of the location. It should pop up.
| | 01:25 | Now our thing's in London.
| | 01:29 | You can add widgets and to do that you
just click the plus button at the bottom of
| | 01:33 | the window and here is a variety of widgets.
| | 01:36 | So for example let's say I want to
bring up Dictionary. I will just click on
| | 01:41 | it, up comes the Dictionary widget,
and I will look for the definition of
| | 01:48 | numbles, and here it is.
| | 01:51 | Once again, it's still the
entrails of an animal, especially a deer.
| | 01:57 | If I wanted to get rid of one of these
widgets, all I have to do is click on the
| | 02:00 | little X in its corner, and it's gone.
| | 02:03 | I want to click this X to make those Xs go away.
| | 02:08 | If you are in Dashboard, you can also
expose the X by simply holding down the
| | 02:11 | Option key and then hovering over
the widget you'd like to delete.
| | 02:15 | So I can delete this one if I cared to.
| | 02:17 | Let go of the Option key and the X disappears.
| | 02:19 | If you click Manage Widgets, you
can choose which widgets you'd like to
| | 02:25 | appear as available.
| | 02:28 | So I have disabled the ESPN widget.
I look down here and note it's now gone.
| | 02:35 | I could turn it back on again, so
it hasn't disappeared all together.
| | 02:37 | I am just removing it from the list
of widgets at the bottom of the window.
| | 02:43 | Finally, if you click on More widgets,
you are taken to Apple's website, where
| | 02:48 | they have a collection of third-party widgets.
| | 02:52 | Now note, some of these haven't been
updated in quite some time, because Apple
| | 02:56 | isn't putting a lot of effort into
widgets any longer, but still there are some
| | 02:59 | interesting widgets here
and they do work with Lion.
| | 03:02 | F4 to go back to Widgets, and if you
want to leave Dashboard, you can just swipe
| | 03:07 | the other way to your right and they
disappear, or press F4, or you can press
| | 03:11 | Escape, or you can click the right-
pointing arrow at the bottom of the screen.
| | 03:18 | And that's Dashboard and widgets under Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Mail, Calendar, and Address BookNavigating the interface| 00:00 | I can certainly provide you with a
good start with Lion's Mail application.
| | 00:04 | And that good start begins with the Mail,
Contacts & Calendars system preference.
| | 00:09 | If you haven't watched the movie on
Lion's Mail, Contacts & Calendar system
| | 00:12 | preference, now is the time.
| | 00:14 | It's here that you'll have the
easiest time adding your e-mail accounts.
| | 00:18 | But it can also be done within Mail.
But it's more easily done here.
| | 00:22 | So again, choose the account, configure
your information, and you're set to go.
| | 00:25 | Now let's go to Mail.
| | 00:27 | Once you've added an account, you just
launch Mail you see any messages in your
| | 00:34 | account in the leftmost pane.
| | 00:37 | Select a message and its
contents appear to the right.
| | 00:41 | Lion's Mail supports
something called conversation.
| | 00:44 | So just look for a message that
has a gray box with a number in it.
| | 00:49 | This tells you that there's
more than one related message.
| | 00:51 | So in this case, we select this
message, you see the number 3 here,
| | 00:55 | and sure enough, there are three
messages as part of that conversation.
| | 01:02 | Also in Lion, you'll see that
there are options in the message header.
| | 01:06 | This is the area that contains
the From and Subject heading.
| | 01:09 | So just click Details for more information.
| | 01:12 | And now I can hide that information.
| | 01:14 | Also, you see also if you hover your
mouse here, you can see controls for
| | 01:19 | deleting, replying to, replying to all,
and forwarding the e-mail message.
| | 01:24 | You can easily move between mailboxes
and notes by clicking the appropriate
| | 01:28 | entry at the top of the window.
| | 01:30 | So here's my Inbox, Sent, Notes, and Flagged.
| | 01:37 | If you have more than one e-mail
account, you're going to see arrows here.
| | 01:40 | You can choose which
account that you want to view.
| | 01:43 | So for example, Sent, I can choose my
MobileMe account, or I can choose Gmail.
| | 01:48 | Now I'd like to know which e-
mail has been sent to which account.
| | 01:53 | So I expose the Accounts pane and you
do this by clicking on the Show button.
| | 01:58 | Now you can view all your mail in a
unified inbox. So click on Inbox and you'll
| | 02:02 | see not only my Gmail account,
but also my MobileMe account.
| | 02:07 | You can also look at things individually.
| | 02:09 | I can look at my Gmail account or I can
separately look at my MobileMe account.
| | 02:13 | The numbers next to these mailboxes
indicate the number of unread messages.
| | 02:17 | So in my Gmail account,
there are 6 unread messages.
| | 02:21 | Now let's talk about
configuring the look of Mail.
| | 02:24 | Suppose you're an old time Mail user
and you don't like this look. Well, we
| | 02:27 | can put things back the way they
were in previous versions of Mail.
| | 02:31 | So we'll go to Mail's Preferences,
select Viewing, and choose Use classic layout.
| | 02:41 | When you do that, that side pane disappears
and instead we see the viewing pane below.
| | 02:47 | And this is the way it was done in Snow Leopard.
| | 02:50 | Another default under Snow Leopard was
Display unread messages with bold font.
| | 02:56 | And again, down here you can see
there's a message with a bold font
| | 03:00 | indicating that it is unread.
| | 03:04 | And we'll close that.
| | 03:05 | If you don't care for the conversation
view, though I find it helpful, select
| | 03:10 | View and Organize by Conversation.
| | 03:16 | And then your conversation view disappears.
| | 03:18 | If you want it back again,
View > Organize By Conversation.
| | 03:22 | And you see these little blue triangles here
indicate that this is part of a conversation.
| | 03:27 | Let's actually create and
receive e-mail messages.
| | 03:30 | To create a message, just click the
Compose New Message button, which is this
| | 03:34 | one, the little pencil icon on a piece of paper.
| | 03:37 | You can also press Command+N and then
that will produce a new empty e-mail message.
| | 03:42 | Fill in the To and Subject fields.
| | 03:45 | So I start typing and watch what happens.
| | 03:48 | If someone is in my Address Book
and I start typing, their address will
| | 03:52 | automatically appear here.
| | 03:54 | To enter it, all I have to do at
this point is press the Return key.
| | 03:58 | Enter a subject, and from the From
menu, you can choose the account that
| | 04:03 | you're going to send from.
| | 04:04 | Fill in the message area.
| | 04:07 | This pop-up menu just next to the From
field allows you to add other fields.
| | 04:11 | So for example, I can add Bcc.
| | 04:15 | This stands for Blind Carbon Copy, Blind
Courtesy Copy, and Cc stands for Courtesy Copy.
| | 04:22 | So if I wanted to send this to somebody
else as well, I will plug in David and
| | 04:26 | there's David Banner. I can also Bcc.
| | 04:30 | This is Blind Courtesy Copy.
| | 04:31 | What that means is that you can send a
message to somebody, but the other people
| | 04:36 | it's being sent to won't know
that you've sent it to them.
| | 04:39 | Christian Fletcher will see this,
David Banner will see this, and also
| | 04:43 | someone else may see this.
| | 04:45 | So Christian and David won't know that
that other person has received the message.
| | 04:48 | It's a little sneaky, but
sometimes you need to do this.
| | 04:52 | You can also attach files to your e-mail messages.
| | 04:54 | One way to do that is to click the
Attach button, and let's see we'll attach
| | 04:59 | this image here, Choose File, and then
it's placed in the body of the message.
| | 05:05 | Alternatively, you can just drag a file into
the body of the message and it will appear there.
| | 05:11 | When you're ready to send the message,
just click the Send button in the
| | 05:14 | corner of the message. And off it goes.
| | 05:18 | In the Mail Activity area, you can see
the progress of your message being sent.
| | 05:22 | (Whoosh)
| | 05:24 | And you'll here that nice
little sound as it goes away.
| | 05:26 | To receive your e-mail, just click to
Get message button at the top left corner.
| | 05:30 | (Beep)
| | 05:31 | You hear a little bleep when it's done,
and then you can check in your Inbox
| | 05:36 | for any new messages.
| | 05:38 | I didn't receive any new messages, but
if I had, they would appear at the top of
| | 05:42 | this list, because I'm sorting by date received.
| | 05:45 | I mentioned earlier that it's a good idea to
add people you e-mail with to your address book.
| | 05:50 | One easy way to do that is to select a
message you receive and choose Message >
| | 05:54 | Add Senders to Address Book.
| | 05:57 | So for example, if for some reason I
wanted to add the iTunes Store to my
| | 06:01 | address book, I simply hover over this, click
on that triangle, and then Add to Address Book.
| | 06:07 | Or I can do this from the menu.
Message > Add Sender to Address Book.
| | 06:15 | To reply to a message, just click
on the Reply button or Reply All.
| | 06:21 | Up pops a new message ready for you to reply.
| | 06:24 | You now have the basics of Mail's
layout and sending and receiving messages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Filtering junk mail and sorting messages with rules| 00:00 | Before we leave mail altogether, we
should take a good look at junk mail and
| | 00:05 | rules, because they're an
important part of managing your email.
| | 00:09 | Go down to Mail and launch it, select
my Gmail, and we'll scroll down and we're
| | 00:15 | going to look for messages that are
marked in brown. And here they are.
| | 00:21 | Messages marked this way indicate
that Mail thinks this stuff is junk mail.
| | 00:26 | When you select one of these messages, you
may decide no, I know what this stuff is.
| | 00:30 | This is perfectly okay.
| | 00:31 | If so, all you have to do is click Not
Junk and that message will be marked as
| | 00:37 | something that's legitimate.
| | 00:38 | Now I've this junk mail person here.
I'm going to say okay, they are junk,
| | 00:42 | but wait a minute, there is another
message from that person down here that
| | 00:45 | is not marked as junk.
| | 00:46 | So how do I mark it as such? Simple!
| | 00:48 | Click the thumbs down button.
| | 00:50 | It is now marked as junk.
| | 00:53 | Again, I can Undo that later and say
no, it's not junk and then find all this
| | 00:57 | person's email and tell mail that it's
not junk and that will help train it.
| | 01:01 | Now training is really important.
| | 01:04 | If you get messages that are marked as
junk and they're not, you must select Not
| | 01:09 | Junk, because that trains Mail.
| | 01:11 | Likewise, if you're getting junk and
you don't mark it as such, Mail is not
| | 01:14 | going to learn and so it won't
be an effective junk mail filter.
| | 01:18 | Now by default, junk mail messages remain
in your inbox and they're marked in brown.
| | 01:22 | Once you're confident that mail is
correctly separating the wheat from the chaff,
| | 01:26 | go into Mail > Preferences,
select Junk Mail, and then select Move it to
| | 01:34 | the junk mail mailbox.
| | 01:36 | You'll be asked if you really want to do
this. Click Move and Mail creates a new
| | 01:42 | Junk folder and inside there are all the
messages that have been marked as junk.
| | 01:49 | It's a good idea to go back in there
every so often, and make sure that what
| | 01:52 | you're seeing is junk, mark the this
stuff that's good as such and then you
| | 01:56 | can delete the other junk.
| | 01:57 | Let's go back to Preferences.
| | 01:59 | you can also fine-tune the
junk mail filter if you like.
| | 02:02 | So for example, you're going to allow
message if the sender is in your Address
| | 02:06 | Book or if you've previously
communicated with this person, you are going to
| | 02:10 | allow that message in or if the message is
addressed your full name that may be okay as well.
| | 02:15 | See what kind of mail you're
getting and then configure these
| | 02:18 | settings appropriately.
| | 02:19 | This option, Trust junk mail headers
in messages, often times an ISP or a
| | 02:24 | service will mark a message
that it thinks is suspect.
| | 02:27 | Mail is perfectly happy to check that
header information and see if it's okay.
| | 02:31 | If it's not, it may mark it as junk.
| | 02:33 | Now let's take a look at rules.
| | 02:36 | Rules is one way of filtering your
messages so that you can file it
| | 02:40 | away automatically.
| | 02:41 | Currently, when you get a copy of Mail,
it will have this one rule from Apple
| | 02:45 | and that puts all your news
from Apple into a specific place.
| | 02:48 | So now I'm going to create a rule of my
own and I do that by clicking Add Rule.
| | 02:53 | We're going to call this rule iTunes
and let's say From Contains @itunes.com.
| | 03:05 | We're going to move the message to a
folder that I created earlier called From
| | 03:10 | iTunes and I will click OK.
| | 03:12 | It'll ask me if I'd like to apply that rule.
| | 03:17 | Yes please, I'll close that
preferences and we'll see what happened.
| | 03:23 | Here is my From iTunes, and sure enough,
anything that came from iTunes appears
| | 03:28 | here in my list of messages.
| | 03:32 | You can also filter messages by
creating smart mailboxes and these are
| | 03:36 | mailboxes that look for certain
conditions and then file messages when those
| | 03:40 | conditions are met.
| | 03:41 | So go to the plus button at the bottom
and click on it and then choose New Smart
| | 03:45 | Mailbox and again, you're going to
set it up much like you set up a rule.
| | 03:50 | So we would call this one on iTunes From
Contains @itunes.com, click OK, and now
| | 04:02 | you see we have a new smart mailbox
that has the same kind of material in it.
| | 04:08 | Note that unlike with rules these smart
mailboxes can't move messages from the inbox.
| | 04:13 | Again, these are the
basics of junk mail and rules.
| | 04:16 | Explore these options, give it a try, I
think you're going to find them a good
| | 04:20 | way to manage your email.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Scheduling appointments with iCal| 00:00 | iCal is another component of Lion's
information hub, an application for keeping
| | 00:05 | track of the events in your and others'
lives, and here are the basics of how it works.
| | 00:11 | So we will launch iCal.
| | 00:13 | With Lion, Apple has changed iCal's
interface to resemble a large desk calendar.
| | 00:18 | Hopefully, you'll like this look,
because there's no way to turn it off.
| | 00:21 | And like it or not, the
interface is pretty straightforward.
| | 00:25 | If you click on the Calendar's button,
by default you see Home, Calendar,
| | 00:30 | and Work calendars.
| | 00:32 | If you uncheck a calendar, any events
associated with the calendar will disappear.
| | 00:37 | So for example, I'll uncheck
Work and my work events disappear.
| | 00:43 | Enable it again and they reappear.
| | 00:46 | Also different from previous
versions of iCal is that you can't show a
| | 00:49 | permanent list of your calendars.
| | 00:51 | You can only view this window and that
disappears when you select something in your calendar.
| | 00:56 | If you have chosen to sync calendars
from say MobileMe or Gmail to iCal,
| | 01:00 | they will appear here as well.
| | 01:04 | So here's Calendar and here's my Gmail calendar.
| | 01:06 | If I want to, I can hide
that, so that doesn't appear.
| | 01:09 | I want to click Show and it does.
| | 01:12 | The Day, Week, Month and
Year buttons show you that view.
| | 01:16 | Here is Day calendar, Week, let's go to
a different week, so we will change to
| | 01:21 | the following week, the week
after, and the week after that.
| | 01:26 | You can see also that you
can have overlapping events.
| | 01:28 | So for example, I have a board
meeting. This is a work event.
| | 01:32 | I am also going to have lunch with
Sally, so I am going to cut this meeting
| | 01:34 | short, so that I can go off
and have lunch with Sally.
| | 01:38 | Month calendar, which is the default,
and you can also view events by year.
| | 01:44 | I'll go back to Month view.
| | 01:46 | Whichever view you are in, there's
always going to be a Today button.
| | 01:50 | I can advance through the calendar
and if I want to go back to Today, all I
| | 01:56 | have to do is click Today
and I'm back to Today.
| | 02:00 | To quickly add an event, all you have
to do is click the plus button.
| | 02:05 | This allows you to enter in natural language events.
| | 02:08 | So for example if I want to have
lunch this Friday with Nick, I would say
| | 02:14 | lunch Friday with Nick and press Return, and
sure enough the event appears on the next Friday.
| | 02:25 | And notice that it's at 12 noon.
| | 02:26 | So if I say lunch, it's going to enter noon.
| | 02:30 | If I were to enter dinner, it
would have shown up at 8 o'clock.
| | 02:33 | Now if you want to, you can get more
specific by entering something like meet
| | 02:36 | Nick October 20th and it will enter
that event on that day. Click Done.
| | 02:42 | You can also enter an event by
simply double-clicking on a date.
| | 02:45 | So here's my event.
| | 02:50 | Now at this point I am going to want
to edit this event, so I select it and
| | 02:53 | press Command+E and now I can edit that event.
| | 02:57 | You can edit many things inside an event.
| | 02:59 | So for example, if I wanted to have lunch all
day with Ian, I can make that an all-day event.
| | 03:04 | Of course, I don't want to do that.
| | 03:06 | You can choose the time
that this is going to happen.
| | 03:07 | So we'll have that happen at 12:00 pm.
| | 03:11 | It's not going to be that long a lunch,
so we will make that go until 1:00 pm.
| | 03:15 | You can have this repeat.
| | 03:16 | So if I want to have lunch with
Ian say once a month, I'll do that.
| | 03:22 | That becomes a repeating event, and
so once a month we will see that event
| | 03:26 | appear on the calendar.
| | 03:27 | This will never end, so we can choose
to do that, or if I am only going to have
| | 03:31 | lunch with Ian every month say for the
rest of this year, maybe we will have
| | 03:36 | that repeat another 16 times.
| | 03:42 | I can choose which
calendar I want that to appear on.
| | 03:44 | This is going to be a work-related
event, so I will change that to Work.
| | 03:47 | I can also set an alert.
| | 03:49 | This is an alarm and it's a good idea.
| | 03:51 | I routinely choose Message with Sound.
| | 03:54 | When I do that the timer shows
that it will remind me by default 15
| | 03:58 | minutes beforehand.
| | 04:00 | I sometimes need a little bit more
warning than that, so I set this to hours
| | 04:03 | before and we will change this to 2 hours.
| | 04:08 | You can set multiple alarms.
| | 04:11 | In case I'm very forgetful, Message
with Sound again, I am going to have this
| | 04:17 | happen 2 days before.
| | 04:21 | So I'll get an alert 2 days before and
I will also get an alert 2 hours before.
| | 04:27 | I can continue to add more if I want to.
| | 04:29 | If I click Add Invitees, I can choose
other people to join my event and it
| | 04:35 | ties into Address Book so it knows who's in
my Address Book, and I can easily add them.
| | 04:39 | So I am going to add Christian
Fletcher because he is a good guy and he
| | 04:42 | doesn't eat too much.
| | 04:43 | If I wanted to I could add an attachment.
| | 04:45 | I can also add a URL, say the restaurant's
URL, and I can add a note. Ian hates fish.
| | 04:54 | Once I have added an invitee I can
click Send and then an e-mail message will
| | 04:58 | be sent to Christian Fletcher saying
don't forget that we have a launch at
| | 05:01 | such and such a time.
| | 05:03 | It sends him a little vCal file, which
is a calendar file, which will then go
| | 05:06 | into his copy of iCal or
some other calendar program.
| | 05:11 | And I will close that out.
| | 05:14 | I don't really want to send that.
| | 05:15 | iCal also supports to do items, which
Apple calls Reminders, things like take
| | 05:19 | out the trash or polish the dog for example.
| | 05:22 | So go to create new reminder and I
want to remember to practice the piano.
| | 05:30 | If you like you can double-click on
that and then choose your priority.
| | 05:34 | It's really important that I practice the piano.
| | 05:37 | Once I have actually practiced the piano,
all I have to do is place a checkmark
| | 05:41 | in that box and that indicates
that I've completed that event.
| | 05:44 | Now let's look at a couple of preferences.
| | 05:48 | You can choose a default calendar.
| | 05:50 | In this case it might be my Home calendar.
| | 05:52 | You can show a birthdays calendar.
| | 05:53 | So anybody in your Address Book that
has a birthday listed, their birthday and
| | 05:58 | name will appear in the calendar.
| | 06:00 | Accounts is important.
| | 06:01 | Let's say I have set up a Gmail
account or a MobileMe account click the
| | 06:05 | Delegation tab and you'll see any calendars
that you have that are part of these accounts.
| | 06:10 | Only when you check this box next to show
will you see these events in your calendar.
| | 06:15 | So if I wanted to show my Soccer
Schedule for my Gmail account I would also have
| | 06:19 | to check that and then those
events will be synced to iCal.
| | 06:24 | And that's iCal in a nutshell.
| | 06:26 | By itself, it's a capable calendar program.
| | 06:28 | When used in league with an iOS device
and an online service such as MobileMe or
| | 06:33 | iCloud, it becomes essential component
for organizing the events in your life.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing contacts with Address Book| 00:00 | Like iCal, Address Book has received a new
look and let's see what that looks like now.
| | 00:05 | Choose Address Book and here we are.
| | 00:08 | Like the paper-based counterpart that
you may have jammed in the desk drawer,
| | 00:12 | Lion's Address Book is designed
to hold and organize your contacts.
| | 00:16 | Now its most basic Address Book is a
place where you can add single contacts.
| | 00:20 | To do that just click on the plus
button and you will see a bunch of fields appear.
| | 00:24 | And you can add phone numbers, you can
add e-mail addresses and so on and so forth.
| | 00:33 | Now one thing you can do when you add
these things, you can determine what
| | 00:36 | kind of field this is.
| | 00:37 | So for example, in the phone number,
you say well, this is their iPhone, so I
| | 00:40 | am going to use that.
| | 00:41 | This is not their work e-mail address,
but rather it's their home e-mail
| | 00:45 | address. And who's their friend?
| | 00:47 | That would be me, I am Joe's best friend.
| | 00:52 | Also if you want, you can
remove some of these fields.
| | 00:55 | So I don't need the assistant field,
so I will click that delete button.
| | 00:58 | We already have the iPhone, so I
will delete that field as well.
| | 01:02 | If I wanted to, I can add a
picture to the Edit button so that their
| | 01:06 | picture appears there.
| | 01:07 | When I'm finished just click on Done.
| | 01:10 | By default, the Address Book should
contain at least one card and that one was
| | 01:14 | created when you created your account.
| | 01:16 | You are going to want to
fill in that information.
| | 01:18 | So here's the one that
was created with my account.
| | 01:21 | Let's edit that a little bit and I click Done.
| | 01:25 | Now as this was set up when I created
my account, this is my home card and you
| | 01:30 | can see that it is by going to Card,
and this is grayed out. I'll make this my
| | 01:35 | home card ,plus there's a little me here.
| | 01:38 | If I wanted to change that and have
somebody else be at this home card, I could
| | 01:42 | say,this Jacob Cunningham character
who apparently works at Acme Spittoons.
| | 01:47 | I could make that my home card by
going to Card > Make This My Card and now
| | 01:53 | that's me and my icon comes along with it.
| | 01:57 | Let's revert that back to my real card.
| | 01:59 | Now this is more than just vanity.
| | 02:04 | If you have a home card set up,
this information will be taken into
| | 02:08 | other applications.
| | 02:09 | So when it's looking for your contact
information it will pull that from Address
| | 02:12 | Book and fill it in from this home card.
| | 02:14 | So it's important that you set that up properly.
| | 02:16 | Now unlike a real paper-based
Address Book, this one lets you arrange
| | 02:20 | contacts into groups.
| | 02:22 | So you can create groups of friends,
business associates, or people you own money to.
| | 02:26 | For example, so let's click on the
Groups tab, and you see here we have set
| | 02:31 | up a few groups, like
Businesses, Family, Friends and Work.
| | 02:37 | You can also create your own groups if you like.
| | 02:39 | Click the plus button, make that your
group, and then you can add people to
| | 02:47 | that group if you like.
| | 02:48 | So let me show all my contacts, and then
I can get to drag people into that group.
| | 02:55 | So Nick, Greg, and Jacob and
apparently I owe money to all these people.
| | 03:02 | Now I can click on that
group and there they are.
| | 03:05 | Another way to create groups is
through Smart Groups and this is really
| | 03:08 | easily done and it's cool way to do it,
because you can filter by things like
| | 03:12 | area code, zip code, or with people
with a common e-mail address or phone
| | 03:17 | number prefix for example.
| | 03:18 | To do that, File menu > New Smart Group.
| | 03:22 | I am going to call this lynda, and Card
contains @lynda.com, and click on OK.
| | 03:36 | And you see the Smart Group shows me
anybody in my Address Book that has
| | 03:40 | a lynda.com address.
| | 03:42 | Now here's one of the cool
things you can do with this.
| | 03:44 | I will go to Mail, I will create a new
message, and I will type in the To field,
| | 03:50 | lynda and it will show me that group.
| | 03:54 | So I can just simply select lynda, and then
it includes everybody that's in that group.
| | 04:00 | From there I can go on and create my message.
| | 04:03 | So I will show all my contacts. Here is Jacob.
| | 04:08 | Suppose I want to share this contact
with somebody. All I have to do is click on
| | 04:11 | the Share button and that address is
included in an e-mail message. I can then
| | 04:18 | e-mail that to somebody.
| | 04:21 | But there are other ways to get addresses out.
| | 04:22 | One of them is to simply
drag the contact to the desktop.
| | 04:27 | This creates a vCard file that you can
then e-mail to somebody if you like or
| | 04:32 | put it on a device that
supports the vCard format.
| | 04:36 | If you select multiple contacts, you
can drag them all out, and they too will
| | 04:40 | appear in a single vCard file that can
be shared with other applications that
| | 04:45 | support the vCard format.
| | 04:47 | I will delete those.
| | 04:47 | Now let's take a quick look
in Address Book preferences.
| | 04:55 | You see you can sort things by
first name or last name if you like.
| | 04:58 | We will look at Accounts and here are
your options for syncing your contacts.
| | 05:03 | You can sync with MobileMe,
with Yahoo! or with Google.
| | 05:07 | There is the template, so that you can
decide how your fields are going to be laid out.
| | 05:12 | If you want to add a field, something
a little bit more obscure like a URL,
| | 05:16 | somebody's birthday or the Twitter
handle for example, you can do that.
| | 05:22 | And you can automatically format phone numbers.
| | 05:24 | For example, if you enter 555555534 and
hit Return, and then save the contact,
| | 05:32 | it will put all the dashes in the
right place and you can choose the format
| | 05:36 | that you want to use.
| | 05:41 | Now Address Book has some more
obscure talents that are beyond the scope of
| | 05:44 | this course, but what you have learned
here serves the vast majority of your contact needs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Key Productivity AppsBasic word processing in TextEdit| 00:00 | TextEdit is Apple's text editing application.
| | 00:04 | While it's not a full-blown word
processing application like Apple's Pages or
| | 00:09 | Microsoft Word, it has a surprising
amount of power for a free text editor.
| | 00:12 | Let's take a look at it.
| | 00:13 | I will launch it from Spotlight,
press Return, and here is our TextEdit window.
| | 00:23 | Now TextEdit looks a bit like a word
processing application that you might have
| | 00:26 | seen in from the mid 90s.
| | 00:28 | So there is not a ton of stuff in
here but there are some useful things.
| | 00:31 | So I will enter some text, then I can
select that text and from the Styles menu
| | 00:43 | choose a new style for that.
And the default back here.
| | 00:48 | I can choose another font. Let's say Birch Std.
| | 00:54 | That's nearly unbeatable.
| | 00:58 | I can also type in the first few letters of
a font and produce that, so there is Times.
| | 01:04 | You can choose different styles for your font.
| | 01:06 | put that into Italic, Bold, Bold-Italic.
| | 01:12 | And note these styles are
different than what I've pulled here.
| | 01:17 | When I use this Styles menu this is
the OS imposing a style on the text.
| | 01:24 | In this case these are actual font variations.
| | 01:28 | So when I choose here, this is a font
variation that's built into the Times font.
| | 01:32 | I can change the size of the text.
| | 01:35 | Here is a really big text.
| | 01:37 | I can make it quite small.
| | 01:41 | I can change the color of the text.
| | 01:44 | So here is kind of this orangey
text. Green. And back to black.
| | 01:52 | You can also change the
background color if you like.
| | 01:56 | So if you want to have a bright yellow
document with bright green text you're
| | 02:01 | certainly welcome to.
| | 02:02 | I don't advise it ever but it's
something you can do if you choose to.
| | 02:07 | And then here are some shortcuts
for Bold, Italic, and Underline.
| | 02:12 | You can also align your text.
| | 02:13 | So here is left aligned, center,
right aligned, and this is justified.
| | 02:20 | What justified text does is it evens
up the alignment on both sides of the
| | 02:24 | text wherever possible.
| | 02:27 | You can change your line
spacing. So select this.
| | 02:32 | Let's make it 1.4 and now you see
that you have got a little more space
| | 02:38 | between your lines.
| | 02:39 | You can also tighten it up if you want.
| | 02:42 | If you want you can make
bullet lists and here's the list.
| | 02:50 | And you can choose different
preceding characters if you like.
| | 02:54 | By default TextEdit produces documents
in rich text and that means you can use
| | 02:59 | this kind of formatting.
| | 03:00 | If you don't want to you can use plain text.
| | 03:03 | So we go to Format > Make Plain Text,
click OK, and you see now you have no
| | 03:10 | formatting options at all, you just get
this really generic dull-looking text.
| | 03:15 | There are some cases when
you may want to use that.
| | 03:21 | Certain programming languages. For
example if you are coding they want plain text;
| | 03:25 | they don't want any kind of styled text.
| | 03:28 | So if you have that need
choose to use plain text instead.
| | 03:31 | Now I am going to see if I
can make TextEdit correct me.
| | 03:39 | Notice when I misspell a word
it will pop-up a suggestion.
| | 03:43 | In this case, I misspelled color.
| | 03:45 | It suggests c-o-l-o-r.
| | 03:47 | If I want to accept that I just press
Return and it offers the correct spelling.
| | 03:56 | I can undo that if I want to,
so I have gone back a space.
| | 04:00 | It says well, did you really mean to
say collor? And if so it will accept that.
| | 04:06 | You click that and it allows the
original text to stay where it was.
| | 04:10 | Now you can turn off this
AutoCorrect option if you want.
| | 04:14 | You just go into the Language & Text
system preference and into Text and there
| | 04:18 | you see the option to turn it off.
| | 04:20 | So we looked at this previously
but we will look just one more time.
| | 04:24 | Language & Text > Text and you
turn that option off and it will no
| | 04:34 | longer AutoCorrect.
| | 04:35 | Now note that you have to quite TextEdit and
then restart before this setting will take.
| | 04:44 | You can also create lists and tables.
| | 04:46 | So we will go to the Format menu. Choose List.
| | 04:50 | We will create a list that has little
checkmarks before each item, click OK, and so on.
| | 05:02 | Delete all that.
| | 05:05 | And you would also make tables. Format > Table.
| | 05:10 | You decide how many rows and columns you want,
so we are going to make 4 rows, 5 columns.
| | 05:17 | We can choose the alignment if we choose to.
| | 05:19 | Where the text is going to go,
whether on the left side or go in the right
| | 05:24 | side, justified middle, and you can
also create a cell border if you like and
| | 05:29 | decide on the color.
| | 05:35 | You can even embed
hyperlinks that work in documents.
| | 05:38 | So we choose Edit > Add Link
and then we will have it go to...
| | 05:48 | Click OK and this now is a live link
so when I click on it Safari launches,
| | 05:55 | or your default browser, whichever one you
use, and it will take you to that linked site.
| | 06:00 | Delete this.
| | 06:06 | You can also embed images into your
documents and to do that we will go to File
| | 06:12 | > Attach Files. Click Open.
| | 06:15 | You can't see it because this image
is really big but the image is indeed
| | 06:22 | embedded in the TextEdit file.
| | 06:26 | When I talk about speech I also mentioned
the TextEdit can speak documents to you.
| | 06:34 | Just highlight the text,
Edit > Speech > Start Speaking.
| | 06:40 | (Computer: This is some speech
for TextEdit. Let's see how it sounds.)
| | 06:45 | So what this has done is it's
using the default Alex voice to read
| | 06:50 | the highlighted text.
| | 06:51 | Again, look at the movie about speech
and you will see that you can change these
| | 06:55 | voices to another voice that you prefer.
| | 06:58 | Now is as good a time as any
to talk about Lion's services.
| | 07:01 | These are features that are activated
based on the application you are using and
| | 07:05 | the context of selected items.
| | 07:08 | Using services you can often interact
with other applications in your Mac.
| | 07:12 | So we have some selected text here.
| | 07:14 | I will go to TextEdit.
| | 07:14 | We will look at the Services menu and
you see from within TextEdit there are
| | 07:19 | certain things that we can do with this text.
| | 07:21 | I can for example make a new Sticky Note.
| | 07:25 | Here come Stickies.
| | 07:26 | So it's taken that highlighted text and
its putted into a Sticky Note and we are
| | 07:30 | going to look at Stickies in another movie.
| | 07:33 | Other options from Services, you can
also make a new e-mail with this selection
| | 07:38 | or a new note with this selection.
| | 07:40 | We will also talk about Services when
we are talking about Automator but keep
| | 07:44 | Services in mind because you will find
some hidden capabilities and some of your
| | 07:47 | favorite programs using Services.
| | 07:49 | And that's largely everything you
need to know about TextEdit, Apple's not
| | 07:53 | so basic text editor.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Dictionary| 00:01 | Clever as we may be, a word or concept
occasionally drifts by that confounds us.
| | 00:06 | Lion is there to help with the
dictionary, a resource not only for looking up
| | 00:09 | words, but finding synonyms and
antonyms researching at online encyclopedia, and
| | 00:15 | explaining Apple related technical terms.
| | 00:18 | Let's look it up now by going to
Spotlight and launching Dictionary.
| | 00:25 | It's a fairly simple interface.
| | 00:28 | All have you do is enter the
term or phrase you are looking for.
| | 00:30 | Let's enter something like, well, Lion.
| | 00:33 | If you have the All button selected,
it will look not only in the dictionary,
| | 00:37 | but also the Thesaurus,
Apple's website, and Wikipedia.
| | 00:43 | Also below the word you've
searched for are related words.
| | 00:45 | So let's check out each one.
| | 00:47 | So here's Dictionary.
| | 00:48 | A nice illustration of a lion, we
click on that link, you can see an expanded
| | 00:53 | version of the illustration.
| | 00:58 | Click Thesaurus and you see
related words. Lionhearted.
| | 01:02 | It's an adjective, it will give you the
definition, plus it has the antonym there.
| | 01:06 | So it has cowardly as the
antonym or the opposite.
| | 01:10 | If I click on cowardly, then I moved to
yet another word and I can navigate back
| | 01:15 | by clicking on the left arrow.
| | 01:16 | Apple's resource, it tells us what Lion
is in Apple's world which is, of course,
| | 01:22 | the name for Mac OS X version 10.7.
| | 01:25 | And then click on Wikipedia and you see
this very long Wikipedia entry about it.
| | 01:32 | All these blue lines indicate that
these are links, so you can further your
| | 01:36 | search simply by clicking on links,
and again you can work your way back by
| | 01:42 | clicking on the back arrows.
| | 01:43 | If you like you can select text.
| | 01:48 | You can copy it and paste it.
| | 01:58 | One other thing to note, however, the
Dictionary is built into the OS, so it
| | 02:02 | works in other places.
| | 02:04 | So for example, it's what's helping to
autocorrect your text in TextEdit and
| | 02:09 | helping you in that same
regard in Mail, for example.
| | 02:13 | And Dictionary is also
tied to other applications.
| | 02:15 | So if you need to look up the definition,
just use the Dictionary shortcut and
| | 02:20 | I'll show you how that
works again. We go into Safari.
| | 02:23 | I want to look up debuted.
| | 02:29 | So I'll double tap with three fingers
on that word and up pops Dictionary.
| | 02:33 | Again, this is all just built into the
Mac OS and so Dictionary is being used to
| | 02:38 | define this word for me, using that
double tap with three fingers gesture.
| | 02:44 | So Dictionary is great not only as a
standalone application, but also as a
| | 02:47 | future that's built into Mac OS X.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Preview: Working with images| 00:01 | Lion's Preview application serves not
only as a way to view graphics and PDF
| | 00:04 | files, but also as a light editor.
| | 00:07 | We'll begin our look at Preview by
examining how it works with image files.
| | 00:11 | And here is a picture of my pet crab, Bill.
| | 00:15 | Now the toolbar holds some handy tools.
| | 00:18 | So I can zoom in and I can zoom out.
| | 00:25 | When I'm zoomed in, I can use the Grab
tool and then move the image around so I
| | 00:30 | can better see what's on screen and focus on
just the parts I want to see. Zoom out again.
| | 00:37 | We'll then move onto the Selection tools.
| | 00:40 | You can select a portion of your image.
| | 00:41 | I've got the Rectangular Selection tool here.
| | 00:45 | Now what would I do with this thing?
| | 00:47 | Well, one thing I might
want to do is crop that image.
| | 00:49 | So I select, go to Tools, and then choose Crop.
| | 00:55 | And now I've got just that selection.
| | 00:56 | I'll undo that by pressing Command
+Z, bear an inch back down again.
| | 01:03 | I can also do an elliptical selection.
| | 01:08 | Again, Command+K this time to
crop, and I can crop it that way.
| | 01:12 | I can use a Lasso which is something that
allows me to freehand draw my selection.
| | 01:23 | Command+K, here's the crab.
| | 01:31 | And there are a couple of other
cool utilities down here at the bottom.
| | 01:33 | One is called Smart Lasso.
| | 01:36 | So what I do in this case is I just draw around
the edges of the object that I want to select.
| | 01:41 | So it doesn't have to be exact.
| | 01:44 | I'm going to going around the edges here,
I'm going to the claw here, and I've
| | 01:50 | got a couple more claws here, and there.
| | 01:56 | I now have a selection. So I'll go up
to the New from Clipboard command in the
| | 02:01 | File menu, and now I have just the crab.
| | 02:06 | So it's not incredibly great selection.
| | 02:08 | I would still need to go in with a
photo editing application such as Photoshop
| | 02:12 | Elements for example and
clean this image up a little bit.
| | 02:14 | But it is an easy way to do a rough
selection of something if you like, and you
| | 02:18 | can do it all within Preview
which again is a free application.
| | 02:21 | No, I don't want to save that.
| | 02:23 | Click on there to get rid of that selection.
| | 02:25 | A similar tool is Instant Alpha.
| | 02:29 | So select an area that you want to
create a mask for and just start dragging
| | 02:34 | down while holding the mouse button
or while clicking on your trackpad.
| | 02:40 | And that will then create an alpha
mask of what you want, and then make
| | 02:45 | your selection that way.
| | 02:46 | As you see, this is even
rougher than what I did before.
| | 02:50 | So if you have a lot more contrast in
your images, the Instant Alpha is pretty
| | 02:53 | good because it can make some very
good determinations where you have very
| | 02:57 | hard edges on things.
| | 02:58 | In this case, the top of the crab is
a little bit white and it blends in a
| | 03:02 | little bit with the sand around it.
| | 03:03 | So it's tougher to make that kind of
selection, but it is possibly in a greater contrast.
| | 03:07 | You can also annotate your images if you like.
| | 03:10 | Click on the Annotation button
and you have multiple options here.
| | 03:14 | One thing you can do is just
draw shape around something.
| | 03:18 | So here's a bit here.
| | 03:22 | You can use this for
highlighting things if you want.
| | 03:24 | If you have an image and you want to
make a circle around something to draw
| | 03:27 | someone's attention to
something, you could use the Oval.
| | 03:36 | Say look, pay attention to that.
If you want to be even more obvious,
| | 03:41 | use the Arrow, say this thing,
the crab, this one right here!
| | 03:45 | No, not the sand, the crab.
| | 03:50 | You can make things even more obvious
by creating a text box. Get rid of that.
| | 03:57 | And you can even have your crab
think something. And indeed, he is.
| | 04:10 | I could use a speech bubble
but that's-- we know crabs don't speak.
| | 04:15 | You can also change the
color of your text if you like.
| | 04:17 | That could've been red text.
| | 04:19 | You can change the outline of
whatever it is you're drawing.
| | 04:24 | So if we have a speech bubble, I
can make the outline really dark.
| | 04:31 | You can also change the font.
| | 04:33 | I can change the size of the font. I can also
choose a different font if I want to use that.
| | 04:37 | And you have the Annotations list here.
| | 04:40 | So anytime you've made a change, if
I've added a text box or I've drawn a
| | 04:44 | rectangle around something, all my
annotations are going to appear in this list
| | 04:47 | and I can see what it is
that I've done to this document.
| | 04:52 | There are few other things
that you can do that are helpful.
| | 04:54 | Go to the Tools menu, you can adjust
the size of your document if you like by
| | 04:59 | pixels, or you can choose a preset size.
| | 05:04 | And you can also lightly edit the look
of your images by choosing Adjust Color
| | 05:09 | from the Tools menu.
| | 05:10 | And this is a bit like working in iPhoto.
| | 05:15 | So you can make some adjustments
here. You can change the Exposure.
| | 05:18 | Make it a little bright or dark.
| | 05:19 | I can change the Contrast if I like.
| | 05:24 | Highlights and Shadows.
| | 05:25 | I can saturate the thing or I can
take it down so it looks like it's a
| | 05:30 | grayscale, change
temperature, and so on and so forth.
| | 05:34 | If you've used iPhoto for any kind of
photo editing, these tools are familiar to you.
| | 05:38 | And we'll Reset All to
restore to its original look.
| | 05:44 | One other thing. Once you've done what
you need to do with your image, you can
| | 05:47 | export it to another format.
| | 05:49 | So go to the File menu, choose Export, and
here you can change the format of your image.
| | 05:56 | So right now it's a JPEG image, but I
can change this to a PDF file, PNG, or
| | 06:01 | a TIFF if I chose to.
| | 06:04 | And once you've done that, all you
have to do is click Save and then you have
| | 06:07 | another version of your document but
it's in this other graphics format.
| | 06:10 | We won't do that now. I'll click
Cancel, and I'll close Preview.
| | 06:16 | And that's a look at images in Preview.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Preview: Working with PDFs| 00:00 | Lion's Preview like Preview in Snow Leopard
before it can work with PDFs as well as image files.
| | 00:06 | Let's now look at what
it can do with those PDFs.
| | 00:09 | So I've opened my Finder window, go to
my Documents folder, double-click on this
| | 00:15 | PDF file, and we'll take a look.
| | 00:17 | Look in the toolbar and you'll see you
have the same kind of tools that you have
| | 00:22 | when you're looking at an image.
| | 00:24 | So I can zoom in and I can zoom out.
| | 00:28 | When zoomed in, I can grab the Grab tool,
move the document around, if I choose to.
| | 00:35 | I can also make a selection
using the Rectangle Selection tool.
| | 00:42 | And I can annotate.
| | 00:43 | You have some different options when
you're annotating a PDF versus an image file.
| | 00:48 | So for example, I can highlight text.
| | 00:52 | So if I want to call out something
in a document to a coworker, I can
| | 00:56 | highlight that text.
| | 00:58 | And you can choose the text color in
this Color menu here. I'll undo that.
| | 01:04 | I can also underline text. Undo that.
| | 01:08 | I can strike through, get rid
of the stuff. Right menu, copy.
| | 01:15 | I can also, much like in images, add a text
field or a speech bubble or a thought bubble.
| | 01:21 | I can also add a note.
| | 01:22 | Let's put that note right here.
| | 01:31 | And now that note is attached to this.
| | 01:33 | So if I pass this PDF file along to
somebody else, they'll see my note and then
| | 01:37 | they can act on the
suggestion that I've offered.
| | 01:39 | I can get rid of that note that way.
Select it, press Delete, and the note is gone.
| | 01:49 | Again, just like with images, you can
change the border, you can call up the
| | 01:53 | Font palette, change the font and the
size, and you can also take a look at any
| | 01:59 | annotations you've made along the way.
| | 02:02 | Now one of the coolest new features in
the Lion version of Preview is that you
| | 02:06 | can attach your very own
written signature to a document.
| | 02:09 | You do that by going to Preferences, click on
Signatures, and then click Create Signature.
| | 02:17 | Hello there!
| | 02:18 | Now what I do is I hold up a piece of
paper with my signature on it, much like
| | 02:24 | this, and try to put it on that blue line.
| | 02:27 | When you do that, you can see
the preview and then click Accept.
| | 02:34 | And there is my signature.
| | 02:37 | So I've got a signature set
there, I will now close that.
| | 02:41 | Now let's suppose I need to sign on
this document somewhere. So I'll scroll
| | 02:45 | down. I'm going to sign off on that image.
| | 02:48 | So from the Signature pop-up menu, I
choose my signature and I just draw it in.
| | 02:57 | Once it's in, I can drag it around, I can
change its size, and do what I like with it.
| | 03:07 | Now this is fine for sort of inter-
office PDF swapping and it may work with some
| | 03:12 | online forms for example.
| | 03:14 | Oftentimes you'll go get a PDF form
online somewhere, you've brought it into
| | 03:18 | Preview, you need to sign it.
| | 03:21 | And what usually happens is you have to
print it and then you sign it with the
| | 03:24 | pen and then you have to scan it
to get it back into your computer.
| | 03:28 | And that's just kind of a pain.
| | 03:30 | So this feature is for that.
| | 03:32 | This way your signature is already in here.
| | 03:34 | You can add it to a document
that way and then off it goes.
| | 03:38 | Now this is important.
| | 03:40 | This is not a very
secure way to sign a document.
| | 03:43 | If you have secure PDF files, they will
ask you for an electronic signature and
| | 03:48 | they don't mean this kind of signature.
| | 03:49 | Rather if you're using Adobe Acrobat
for example, they have a feature in there
| | 03:54 | for digital signatures, and that
is much more secure than this is.
| | 03:57 | This is just kind of an easy way to do a
very casual signature. Still, it's cool.
| | 04:05 | Now let's expose the sidebar.
| | 04:07 | So here's our document.
| | 04:08 | You can add other PDF files here.
| | 04:10 | You can either insert them into the
current PDF or you can view multiple PDF
| | 04:14 | files in the same window, and
I'll show you how that works.
| | 04:18 | So once again, we're going to go to
Documents. I'll grab this other PDF file,
| | 04:23 | and I can insert it between Page
1 and 2 of the current PDF file.
| | 04:31 | So here's Page 1. I've inserted my next
document in here, and here we are back
| | 04:36 | to Page 3 from the original
document. I'll undo that.
| | 04:40 | We'll go back to the Finder.
| | 04:42 | You can also create a
separate PDF in the same window.
| | 04:46 | And to do that, you drag it above the
current document above that triangle.
| | 04:54 | And now you can view multiple PDF files.
| | 04:56 | So here's one PDF file and
here's the other PDF file.
| | 05:01 | One other thing that's worth
noting is that you can add blank pages.
| | 05:05 | So Edit > Insert Blank Page.
| | 05:09 | Now I've got a blank page and I
can move that around if I want to.
| | 05:12 | So I'll move it here between Page 1 and 2.
| | 05:15 | Well, what's the purpose of this?
| | 05:17 | Well, this is one way you can
add annotations to your document.
| | 05:19 | If you don't want to plaster with
notes, you can actually create a blank page,
| | 05:23 | then you can add some text here if you
want, say using a text box, and you're good to go.
| | 05:35 | Now one thing to note here is when
you save one of these documents, any
| | 05:39 | annotations that you've added are
actually burned into the document.
| | 05:43 | They're incorporated with it.
| | 05:44 | They're not a layer or anything
else that you can remove later.
| | 05:47 | So if you've added a thought bubble to
your document and then you've saved it
| | 05:51 | and passed it along, that
thought bubble is part of the document.
| | 05:55 | So for this reason, you want to keep
more than one version of a document, so
| | 05:58 | somebody can look at the document
that you've marked up, but they also need
| | 06:01 | the original, so that they don't have your
changes permanently burned into the document.
| | 06:07 | And that is the ins and
outs of PDF files in Preview.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Installing and managing fonts| 00:00 | With Lion comes a collection of
fonts or typefaces for both viewing and
| | 00:05 | printing. Apple has offered an
application called Font Book for organizing these
| | 00:09 | fonts in the last few iterations of the Mac OS.
| | 00:12 | And Lion is no different.
| | 00:13 | Here's how Font Book shakes out.
| | 00:15 | Before you get to that, fonts are
stored in a variety of locations on your Mac.
| | 00:20 | You'll find them in the System folder,
inside Library folder, inside of the Fonts folder.
| | 00:32 | You'll also find them within the
Library folder at the root level of the hard
| | 00:36 | drive in the Fonts folder.
| | 00:40 | If you go to your Users folder and
to its Library folder, in its Library
| | 00:47 | folder you will find a
Fonts folder there as well.
| | 00:51 | Now let's look at how to manage these things.
| | 00:55 | So we'll go to Font Book and here we are.
| | 00:58 | So you can view your fonts
as All Fonts. Here they are.
| | 01:05 | Those on your Computer, those in
your User folder, and then they're also
| | 01:09 | collections, so there's English,
Fixed Width, Fun, Modern, PDF.
| | 01:15 | And these collections are all
installed by default when you install Lion.
| | 01:19 | Now the first three buttons along the
top allow you to preview your fonts.
| | 01:24 | So you have three views. There's sample,
there's repertoire, and then there's custom.
| | 01:34 | While you're here, you can enlarge fonts, boom!
| | 01:37 | And you can also make them smaller.
| | 01:40 | So this gives you an idea of how
they're going to look in a document.
| | 01:43 | You can disable fonts if you like.
| | 01:45 | A way to do that is to select a font,
choose Edit, and then choose the font that
| | 01:50 | you'd like to disable.
| | 01:51 | It will ask you if you really want to do that.
| | 01:55 | Yes please, I do want to do that.
| | 01:57 | When you do that, a little Off
entry appears next to the font.
| | 02:01 | If later you wish to enable that font,
select it, and then select Enable.
| | 02:07 | It doesn't say on again.
| | 02:08 | It just simply doesn't have Off next to it.
| | 02:11 | Now it's possible to install duplicate
fonts and doing so isn't always a good
| | 02:15 | idea because it can lead to conflicts.
| | 02:17 | Now to find out if you have a
conflict because of duplicates, choose Edit >
| | 02:23 | Look for Duplicates.
| | 02:25 | It will tell you if it's found duplicates.
| | 02:26 | In this case, we have 13 duplicate fonts.
| | 02:29 | You can resolve this automatically.
| | 02:31 | And when you do that, Font Book will
take those duplicate fonts and it will
| | 02:35 | disable them for you.
| | 02:36 | You can also Resolve Manually.
| | 02:38 | Click that and then you can choose to
go through each font and decide what
| | 02:42 | you want to do with it.
| | 02:45 | You note that this font has a
little yellow triangle next to it.
| | 02:49 | And what that indicates is that
there's some kind of problem and fortunately,
| | 02:52 | when you select a font that has a
yellow triangle next to it, it tells you
| | 02:55 | what that problem is.
| | 02:56 | It says Multiple fonts are
installed on this computer.
| | 03:00 | So again, you can go through and
look for duplicates, resolve that
| | 03:03 | automatically, and it will get
rid of your duplicates for you.
| | 03:06 | Another way you can check for problem
fonts is you can go to the File menu and
| | 03:11 | choose Validate Font.
| | 03:14 | A report comes up and it will
indicate if there's some kind of problem.
| | 03:17 | Now I have only done this with one font,
but let's say we select all the fonts.
| | 03:21 | So I select a font, Command+A to
select them all, Validate Fonts, and it will
| | 03:28 | run through the fonts and let me
know if there are any problems with it.
| | 03:32 | You see a progress here. So far we have
a lot of good fonts, but at this point
| | 03:36 | we seem to have 28 minor problems.
| | 03:41 | So it's gone through our fonts and it
shows us that 504 fonts have passed. There
| | 03:45 | are minor problems with 53 of those fonts.
| | 03:48 | So click on the problem report and
you'll see a list of all the fonts that
| | 03:53 | appear to have a problem and it will
tell you what the problem is.
| | 03:56 | In this case, duplicate fonts.
| | 03:59 | At that point, you can search for
duplicates and you can get rid of your
| | 04:03 | duplicates and we might as well do that now.
| | 04:08 | Let's Resolve Automatically and the
triangles disappear, indicating that Font
| | 04:12 | Book has taken care of those duplicates.
| | 04:15 | One other thing, you can also
create your own font collection.
| | 04:18 | Again, Lion has created some for
us, but you can create your own.
| | 04:21 | So just click on the plus
button. We'll call it Chris' Fonts.
| | 04:27 | I'll go to All Fonts and then I'll
find those fonts that I want to add to my
| | 04:33 | collection. Add that, Baghdad, and Bangla MN.
| | 04:42 | Now I select that
collection and here are my fonts.
| | 04:48 | This is also reflected in the operating system.
So let's go to TextEdit, select that text.
| | 04:57 | I could then go to Format > Font >
Show Fonts, but quite honestly, here's a
| | 05:02 | shortcut you should learn right away, and
that's Command+T. That opens the font browser.
| | 05:08 | Now here's my collection, Chris' Fonts.
Arial, Baghdad, American Typewriter.
| | 05:17 | So this is a very simple way to
quickly get to fonts that you like a lot.
| | 05:21 | Let's quit TextEdit and back to Font Book.
| | 05:30 | And so that's Font Book, a way to
troubleshoot font problems as well as create
| | 05:34 | custom font collections.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating quick notes using Stickies| 00:00 | I'm not a particularly tidy person,
but the one sloppy habit I simply can't
| | 00:05 | develop is slathering my
monitor with sticky notes.
| | 00:08 | Fortunately, thanks to
Lion Stickies I don't need to.
| | 00:12 | As its name implies, Stickies is an
application for creating virtual sticky notes.
| | 00:16 | You type directly into one of the
example notes or press Command+N and
| | 00:20 | you create a new one.
| | 00:21 | So let's look at that.
| | 00:21 | You've seen things like this
before in a paper equivalent.
| | 00:28 | So, again, you can just type into the
example note or Command+N and you can
| | 00:36 | create a new sticky.
| | 00:40 | If you want, you can change
the color of your sticky note.
| | 00:42 | Blue, pink and purple.
| | 00:47 | So this is one way of prioritizing stickies.
| | 00:49 | You make the really important stuff
bright pink and other one can be kind of
| | 00:53 | a dull looking color.
| | 00:55 | You can also change the font if you like.
| | 00:57 | I mentioned this before, right?
| | 00:58 | Command+T, here is your
Fonts palette, choose your font.
| | 01:04 | It's going to be a fancy
sticky. And close that up.
| | 01:10 | If you like, you can also add a link.
| | 01:17 | So go up to the Edit menu, Add Link, and OK.
| | 01:24 | Here is our link. Click on it and Safari
will launch and it'll take you that website.
| | 01:34 | Now when creating a sticky note,
you don't have to create simply text.
| | 01:38 | You can also add images to it.
| | 01:41 | So I could go in the Documents folder.
Here is my Sticky, grab a picture, drag it in.
| | 01:54 | Again, this a very large picture so it
fills up this sticky, but you see, it can
| | 01:59 | expand the sticky to
accommodate whatever you've dragged in.
| | 02:01 | You can also put PDF files in here if
you like. Goodbye, crab. And save you...
| | 02:09 | Now if you want to keep a sticky
note front and centre, just choose Note
| | 02:15 | and Floating Window.
| | 02:19 | So now if I go into another
application, you see the sticky stays in front.
| | 02:26 | So it really is in that
case like a paper sticky note.
| | 02:29 | it just stays there until
you move into the background.
| | 02:33 | So you can take the note, take out
Floating Window, and then you can go back
| | 02:38 | to your other application, activate the
window and it floats above your sticky note.
| | 02:43 | Now if you think it's too much trouble
to launch stickies every time, you want
| | 02:46 | to make a note, you can be in an
application and sometimes create a sticky note.
| | 02:49 | So I'm in TextEdit, I select my text,
go to Services > Make New Sticky Note,
| | 03:01 | and here's my sticky.
| | 03:03 | And again, I can make that a floating
window and it's always going to be in
| | 03:07 | front of whatever else I'm doing.
| | 03:11 | So put TextEdit, and goodbye sticky,
and goodbye sticky, and that's it.
| | 03:19 | Simple, efficient and easy to use. That's stickies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Calculator| 00:00 | At one time if you wanted to let your
geek flag fly you packed a very expensive
| | 00:05 | scientific calculator.
| | 00:06 | Now if you have a Mac there is no need.
| | 00:08 | Lion equips your Mac with a calculator
application that does more than meets the eye.
| | 00:13 | So we'll launch it from
Spotlight and press Return.
| | 00:18 | By default the calculator looks like
kind of the thing you would pick up at
| | 00:21 | the five and dime store down at the
corner, if indeed you have such a thing.
| | 00:26 | To use it you can click on the number 89+
63=152, as we all know. To clear, clear.
| | 00:36 | If you have a number pad you can use
that instead. 45x812=36540, and there is a
| | 00:48 | Clear key on this number pad that I can use too.
| | 00:51 | If you have a laptop that doesn't have a
number pad you can hold down the FN key
| | 00:56 | and then type in numbers
using the alternate keys.
| | 00:59 | So J, K and L are 1, 2, 3 respectively,
U, I, O are 4, 5, and 6, and then the top
| | 01:06 | row of 7, 8, 9 are also 7, 8, 9.
| | 01:09 | The question mark is Plus, the equals
is Minus, P equals Multiply and O equals
| | 01:16 | Divide or of course, you can use the
numbers that are at the top of the keyboard
| | 01:20 | rather than working with
this rectangular arrangement.
| | 01:23 | Calculator has far nerdier
possibilities, so go to the View menu and you can
| | 01:27 | choose a different kind of
calculator. So Scientific for example.
| | 01:32 | So it doesn't have to be just basic
arithmetic. You can get into more advanced
| | 01:36 | calculation here or if you're a
programmer check out Programmer. This way you're
| | 01:42 | able to do more binary kind of calculations.
| | 01:45 | Now one of calculator's less well
-known charms is its ability to
| | 01:51 | perform conversions.
| | 01:52 | So we'll go back to the Standard view.
| | 01:54 | Now we're going to enter the number
that we want to convert, so we'll say 1 for
| | 01:58 | example, then I go to Convert.
Let's look at some thing like Area.
| | 02:04 | So I want to convert 1
Acre to Hectares. Convert.
| | 02:11 | So an acre is 0.40468564224. That's
so many hectares fit into an acre.
| | 02:22 | Fascinating though that may be, there is
actually a more helpful conversion you
| | 02:26 | can do and that is Currency.
| | 02:28 | So select Currency, you want to make
sure that you're connected to the Internet,
| | 02:33 | and then when the Currency
sheets down click on Update.
| | 02:38 | Now you have current conversions for that date.
| | 02:41 | Now I want to convert from say US
Dollars to the Euro, so today what will a
| | 02:47 | dollar get me in Euro.
| | 02:50 | So a dollar is worth .694059 Euros and
of course you can go to the other way.
| | 02:58 | It doesn't have to start with your home country.
| | 03:03 | So let's say 5, Convert > Currency.
| | 03:09 | This time I want to go from Euros to US
Dollars. Convert and that shows me what
| | 03:21 | I can get for my US Dollars.
| | 03:24 | Calculator has a couple of other tricks.
| | 03:25 | The first is that it can speak button presses
to you as well as results. So go to Speech.
| | 03:30 | (Computer/Alex: Speech enabled.)
| | 03:33 | Speak Button Presses and
Speak Result. Now I just --
| | 03:37 | (Computer/Alex: 891+387=1278.)
| | 03:48 | And that's Alex doing our calculations for us.
| | 03:50 | Thank you, Alex and I've turned that off.
| | 03:55 | Also there is a paper tape if you want
to keep track of the calculations that
| | 04:00 | you've done, so we go to Window > Show
Paper Tape, clear that, and we'll perform
| | 04:07 | calculations, so I'm doing it on the number pad.
| | 04:20 | And there is the result, in case you're
wondering what all those things added
| | 04:23 | up to. We can clear that and we clear the
paper tape and we get rid of the paper tape now.
| | 04:30 | Now if you like with the paper tape
you can copy the values in it and paste
| | 04:34 | them into a sticky or a text document if you
like. And that's really all there is to Calculator.
| | 04:40 | It's a small yet valuable
tool that's bundled with Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. SafariNavigating the web| 00:00 | Safari is Apple's Web browser which has
been bundled with the Mac OS for several
| | 00:04 | generations of that OS.
| | 00:06 | In this movie, we'll start by looking at how
you can navigate around the Web with Safari.
| | 00:10 | So we'll launch Safari from the dock.
| | 00:14 | (Music playing)
| | 00:22 | When you first launch Safari, you see a
welcome screen and then a Top Site page.
| | 00:26 | This shows you popular
stories and sites at the moment.
| | 00:29 | So you click a site to be taken to that page.
| | 00:35 | So here we are on Apple's start page.
| | 00:38 | We'll go back to the Top Sites and Top
Sites will keep track of where you go
| | 00:42 | with Safari and populate the
page with your favorite sites.
| | 00:45 | If you don't like having Top Sites
showing as you start up, it's simple to change.
| | 00:50 | Just go to Safari's Preferences, make
sure you're in the General Preference, you
| | 00:55 | choose New windows open with, and
you have a number of options here.
| | 00:58 | It can be Top Sites.
| | 00:59 | It can be Homepage.
| | 01:00 | I prefer Empty Page.
| | 01:01 | I want kind of a blank slate when I start here.
| | 01:03 | And then also you have the option New
tabs open with. And again, I like Empty
| | 01:09 | Page, but you can also choose a Homepage,
the Same Page, or a Bookmark of some kind.
| | 01:13 | I'm going to set Empty Page.
| | 01:14 | If I chose Homepage, you can enter
where you want your homepage to be.
| | 01:19 | In this case, Apple sets it to
apple.com of course because they want you to
| | 01:23 | visit there, but you
could put anything you like.
| | 01:25 | For example, it can be lynda.com.
| | 01:29 | I can have my new windows open at
lynda.com as well as any new tabs open there.
| | 01:36 | Another option is if you're on a website,
you can simply click the Set to Current Page.
| | 01:41 | That button will be active and
that will become your homepage.
| | 01:45 | So let's look at navigating around with Safari.
| | 01:48 | The main way people do this is to go to the
address bar and they just type in a Web address.
| | 01:53 | And that's what starts with http://www whatever.
| | 01:58 | You don't have to type the
http or the www most times.
| | 02:03 | Simply just type something in.
| | 02:05 | So we'll just go to lynda.
| | 02:07 | It naturally assumes .com, I
press Return, and here we are at
| | 02:12 | lynda.com's homepage.
| | 02:13 | I'll demonstrate that again with
another homepage, so I can go to macworld,
| | 02:20 | and we'll go to Apple.
| | 02:24 | In order to go back and forward,
you have a number of options.
| | 02:27 | If you have a trackpad or a Magic Trackpad,
you just swipe your two fingers and move back.
| | 02:35 | And I showed you this in the gestures movie.
| | 02:39 | And forward, two finger-swipe.
| | 02:43 | Another option is to simply click on
the arrow keys. Back, back, and forward.
| | 02:52 | You can use Command key. So hold down
the Command key, and then left bracket
| | 02:56 | will take you back a page, and back again.
| | 02:59 | And Command+Right bracket moves you forward.
| | 03:04 | Once you've visited a few sites, you can
return easily by looking at your history.
| | 03:08 | So click on the History menu and
it will show you where you've been.
| | 03:13 | To go to one of those places, simply click
on the entry and you're taken to that site.
| | 03:18 | We'll return by going back.
| | 03:21 | Another option is you can click and hold
on the Back button and it will show you
| | 03:25 | where you've been recently.
| | 03:29 | Another way to get around the
Web is to use the Search field.
| | 03:33 | So click here in the Search
field and enter a search term.
| | 03:38 | For example, let's put in?
And here's my column on Macworld.
| | 03:48 | Now we'll look for?.
| | 03:49 | Here are some cute cats.
| | 04:00 | And funny dogs. This is a very funny dog.
| | 04:04 | So if you wanted to get recent searches,
simply click and hold the Search bar
| | 04:09 | and you can go back and restore your search.
| | 04:12 | Also you don't have to search with Google.
| | 04:14 | That's the default, but you can
choose other search services such as Yahoo!
| | 04:19 | or Bing for example.
| | 04:23 | One other thing to point out is that
if you go to the View menu and Show Tab
| | 04:28 | Bar, you can have multiple
pages open in the same Web browser.
| | 04:32 | So I'm going to right-click
on the tab bar. Choose New Tab.
| | 04:35 | I can bang back and forth between
webpages simply by clicking on the tabs.
| | 04:42 | And those are the basics of
moving around the Web with Safari.
| | 04:46 | In subsequent movies, we'll look
at some of Safari's other features.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with bookmarks| 00:01 | Now let's look at adding and
organizing Safari's bookmarks.
| | 00:04 | You don't want to have to type in the
address of a website every time you visit it,
| | 00:08 | so you should create a bookmark for it.
| | 00:10 | And that's easily done.
| | 00:11 | I'll go to the Bookmarks
menu and select Add Bookmark.
| | 00:15 | If you're going to spend a lot of
time in Safari, it's worth knowing the
| | 00:18 | keyboard shortcut, which is Command+D.
When you do this, down comes a sheet and
| | 00:24 | it offers you the option to store
your bookmarks in a variety of places.
| | 00:29 | It can be a part of Top Sites
Reading List which we're going to cover in
| | 00:32 | a subsequent movie.
| | 00:33 | You can put it in the Bookmarks Bar,
and I'll show you what that looks like.
| | 00:39 | You see this is the Bookmarks
Bar here and it appears right here.
| | 00:43 | We're going to delete that
for now. Back to Command+D.
| | 00:47 | You can put it in any existing
folders that you have in the Bookmarks menu.
| | 00:50 | Right now we just have News and Popular.
| | 00:52 | Or you can put it in the Bookmarks menu.
| | 00:56 | Again, name it, add, and I look in the
Bookmarks menu, and here it is as lynda.
| | 01:03 | Let's add a few more.
| | 01:04 | Command+D, put that in the menu as well.
| | 01:07 | My macworld, I'm going to add that one too.
Change the name because it's too long.
| | 01:20 | So we can go to Flickr, and let's add Twitter.
| | 01:39 | And I put all those in the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 01:42 | And we'll add one more.
| | 01:45 | Now I could hit Command+D again and
add this to my Bookmarks menu, but
| | 01:48 | there's another option.
| | 01:49 | And that is to take the Bookmarks icon
and drag it down into the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 01:58 | And now with just a simple
click, I can go to that website.
| | 02:03 | Now let's look at our bookmarks.
| | 02:04 | We're starting to get a few
bookmarks here and it's starting to look a
| | 02:07 | little bit unorganized.
| | 02:10 | So let's add a bookmarks folder.
| | 02:12 | This takes us to the
Bookmarks page within Safari.
| | 02:16 | We now have a new menu and
here we can drag in bookmarks.
| | 02:19 | So let's make this my Bookmarks menu.
| | 02:23 | Now for my Bookmarks menu, I can choose
websites that I want to add to my folder.
| | 02:28 | So I'll put macworld in there, Flickr,
and of course lynda will go in there.
| | 02:37 | So here's my Bookmarks folder.
| | 02:38 | If I want this folder to appear in my
Bookmarks menu, I select Bookmarks menu,
| | 02:43 | and then I grab my Bookmarks folder,
and I add it to the list of bookmarks.
| | 02:49 | Now we'll take a look in the
Bookmarks menu, and here is my folder.
| | 02:54 | There's a hierarchy to the folder.
| | 02:55 | So I select the folder, I can drag
my mouse over, and then I can select a
| | 03:01 | bookmark from within that folder.
| | 03:03 | Now let's look at other ways of
organizing bookmarks within the Bookmarks window.
| | 03:07 | One thing I can do is select a bookmark
and I can add it to the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 03:13 | If I do that, you notice that it
appears right here in the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 03:18 | Now when I did that, it is no
longer in my Bookmarks menu.
| | 03:21 | So let's go back to the Bookmarks Bar,
take Twitter, we'll put it back in the
| | 03:27 | Bookmarks menu, go back again.
| | 03:30 | This time I'm going to Option+
Drag it into the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 03:34 | So I hold on the Option key, I drag it
over to the Bookmarks Bar, it appears
| | 03:39 | in the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 03:40 | But if I also go back to Bookmarks,
you'll see that it's still in my Bookmarks
| | 03:44 | menu because I've made a copy of it.
| | 03:47 | One copy was in the Bookmarks Bar, and
the other one remains in the Bookmarks menu.
| | 03:51 | Now I'm going to create one more folder.
| | 03:56 | I'll call it Get Up.
| | 04:00 | Let's find some items I can put in there.
| | 04:02 | Let's see. I'll put Apple in there as
an Option+Drag, YouTube, Option+Drag, and
| | 04:12 | Twitter as an Option+Drag.
| | 04:14 | Now I'm going to put it in the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 04:18 | I'll continue to call it Get Up,
and then I enable Auto-Click.
| | 04:30 | So what in heck's name
does this do? I'll show you.
| | 04:33 | So let's just go back to the regular Web.
| | 04:37 | You notice a little
square appears next to Get Up.
| | 04:39 | When I click on that, three tabs open.
| | 04:44 | These are all the bookmarks that
I've put into my Get Up folder.
| | 04:48 | So one thing I can do is when I first
get up in the morning, I launch Safari,
| | 04:52 | and I click on this bookmark, it opens
my favorite three sites in the morning so
| | 04:57 | I can easily browse between
them simply by clicking on tabs.
| | 05:02 | This feature has been there for a
while but it's one that people don't often
| | 05:05 | use and I find it very convenient.
| | 05:08 | Let's go back to the
Bookmarks window one more time.
| | 05:10 | If you have a lot of bookmarks, and
after a while you're going to accumulate a
| | 05:13 | lot of them, it's absolutely worth
your time to start organizing them.
| | 05:17 | You can do that by
creating this bookmarks folder.
| | 05:19 | So you can create one for Fun and one for
Work and then start organizing your bookmarks.
| | 05:31 | So for me, it's fun to go to eBay.
| | 05:36 | It's fun to fantasize about going somewhere.
| | 05:39 | And for Work, I may need in a job
someday so that's worth looking at
| | 05:42 | CareerBuilder, oh, absolutely.
| | 05:44 | I should do that as well.
| | 05:47 | Once I've organized the stuff into my bookmarks,
then I can decide where I want to put them.
| | 05:51 | So I can put Fun up here in the
Bookmarks Bar and I can also put my Work
| | 05:59 | stuff up there as well.
| | 06:02 | Then when I want to have a little fun,
I click on that folder and then I
| | 06:05 | choose my destination.
| | 06:07 | Same idea with Work.
| | 06:08 | Look for the triangle, choose the site
you want to go to, and you're on your way.
| | 06:13 | Now everybody is going to have different
ways of organizing their bookmarks, but
| | 06:16 | any organization is better than none.
| | 06:19 | Now a couple of more bookmarks tricks.
| | 06:20 | Grab a little bookmark and this can be icon
in your address bar and drag it to the Desktop.
| | 06:26 | When you do this, this
turns into a Web location file.
| | 06:29 | I'll show you how this works.
| | 06:30 | I'll quit Safari, I'll double-click
on that file, and when I do, I open up
| | 06:36 | directly to that website.
| | 06:37 | So you can create a folder full of
these things and then double-click the site
| | 06:41 | you want to go to and Safari will open and take
you immediately to the site you want to visit.
| | 06:46 | Throw them away and quit Safari again.
| | 06:50 | Also you can use Spotlight to enter
the name of a favorite website, and from
| | 06:54 | there launch that site.
| | 06:56 | So let's go to lynda, and sure enough,
if you look down at the webpages entry,
| | 07:02 | you will find your bookmark plus a preview.
| | 07:04 | So I can click on that, Safari
launches, and it takes me to that website.
| | 07:09 | And that's the wonderful world of bookmarks.
| | 07:11 | Another way to quickly
navigate to your favorite websites.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding and reading RSS feeds| 00:00 | Safari is not only a web
browser, but also an RSS reader.
| | 00:04 | RSS means really simple syndication
and it's a way to quickly read a list of
| | 00:09 | headlines and story topics on websites
that support RSS feeds. It works this way.
| | 00:14 | So I'll launch Safari. I'll go
to a website that has an RSS Feed.
| | 00:20 | I have one that I've recently
visited and here is the RSS button.
| | 00:24 | Now when I click on there, it will
show me the RSS feeds for that site.
| | 00:28 | So if a site has an RSS
feed, you will see this box.
| | 00:31 | if it doesn't, you won't.
| | 00:33 | Now it gives me the
option to view it in two forms.
| | 00:36 | RSS Feed or Atom Feed.
| | 00:39 | We're going to choose RSS Feed.
| | 00:40 | Atom is just another way of
getting these kinds of headlines.
| | 00:44 | Below you see summary items from that website.
| | 00:47 | So you'll see the headline and
you may see a blur below that.
| | 00:52 | You'll also see artwork in many cases.
| | 00:54 | This is not the full article.
| | 00:56 | You can change the article length if you
like by using the Article Length slider.
| | 01:00 | So you can see less
information or you can see more.
| | 01:04 | You can use a search field to
look with in the RSS Feed to see if
| | 01:07 | there's something you like.
| | 01:08 | You can also sort in other ways.
| | 01:09 | So now we're sort of by Date,
Title, Source, New, and so on.
| | 01:14 | You can also look for recent articles. All,
Today, Yesterday, Last Seven Days, and so on.
| | 01:19 | You can bookmark an RSS Feed
just as you can any other URL.
| | 01:23 | So let's press Command+D to create a bookmark.
| | 01:26 | Notice this is a little different
than we've seen with other bookmarks.
| | 01:29 | In this case, you name your bookmark.
| | 01:34 | Now, you can not only add your
bookmarks to Safari and choose where you want to
| | 01:38 | put it, but you can also add it to Mail.
| | 01:41 | So I click Mail and I click Add.
| | 01:43 | Now let's go to Mail and see what's happened.
| | 01:46 | Here is Mail and here is
the RSS entry within Mail.
| | 01:52 | Mail can also act as an RSS reader.
Here's the RSS Feed from Apple's Hot News
| | 01:57 | and as we've just added, here is the lynda RSS.
| | 02:01 | All I have to do is select an item
within Mail and I can see that item that's
| | 02:05 | related to that RSS Feed. Pretty slick!
| | 02:08 | If I want to read the full article,
all I have to do is click on the
| | 02:11 | headline and here we are.
| | 02:14 | So the full article linked from the RSS Feed.
| | 02:17 | Now this is a reasonably
slick way to view RSS feeds.
| | 02:20 | Personally, I continue to use a
dedicated RSS reader for this kind of thing, but
| | 02:25 | then I have a lot of feeds
| | 02:26 | I'd like to read in dedicated
newsreader such as NetNewsWire or Reader, which I
| | 02:30 | find a better way to go, but if you
like to glance it just a few feeds, Safari
| | 02:34 | plus Mail is a very good option.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Reading List| 00:00 | And then there's Reading Lists, a
feature introduced by Lion that lets you
| | 00:04 | bookmark stories for later reading.
| | 00:06 | Why not use a bookmark?
| | 00:08 | We'll choose Bookmarks and then Add
to Reading List, and you see we a get
| | 00:14 | a little icon that pops over here where
these eyeglasses are and that's our Reading List.
| | 00:20 | So the page you're now looking at is put
into this Reading List and then you can
| | 00:23 | return to it later to read the story.
| | 00:25 | Let's do that with a couple of other things.
| | 00:28 | Macworld, Bookmarks > Add to Reading
List, and we'll go over to Apple's site,
| | 00:39 | and we will also add that to the Reading List.
| | 00:42 | Now I click on the Reading List to
hide it again and let's say later in the
| | 00:46 | afternoon I want to revisit one of
these sites, and the story on it.
| | 00:51 | I click on the story, hide the Reading
List, and then I can go ahead and read
| | 00:56 | that page that I have put into my Reading List.
| | 00:58 | Now note that this is not the same
as using something like Instapaper for
| | 01:03 | example, where you can read the story
offline. You have to be connected to the
| | 01:07 | Internet for this to work.
| | 01:09 | If I did not have an Internet
connection I wouldn't be able to read these
| | 01:12 | stories because Safari isn't caching the
stories but rather it's simply creating
| | 01:17 | these links and bookmarks to
it that I can later pull up.
| | 01:20 | However, one thing I can do is I can
show all my stories or I can show just
| | 01:25 | those stories that are unread.
| | 01:30 | So I've gone through the page.
Fascinating, so glad that I've been here.
| | 01:35 | I'll go to Wikipedia, I'll go back to
my Reading List, show Unread and it shows
| | 01:42 | those pages that I've gone from top to
bottom to are now considered read and so
| | 01:47 | they're taken off that list.
| | 01:49 | I can also Clear All and get rid of all
the stories that are in my Reading List.
| | 01:54 | So is this really just a glorified bookmark?
| | 01:57 | Well it's not entirely.
There are few advantages.
| | 02:00 | First of all, when iCloud ships, and it
isn't shipping as I record this, then
| | 02:05 | anything you would add to your Reading
List will be available to any other iOS
| | 02:09 | device or computer that's running
Safari if you have an iCloud account.
| | 02:13 | So the syncing bit is good.
| | 02:15 | If I've added stuff to my Reading List
on my Mac and later I'm working on my
| | 02:19 | iPad or I want to read something that
I've added to my Reading List on my Mac, I
| | 02:23 | can easily do that because it's
automatically synced between the two devices.
| | 02:27 | And of course, as I mentioned, you can
keep track of what you have and haven't
| | 02:31 | read, plus you get a nice icon and a
little blurb about whatever it is that you
| | 02:36 | want to read, right there in the list.
| | 02:38 | Now I've mentioned that you can clear
all if you want, but you can also clear
| | 02:42 | individual pages from here.
| | 02:43 | All you have to do is hover over the
page, click the X, and that's gone out
| | 02:50 | of your Reading List.
| | 02:52 | Reading Lists can be a helpful
feature if your Mac is connected to the
| | 02:56 | Internet and unlike with the bookmark
you can get a better idea of what you
| | 02:59 | have and haven't read.
| | 03:01 | Still it's no threat to dedicated
offline reader such as Instapaper or Read It Later.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving web pages and creating web clips| 00:00 | Web clips are portions of webpages that you
can store in Dashboard for later browsing.
| | 00:06 | Unlike something like a picture
clipping these clips are updated as the webpage
| | 00:10 | is updated, so let's see how that works.
| | 00:13 | File > Open in Dashboard. You'll be
given a little rectangle and you use this to
| | 00:17 | select portions of the website
that you'd like to keep track of.
| | 00:20 | So I'm going to choose this, which are the
three hot stories of the day, and click on it.
| | 00:25 | That's now selected, if I wanted to I could
resize that box but the current size is good.
| | 00:30 | Now I just click Add at the top of the
window and that clip appears in Dashboard.
| | 00:36 | Now keep an eye on it. You'll notice
that as it sits there it updates itself.
| | 00:43 | Here's is our second headline,
and here's our third headline.
| | 00:48 | Just like any Dashboard widget you can
drag it around, and if you want to hold
| | 00:52 | down the Option key and you can get rid
of it, and back to Safari with a swipe.
| | 00:58 | And honestly that's it.
| | 01:00 | Where you will getting benefits from
Web clips is using them for portions of
| | 01:03 | Webpages that are updated fairly regularly.
| | 01:06 | This allows you to view updated
information without the other clutter that
| | 01:09 | may fill that page.
| | 01:11 | It's an often overlooked Safari
feature but one that can be really helpful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Safari to search the web| 00:01 | In another movie we looked at the
basics of searching the Web with Safari, but
| | 00:04 | there are a couple of other tricks
you can use with almost any browser.
| | 00:07 | I'm going to click in the Search field.
Now suppose I enter something like
| | 00:14 | screen casting with the Mac, and click here.
| | 00:19 | Look at my list of results. We have a
few results here that have nothing to
| | 00:24 | do with me, and it's all about me, so let's
put this in quotation marks and see what happens.
| | 00:32 | We find that the very first hit is now
this lynda.com movie about screen casting
| | 00:38 | with the Mac and this is of
course that I did some time in the past.
| | 00:42 | When I put my searching quotes, you can
much more carefully narrow your search,
| | 00:46 | because you're searching for that
exact phrase, rather than individual words
| | 00:50 | within that phrase that are sort of
mixed up with Google's magic to try to
| | 00:54 | produce accurate results.
| | 00:56 | You can also narrow your search by
putting a plus sign before the word
| | 01:01 | you're looking for.
| | 01:02 | So I can put something like lynda +Breen,
Return, and these are the results that
| | 01:14 | must include the word Breen.
| | 01:16 | Now you see, in some cases we've got a
very good hit. In other cases not so much so.
| | 01:20 | It's showing this other spelling of lynda.
| | 01:23 | but again, they all have Breen in it.
| | 01:25 | I can also Exclude search terms by
putting a minus before that, so I can do
| | 01:32 | lynda +Chris -Breen, so it has to
include Chris, but it cannot include Breen.
| | 01:39 | So here at lynda.com, Chris
Orwig is included, but I'm not.
| | 01:43 | You can also search by sites, so for
example, enter site:lynda.com, space, and
| | 01:56 | then we'll put my name in, and as you
can see by the list of links this will
| | 02:01 | search only the site that you've searched for.
| | 02:03 | In this case I'm searching for lynda.com and
it shows you just the results from that site.
| | 02:09 | If you want to look at another search,
if you want to look at other advanced
| | 02:12 | search options, click the Advanced
Search link, and you'll find many
| | 02:16 | options offered by Google.
| | 02:18 | The other search services, Bing and Yahoo!,
also have advanced options.
| | 02:23 | Couple of other tips, you can find a
list of recent searches by clicking on the
| | 02:28 | magnifying glass icon, and you can
track back through your searches.
| | 02:33 | if you want, you can
clear those recent searches.
| | 02:36 | Also if you want to go back the site
of your original search, click on this
| | 02:40 | orange back button. This will take you
back to the original Google page where
| | 02:43 | you were conducting the search.
| | 02:45 | This is helpful if you've conducted the
search and you've traipsed off through
| | 02:48 | seven or eight different links, and now
you're far away from the original site.
| | 02:53 | Rather than having to go back to the
History menu, for example, you can just
| | 02:56 | simply click on that orange button,
and return to the original search.
| | 03:01 | Again, many of these are tricks that you
can use with the browser of your choice.
| | 03:04 | So it doesn't have to be Safari.
| | 03:05 | It can also be Firefox or Chrome.
| | 03:08 | Keep them in mind and you'll find
what you want on the Web faster and more effectively.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening local files in Safari| 00:01 | We know that Safari is a solid Web
browser, but you can also use it to open
| | 00:04 | more than webpages.
| | 00:06 | You can also open some of the Mac's
local files and I'll show you how to do that.
| | 00:10 | You can do this because of the
plug-ins installed with Safari.
| | 00:13 | So look under the Help menu, look at
Installed Plug-ins, and we'll scroll down a
| | 00:17 | bit and we'll see the QuickTime Plug-in 7.7.1.
| | 00:23 | Now that may change in the version you
have, if there's an update to QuickTime.
| | 00:26 | The idea is look at the left here and
you could see all these various media
| | 00:30 | types that can be opened with this plug-in.
| | 00:32 | So let's see how that works.
| | 00:33 | I'll go to my Documents folder, move this
over this way, and let's play an audio file.
| | 00:41 | (Music playing)
| | 00:50 | We're rocking out to the
Jellybricks. Now a movie.
| | 00:52 | (Music playing)
| | 00:58 | )Female Speaker: Welcome to Hansel and Petal.
We are full service florist specializing in
| | 01:02 | weddings and corporate events.)
| | 01:06 | Here's Crabby McCrableton.
| | 01:08 | Also you can open PDF files.
| | 01:10 | I'll drag one of those over.
| | 01:12 | Now note this about PDF files. When you do
this, you see the little window at the bottom.
| | 01:17 | This allows you to zoom in and out.
| | 01:18 | You can also choose to open the PDF
in Preview by clicking that button, and
| | 01:24 | here's our PDF file.
| | 01:26 | And if you want, you can
download a PDF to the Download folder.
| | 01:30 | Now this makes very little sense
given that this is a local file.
| | 01:33 | However, if you were on the Internet
and you found a PDF file, you could click
| | 01:36 | on this button and then download
the PDF to your Downloads folder.
| | 01:40 | So in that case, it's helpful.
| | 01:43 | Couple of things to note. You can't
drag multiple files into a Safari window
| | 01:48 | because it can only open one file at a time.
| | 01:51 | And if something won't open, you can
try dragging it into the address bar and
| | 01:55 | see if that works a little bit better.
| | 01:58 | So I'll drag my movie up into the address bar.
| | 02:01 | (Music playing)
| | 02:06 | And you can tell that this is a local
file because it reads file:/// and then it
| | 02:12 | shows the path name to that media file.
| | 02:15 | That shows you that you're
working with the local file.
| | 02:17 | So what good is this when you likely have a
perfectly fine application to open these files?
| | 02:22 | Well, sometimes it's easier to just
drag in a file that you want to preview
| | 02:26 | with Safari rather than going to all the
trouble to open it in a separate application.
| | 02:30 | And that's media files in Safari.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with Safari's preferences| 00:01 | There is a lot of action in Safari's
preferences and some of it can alter
| | 00:04 | your browser experience,. Let's
march through them now, and the first
| | 00:08 | preference is General.
| | 00:10 | Safari doesn't have to be your
default web browser. If you have another web
| | 00:13 | browser installed, such as Chrome or Firefox,
you can choose it from this pop-up menu.
| | 00:19 | Whenever you encounter some kind of
web link, let's say in an e-mail message
| | 00:22 | for example, click on it. Instead of Safari
launching, in this case. Firefox would launch.
| | 00:27 | I take that back to Safari. Default
search engine. Google is the default, but
| | 00:33 | you can choose Yahoo!
or you can choose Bing.
| | 00:35 | We have looked at some of this configuration
before, so we don't need to go over it again.
| | 00:40 | New windows open with, and then you choose
how you want your windows and tabs to open.
| | 00:44 | You can remove your history
items after a certain period of time.
| | 00:47 | We're going to talk about Privacy
and Safari in another movie, so we'll
| | 00:50 | save that for later.
| | 00:52 | By default, downloads go to the Downloads
folder, but you can have them go somewhere else.
| | 00:56 | If you want to click on Other and have
them go to your Desktop for example, just
| | 01:00 | select Desktop, click Select, and your
downloaded files will go to the Desktop.
| | 01:05 | I will say I don't recommend doing that
because after a while your desktop is to
| | 01:09 | be completely cluttered with
stuff and that's not a great idea.
| | 01:13 | You can remove items from your downloads lists.
We're also going to look at that in Privacy.
| | 01:17 | Appearance. If a website isn't
configured to show a particular font, you can
| | 01:22 | choose which font it will show, again,
if that's not hard coded into the site.
| | 01:28 | Bookmarks, you can decide what's going
to be in the bookmarks bar. By default it
| | 01:32 | includes Reading List, Top Sites,
but you can also include Address Book.
| | 01:36 | So any contacts in your Address Book
that also have a website associated with
| | 01:40 | the contact will appear
in this Address Book list.
| | 01:43 | Also include Bonjour.
| | 01:44 | If there are any network devices that
use Bonjour that you can access some
| | 01:48 | features from via your
browser, they will appear there.
| | 01:51 | Bookmarks menu, same idea, you're just
configuring this, so you either include
| | 01:55 | Address Book items in Bonjour or not.
| | 01:58 | Tabs, when you open pages in tabs, you
can choose to open pages in tabs instead
| | 02:03 | of windows. By default it's never,
automatically, or always. Depends how you like
| | 02:07 | viewing your web browser.
| | 02:09 | By default Command+Click
opens a link in a new tab.
| | 02:12 | I think that's a great
feature, so leave that on.
| | 02:14 | RSS, I've talked a little bit about
RSS. By default Safari use the RSS
| | 02:20 | application. You can also choose Mail,
or if you like, if you have an RSS reader
| | 02:24 | application, you can direct RSS there instead.
| | 02:28 | And then there is his Auto Fill.
| | 02:29 | If you are filling out of a web form,
you can use the info that's in your
| | 02:32 | Address Book card, so let me
click Edit here for example.
| | 02:35 | It will open Address Book
and it will show my card.
| | 02:40 | So if I'd entered an e-mail address
here and then I'm filling in a web form, it
| | 02:47 | would automatically insert
that address into the web form.
| | 02:51 | I can also store usernames and passwords.
There's a little issue with security here.
| | 02:55 | If you're the only one using your Mac,
this is perfectly fine to allow this to
| | 02:58 | happen, but if others are going to
be using it, I would not turn this on,
| | 03:02 | because if there's a stranger sitting
at your computer, you don't want them
| | 03:05 | filling in a username and a password
for some kind of retail site for example.
| | 03:10 | There is security built into Safari,
so it will warn you if you seem to be
| | 03:14 | entering some kind of fraudulent site.
Other things, plug-ins, Java, JavaScript,
| | 03:19 | block pop-up windows, again, ask for
web content. There are some malicious web
| | 03:23 | pages out there. Something you're not
encounter very often, but if they are, you
| | 03:27 | can choose to disable some of the stuff,
so that can automatically divert you to
| | 03:30 | another website for example.
| | 03:34 | Privacy, we're going to talk
about that in another movie.
| | 03:36 | Extensions, these are things you can
add to Safari to enhance its capabilities,
| | 03:40 | Click on Get Extensions and
you'll go to Apple's Extension site.
| | 03:44 | Let suppose that I wanted to include
Twitter in Safari as an extension. I could
| | 03:48 | simply install it now.
| | 03:50 | It installs it and it will now
appear in Extensions, and then I can decide
| | 03:54 | whether I want to enable it. I can
disable it. I can also uninstall it.
| | 03:59 | Just a word of warning, I
wouldn't overload Safari with extensions.
| | 04:02 | Sometimes when you packet with too
many extensions, things can get a little
| | 04:06 | funny, and if you don't want extensions on,
you can simply turn them off using this button.
| | 04:14 | And then there's Advanced there.
There's some Universal Access setting, so
| | 04:17 | if you have a hard time reading small
print, you can expand that, and these
| | 04:21 | are other settings, are things that most
people don't need to worry about. And that's it.
| | 04:26 | A rundown of Safari's preferences.
| | 04:29 | Some of them could be useful to you,
so spend some time with them and see what you think.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring privacy settings| 00:01 | Look, I am the last one to suggest that
you have something to hide, but there are
| | 00:05 | definitely times when you don't want
Safari keeping track of your every web
| | 00:09 | movement. When you're working on
sensitive projects at work for example.
| | 00:12 | In this movie, we will examine how to
better maintain your privacy on the Web.
| | 00:17 | Before we talk about erasing your
tracks, let's look at how to avoid creating
| | 00:21 | those tracks in the first place.
| | 00:22 | Go to the Safari menu and
turn on Private Browsing.
| | 00:29 | A message will pop-up and it will
tell you that it can keep track of your
| | 00:33 | browsing history but in this case it
won't. So click on OK. You see the Private
| | 00:39 | notice up in the address bar and that
indicates that Safari isn't going to keep
| | 00:42 | track of the pages you visit your
search history or any auto-fill entries.
| | 00:47 | Now note that this is a setting that you
have to turn on every time you launch Safari.
| | 00:51 | So just because you turned it on today,
once you quit Safari you have to turn
| | 00:56 | it on again when you launch it the next day.
| | 00:59 | Turn it off for now.
| | 01:02 | So let's say you have traipsed around
the web for a while and you'd like to
| | 01:05 | delete what you've done on the web.
| | 01:07 | You can choose to erase data that's
already been collected, using Safari's
| | 01:10 | Reset Safari command.
| | 01:13 | So under Safari menu Reset Safari
and you see that you have a number of
| | 01:16 | options, but you can uncheck those that you don't
want to use. Lt's run though them very quickly.
| | 01:22 | Clear History.
| | 01:23 | Safari keeps a history of
everything you've done. You can clear that so
| | 01:26 | your history is gone.
| | 01:27 | You can reset the Top Sites screen, so
instead of going to a bunch of pages that
| | 01:31 | you may have visited in the past or that
you clearly like, it will reset it back
| | 01:35 | to generic top sites.
| | 01:36 | It will remove all your webpage preview
images. So if you go over to Spotlight,
| | 01:41 | select a webpage, you won't
see a cached preview image.
| | 01:45 | You can also clear the Downloads window,
so people can't see what you've downloaded.
| | 01:49 | It will remove all your website icons.
| | 01:51 | If you have saved passwords and
names, you can clear that as well.
| | 01:55 | It will also get rid of AutoFill form text.
| | 01:58 | You can close all your Safari windows,
reset your location mornings, and you can
| | 02:03 | remove all website data.
| | 02:05 | I am not going to do any of that
right now. Just know that you can clean up
| | 02:08 | Safari very easily with these options.
| | 02:11 | Now Safari will also store data from
sites that you have visited in a cache and
| | 02:15 | this helps open pages more quickly.
| | 02:17 | I mostly use this for troubleshooting
a slow browser, but if you choose Empty
| | 02:22 | Cache, you are going to
get rid of these cache files.
| | 02:25 | We will go ahead and empty those.
| | 02:28 | So now when you visit a site, it's
going to have to reload everything instead
| | 02:32 | of looking back into the cache and then use
some of that information to load the site quickly.
| | 02:36 | We will go into
Preferences and click Privacy.
| | 02:44 | You can remove your web cookies if you like.
| | 02:46 | You do that by clicking Remove All
Website Data and clicking Remove Now.
| | 02:51 | So what exactly is this?
| | 02:53 | Cookies are little tiny bits of
information that your web browser will store.
| | 02:59 | Now sometimes this is
really important information.
| | 03:01 | For example, I've gone to Amazon, for
example, and it has a little cookie set for
| | 03:04 | me there so it understands that I'm me,
it knows what my history is like, and
| | 03:09 | then it will present products to
me that it thinks I might like.
| | 03:12 | Other web cookies, however will be
little files about advertising, so it
| | 03:17 | indicates that I've been to site A, B,
and C and because I have been it's likely
| | 03:22 | that I will like advertising from
advertiser D. What it will do is it will push
| | 03:27 | a certain kind of advertising to me.
| | 03:29 | So if I remove those cookies, I
get rid of that targeted advertising.
| | 03:34 | It doesn't work in all
cases, but sometimes it does.
| | 03:36 | You have options for blocking cookies.
| | 03:38 | The default is From third
parties and advertisers.
| | 03:41 | I think this is a good compromise.
| | 03:44 | What this means is that I've gone to a
site, I don't want a third party pushing
| | 03:48 | advertising to me, simply because I've
visited a different site, this site sees
| | 03:52 | the cookie and then it's going
to try to push advertising to me.
| | 03:54 | I can block cookies all the time. If
you're very concerned about your privacy
| | 03:58 | you can turn this on, but honestly it
gets to be little inconvenient because
| | 04:02 | every time you visit a website then
it's like the first time you've been
| | 04:05 | there and sometimes you have to
re-enter data or let the website know who you
| | 04:09 | are and I'd rather just going to go through
the hassle of that. Or Never, which means hey,
| | 04:14 | bring on the cookies, all the time!
And I don't thing that's such a great idea
| | 04:18 | either, so leave the default.
| | 04:20 | And then you can also limit
website access to location services.
| | 04:23 | Some websites will either know where you
are based on what your IP address is or
| | 04:28 | you've told it where you are.
| | 04:29 | Safari can prompt you and say, this site
would like use your location, is that okay?
| | 04:34 | By default it's once each day.
| | 04:36 | If you don't worry about it quite so
much, you can choose Prompt for each
| | 04:39 | website one time only or you could just
absolutely deny it, so you cannot track
| | 04:44 | my location at all. Turn that option on
and a website will be unable to do that.
| | 04:50 | Now how vigilant you are about these
settings is up to you. I don't worry all
| | 04:54 | that much about privacy
except when it comes to my family.
| | 04:57 | But it's a personal decision. Now
that you know about these options,
| | 05:00 | you can make surfing with
Safari a more private experience.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. QuickTimePlaying media| 00:00 | Currently, there are three applications
bundled with Lion that can play media.
| | 00:04 | There is DVD Player which of course
plays DVDs, iTunes which can play both music
| | 00:09 | and movies, and QuickTime Player.
| | 00:11 | In this movie, we'll look at working
with media in QuickTime and now we need to
| | 00:16 | open some movie files.
| | 00:18 | Normally, when you're editing video you
want to create a project of some kind.
| | 00:21 | So I am going to take the assets,
meaning the media files I have, and put them
| | 00:24 | into a folder on the desktop.
| | 00:26 | So we will call this QuickTime Project.
| | 00:33 | I will go to my Documents folder, take
that audio file and movie file, and I will
| | 00:43 | grab one more movie file and I
want to put it there in my folder.
| | 00:51 | So let's open my Travel
Podcast movie in QuickTime.
| | 00:56 | I just have to double-click on it.
| | 00:57 | It's a .mov file, so it will
open by default into QuickTime.
| | 01:01 | Here's the Play button.
| | 01:02 | I hit Play, and sure
enough the movie starts playing.
| | 01:03 | (Music playing)
| | 01:08 | Now let's go back to the beginning.
| | 01:10 | You see we have some controls in this window.
| | 01:11 | One is the Volume Control, Rewind,
again Play or Pause, Fast Forward.
| | 01:21 | This is the Share menu. I am going to
show you that later, and we have the
| | 01:25 | Timeline and the playhead.
| | 01:27 | If we drag the playhead we
could scrub through the movie.
| | 01:30 | Then you see time indicators on either end.
| | 01:33 | I'll take that back to the beginning.
| | 01:37 | I can play full-screen video by
clicking on the Full Screen button, clicking Play.
| | 01:43 | (Music playing)
| | 01:44 | Go back to the regular size of
the window, and there we are!
| | 01:51 | Now that we have our movie, if we choose
to, we can export it or we can share it
| | 01:55 | and I will show you what
those commands look like.
| | 01:56 | We'll go to the File menu, choose Export,
and you see we have a few options from
| | 02:03 | the Format pop-up menu.
| | 02:04 | 480p, 720p, iPod touch & iPhone 3GS,
iPad, iPhone 4 & Apple TV, and Audio Only.
| | 02:14 | I am going to concentrate on the iPod touch
& iPhone 3GS option and the other iOS option.
| | 02:20 | The reason I am is because they
both provide a different resolution.
| | 02:24 | When you choose iPod touch & iPhone 3GS,
you'll see that it exports up to 480p.
| | 02:30 | So what's this 480p stuff?
| | 02:32 | That is standard definition video.
| | 02:35 | In the old television with an old CRT in it,
it has kind of a square picture. That's 480p.
| | 02:42 | It looks great on these older TVs.
| | 02:43 | It doesn't look great on HDTVs
because they like to be widescreen.
| | 02:48 | So they're not only lower resolution,
but they're also smaller files and they're
| | 02:52 | also compatible with these
devices that are listed here.
| | 02:54 | If you choose iPad, iPhone 4 & Apple TV,
this is a higher resolution video at 720p.
| | 03:00 | 720p is one of the HD standards.
| | 03:04 | So 720p will be played on an HDTV.
| | 03:07 | It can also be played on your
computer or these iOS devices that are listed
| | 03:11 | in this pop-up menu.
| | 03:13 | Again, the video looks great,
but it is a much larger file size.
| | 03:19 | You also have options to share your video.
| | 03:21 | So we go to the Share menu.
First option is iTunes.
| | 03:25 | Again, we have 420p here which is for
the iPod and iPhone or we have the 720p
| | 03:31 | option which is for the
iPad, iPhone 4 & Apple TV.
| | 03:34 | Now if we had a 1080p video which is a
higher resolution standard, we would also
| | 03:39 | have the option to export this for Mac and PC.
| | 03:43 | We don't have that option because
QuickTime doesn't do something called
| | 03:47 | upscaling, and that's taking a lower
resolution video and scaling it up to a
| | 03:52 | higher resolution video.
| | 03:54 | That kind of upscaling doesn't look very good,
so QuickTime doesn't do it. I'll click Cancel.
| | 04:00 | Also, in the Share menu you see
options for sharing to MobileMe Gallery,
| | 04:04 | YouTube, Vimeo, Flickr, and Facebook.
| | 04:08 | These are all Internet-based destinations.
| | 04:10 | Choose one of them. Let's
say YouTube for example.
| | 04:13 | A sheet comes down and you enter
your Username and your Password.
| | 04:17 | Once you do that, click Sign In and
then the video is uploaded to that service.
| | 04:22 | We also have the option to share the video
via Mail, and this is what it looks like.
| | 04:25 | So I click Mail.
| | 04:28 | I have two options. I can send it at
actual size or I can send it at 480p.
| | 04:33 | If I send it at actual size, that movie
file is going to be quite large and it
| | 04:38 | may not fit through an email gateway.
| | 04:41 | Certain ISPs will limit the amount of
data that can come through in a single
| | 04:45 | email message, say to 10 Megabytes for example.
| | 04:48 | I could certainly encode it at this
setting, but there's a possibility that it
| | 04:52 | won't be able to go through
to the intended recipient.
| | 04:55 | If I want to make a smaller
movie, instead I choose 480p.
| | 04:58 | This is more likely to get through that gateway.
| | 05:01 | Now I click on Share.
| | 05:06 | Once we hit Share,
QuickTime will export the movie.
| | 05:08 | When it finishes doing that it opens a
new email message with the movie embedded.
| | 05:13 | So you can see it's
embedded here, ready to send.
| | 05:18 | All I have to do at this point is
address it, fill in the subject heading, and
| | 05:23 | send the message out.
| | 05:25 | So I will close this window,
don't save, and I will quit Mail.
| | 05:31 | There a few other things that you can do with
your movie. For example, go to Edit and Trim.
| | 05:37 | When you do that, a trim bar appears.
| | 05:39 | So I can trim the beginning of
the movie as well as the end.
| | 05:44 | Now I am going to hit this Trim button
in a second, but watch what happens here
| | 05:49 | at the top of the window.
| | 05:51 | Currently, it reads Travel Podcast.mov.
| | 05:55 | I click Trim and it changes to Untitled
and it does, because it's just created a
| | 06:01 | new version of this movie.
| | 06:03 | The original movie file is still intact.
| | 06:05 | It hasn't been changed.
| | 06:06 | But what it's done is created a separate file.
| | 06:09 | So I haven't really lost any of my media.
| | 06:11 | I can always return to that original
file if I want my source material back.
| | 06:16 | Let's go to View > Show Clips.
| | 06:19 | We have a single clip here. I will click Done.
| | 06:23 | Now I will move the playhead to say this
point right here, this bunch of olives.
| | 06:30 | Now I'll go to Edit and choose Split Clip.
| | 06:35 | Now View > Show Clips and you
can see that I have now two clips.
| | 06:40 | here is the first one, here's the second.
| | 06:43 | I can continue splitting clips if I wanted to.
| | 06:45 | So I take the first clip, drag it
over, and put it after my first clip.
| | 06:51 | So now the end of the movie is at
the beginning, and the beginning of the
| | 06:53 | movie is at the end.
| | 06:55 | Now I can do a little light
editing by adding another clip.
| | 06:59 | So we'll go to the Project folder, I'll
grab the second movie, and I can drag it
| | 07:05 | into my QuickTime project here, and
now you see that I have another clip
| | 07:11 | inserted between the first and second clip.
| | 07:13 | So if I bring my playhead over to the
end of that first clip, click Play, now we
| | 07:24 | go to the other movie.
| | 07:27 | So this is the end of that one, click
Play, and now I've moved to the other clip.
| | 07:38 | So this is certainly not a
full scale movie editing program.
| | 07:42 | It's not even iMovie, but it is a way
to do some quick and dirty edits using
| | 07:46 | a free application.
| | 07:47 | One other thing I want to show you is that you
can drag audio clips and add them if you want.
| | 07:53 | Now quite honestly, this isn't all
that useful a feature, because you can't
| | 07:57 | alter the volume of the audio in
the audio track or in the video track.
| | 08:02 | So I can move my playhead
say to this point, click Play.
| | 08:08 | (Music playing)
| | 08:12 | So I can add a soundtrack, but I can't
knock down the volume so that I can hear
| | 08:17 | what's happening in the video.
| | 08:18 | Anyway, just something you might
want to know. You may find a use for it.
| | 08:22 | Again, I don't find it incredibly
helpful, but it is a feature that's built
| | 08:25 | into QuickTime Player.
| | 08:26 | With that we'll click done, we'll
close this window, we won't save.
| | 08:33 | I close my project file, and that's media
playback and light editing in QuickTime.
| | 08:41 | Now old time Mac users who miss some of
the more extensive editing features of
| | 08:45 | QuickTime Pro 7 should know that Apple
still sells this version of QuickTime on
| | 08:49 | its website for $29.
| | 08:51 | Also, if you have a version of
QuickTime Pro 7, it will still run under Lion.
| | 08:56 | If you want to learn more about
QuickTime Pro 7, take a look at my movie on that
| | 08:59 | very subject in Leopard Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording| 00:00 | QuickTime can not only play
media, but it can record it too.
| | 00:04 | Let's see how that works. Launch QuickTime.
| | 00:08 | I go to the File menu, and I choose New
Movie Recording, and here I am. Hello!
| | 00:14 | So I'll move the window over and you
can see me, because if you have an iSight
| | 00:19 | camera or another camera that's attached
to your Mac, you can record your video.
| | 00:24 | If you have some kind of audio input
device, a microphone for example, you can
| | 00:28 | also record your audio.
| | 00:30 | So let's take a look in the
window and see what's going on here.
| | 00:32 | You see the red record button, if you click
that, you record both your audio and your video.
| | 00:38 | And below that you see this meter
that's kind of doing this as I speak.
| | 00:41 | That's your audio level.
| | 00:43 | That indicates that not only is sound
going in, but you can see what the level is.
| | 00:47 | We'll look at the triangle menu here,
and that allows me to choose a different
| | 00:51 | microphone input if I want.
| | 00:53 | For example, I could use my
iSight built-in microphone.
| | 00:57 | Quality is not that great, so I'm
going to continue to use this microphone.
| | 01:00 | You can also choose the Quality, and
this is the video quality, of your movie, so
| | 01:04 | it can be Medium, High, or Maximum.
| | 01:08 | So let's record something. Hi!
| | 01:09 | This is Chris Breen.
| | 01:12 | Welcome to Mac OS X Lion Essential
Training. I'm so glad that you've joined me,
| | 01:17 | particularly to learn about QuickTime.
| | 01:21 | Then I click the Stop button.
| | 01:24 | And here's my movie, so I can play it.
| | 01:27 | Hi! This is Chris Breen.
| | 01:29 | Welcome to Mac OS X Lion Essential
Training. I'm so glad that you've joined me,
| | 01:34 | particularly to learn about QuickTime.
| | 01:37 | Then I click the Stop button.
And indeed I have stopped.
| | 01:42 | If I wanted to I again
could play this at full screen.
| | 01:44 | It's a little grainy, I'm not sure
why I'd want to that, but I could.
| | 01:48 | And just like with playing media files
and editing media files in QuickTime, you
| | 01:53 | can share just as you could otherwise.
| | 01:57 | The other ways you could do recordings.
| | 01:59 | I'm going to close this window.
You could also record audio.
| | 02:03 | File menu > New Audio
Recording, here's the window.
| | 02:07 | And again, you can see the meter,
so you can see that I'm talking.
| | 02:11 | If I want to record something, all I have to
do is click on the Record button. I speak here.
| | 02:16 | Notice that it's recording. Tum da dum, dum dum.
| | 02:22 | Yes, and then I click Stop, and if I really
wanted to listen to it, it sounds like this.
| | 02:27 | Record button. I speak here. Notice
that it's recording. Tum da dum, dum dum.
| | 02:34 | That's right, I'm a trained musician.
So we click the Close button and that's it.
| | 02:38 | Now, one other kind of recording
we can do is a screen recording.
| | 02:43 | So I choose New Screen Recording.
| | 02:45 | This allows me to capture
the action on my Mac's screen.
| | 02:49 | I will click on the Record button.
| | 02:53 | All I have to do now is click on
the Desktop, and I'm recording.
| | 02:56 | Open a few things, drag the window around,
close the window, and click Stop. Now I play it back.
| | 03:17 | Now, you'll notice in my recording that
when I was doing a screen recording, you
| | 03:23 | could see a little circle that
indicated where the mouse was.
| | 03:27 | The reason is because I'd switched on in
options, Show Mouse Clicks in Recording.
| | 03:32 | This is not on by default, but I think
it's very helpful if you're trying to
| | 03:35 | show people something
that's happening on your screen.
| | 03:38 | So if you're trying to train somebody to
do something, that's the way you do it.
| | 03:43 | There's one other option for a
screen recording. I click Record.
| | 03:47 | Now, I can record just a portion of the screen.
| | 03:49 | To do that I click and I can
drag to create a selection.
| | 03:54 | I let go. Click on Start Recording.
| | 03:57 | I can move things into this window.
| | 04:01 | Move them around, back up again, and
click Stop Screen Recording. It finishes.
| | 04:14 | Shows me the Preview window. Click to
Play, and there's my screen capture.
| | 04:32 | And that's pretty much it. You can
record video, audio, and screen capture
| | 04:37 | with QuickTime Player.
| | 04:39 | I think these are cool capabilities
and I think you're going to like them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Camera-Related AppsVideo chatting in FaceTime| 00:00 | You may not know it, but we are
living in the future. We are living in the
| | 00:03 | cartoon kind of future, where you can
make face-to-face video calls for free and
| | 00:09 | we do that using Lion's
FaceTime and this is how it works.
| | 00:12 | We will launch it from Spotlight.
| | 00:14 | That's enough, press Return and here we are.
| | 00:20 | Now when you launch it for the first
time, if you have an Apple ID set up on
| | 00:24 | your Mac, you will see that
Apple ID in FaceTime's window.
| | 00:28 | All you have to do at that point is
enter your password. I will enter mine.
| | 00:34 | And I then click Sign In.
| | 00:37 | If you don't have an Apple ID, you can
set one up just by clicking on Create New
| | 00:41 | Account and you'll be
walked through that process.
| | 00:43 | So I will sign in, I will
click Next, and I'm good to go.
| | 00:51 | Now if I wanted to add another
email address, I go under FaceTime into
| | 00:55 | Preferences, and at this point, I
can add another email address.
| | 01:00 | Once I do that a message will be sent
to Apple, Apple will send me an email
| | 01:04 | message with a verified link in it.
| | 01:06 | I click on that link and then that email
address is verified, but I'm good for now.
| | 01:11 | So I am going to click Done.
| | 01:14 | Now note that you're not going to
bugged for this information every time you
| | 01:17 | come in and I will show how that works.
| | 01:18 | I am going to quit out of
FaceTime now and I'm gone.
| | 01:22 | Now I will launch it again and you
will see that you're not prompted for your
| | 01:29 | Apple ID or password. You're just in.
| | 01:31 | So let's actually make a call
because that's what this is about.
| | 01:34 | So I am going to find my good friend, Nick. Oh!
| | 01:37 | There he is.
| | 01:38 | I will select his name and I click on
his FaceTime icon and we are going to make
| | 01:43 | a call to Nick and see if he
picks up. We are connected.
| | 01:51 | Great! There you are
| | 01:52 | Nick: Hey Chris!
| | 01:52 | Chris: Hey! It seems the only
time we ever talk is over FaceTime.
| | 01:56 | Nick: Yeah, I guess so.
| | 01:57 | Chris: I guess so. So this is Nick, Magic Nick
as he is known in the iPad course.
| | 02:02 | And as I hover my cursor over this
window, I can not only poke Nick in the nose
| | 02:07 | as I am doing here, but I
can also do a couple of things.
| | 02:10 | One thing I can do is move into full
screen by doing this. Now Nick is right in
| | 02:15 | the middle of the screen and
my picture is off to the side.
| | 02:18 | I can take it back to standard size screen.
| | 02:21 | If I wanted to I could end the call at
this point, but I don't want to do that.
| | 02:25 | What I really wanted to do is Nick, I
am sorry, but I am going to have to mute
| | 02:29 | just for a second and when I do that,
it means that you can't hear me.
| | 02:34 | Okay, now it's just us.
| | 02:36 | So let me say again as I did in the
iPad course is that Nick can still see me.
| | 02:41 | So he can see exactly what I'm doing.
And so if you're going to mute somebody,
| | 02:46 | you don't want to do something like
"I can't stand talking to this guy
| | 02:50 | because I just hate him,"
because that doesn't look good.
| | 02:53 | Instead you want to look very
pleasant and then you can say, "I can't stand
| | 02:56 | talking to this guy," but
actually Nick is a very nice guy.
| | 02:58 | So it's not the case here.
| | 03:00 | Anyway, I am going to unmute.
| | 03:02 | Okay I was just showing
off them the mute feature.
| | 03:05 | There's absolutely nothing to worry about
and please don't bother reviewing.
| | 03:09 | Nick: Okay, Chris.
| | 03:10 | Chris: Would you mind turning your iPad to the side
so I can see what that looks like? Okay, great!
| | 03:17 | So when he rotates we moved into Landscape.
| | 03:20 | Now can when take it back
into Portrait mode? Good!
| | 03:23 | I can also rotate here.
| | 03:24 | I have a little arrow here.
| | 03:25 | So now to Nick I appear in landscape
and now I'm going to appear in Portrait.
| | 03:32 | One of things I can do is move this
little window around. You may want to do
| | 03:36 | that if you want to be able to
better see what you're doing when you're
| | 03:39 | looking into the camera.
| | 03:41 | So I am moving this back
down into the regular position.
| | 03:44 | Nick, I am going to hang-up on you,
but I would like you to call me so people
| | 03:48 | could see what it looks like
when I am receiving a call.
| | 03:50 | I cut him off. Terribly sorry, Nick. Okay.
| | 03:53 | Oh look! There he is.
| | 03:56 | Okay, so I can decline or I can
accept and I'm going to accept.
| | 04:00 | We are connecting with Nick as you can see.
| | 04:02 | Hey, you are back again.
| | 04:05 | I'm so glad that that worked.
| | 04:07 | So people can see what it looks like
when I'm receiving a call, they've seen
| | 04:11 | what it looks like when I'm making a
call, and I need to show them a couple of
| | 04:15 | other features, if you don't mind.
| | 04:17 | Okay so I have to hang-up.
| | 04:18 | So I will talk you later.
| | 04:19 | Nick: All right, I will see you later, Chris.
| | 04:21 | Chris: So I have ended my call.
| | 04:24 | All right, let's look at
just a couple of other things.
| | 04:26 | You notice the bottom, there's a
Favorites entry and there's a Recents entry.
| | 04:30 | Here Recents. That shows that we've
talked to Nick recently and we have his
| | 04:36 | conversations here in our Recents list.
| | 04:38 | Now let's go to Favorites, I've added some
Favorites. I can add others if I want to.
| | 04:46 | I can also remove Favorites.
| | 04:47 | So let's get rid of this Cunningham.
| | 04:49 | I am not sure whether Ritchie
is his brother or something.
| | 04:51 | Anyway, go back into Contacts and if I wanted
to add this Cunningham guy again, I could.
| | 04:59 | So I just enter, there he is.
| | 05:03 | So I select his contact and then I click on
Add to Favorites and now he is in my Favorites.
| | 05:09 | So all I have to do to call him is click
on his name, click on his FaceTime icon,
| | 05:13 | and I've made the call.
| | 05:15 | And there you have it. This
is the basics of FaceTime.
| | 05:18 | It's a great way to communicate with
people and I think you will like it.
| | 05:22 | Quit, and done.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Text and video messaging in iChat| 00:01 | OS X Lion provides you plenty of ways
to communicate with people and some in
| | 00:05 | real-time such as FaceTime.
| | 00:06 | Another way is iChat and this is the
traditional IM client that's come with the
| | 00:11 | Mac for quite some time.
| | 00:13 | So we will launch it via
Spotlight, and here we are.
| | 00:23 | Now I have set up an
iChat account and you can too.
| | 00:27 | In order to do that go to iChat's
Preference, go to Accounts, and then when
| | 00:33 | you're ready to set up an account, you
click on the plus button and then you
| | 00:37 | choose the Account Type that you want to use.
| | 00:40 | So that can be an AIM account, which
is through AOL, a me, Mac, Jabber,
| | 00:45 | Google Talk, or Yahoo! account.
| | 00:47 | I have already set one up.
I am using an AIM account.
| | 00:50 | We'll close that out, and I
see I have the buddy here.
| | 00:53 | Now I can communicate in a
number of different ways.
| | 00:56 | The traditional way to do that is double-
click and then just start texting somebody.
| | 01:06 | Press Return.
| | 01:07 | I can also send Nick a little smiley.
| | 01:18 | So just click over here where the
smileys are, press Return, and he sees
| | 01:24 | my little emoticon.
| | 01:26 | Now in this view I can also
send him a file if I want to.
| | 01:31 | So I will go and I will grab file in
my Documents folder, move this over.
| | 01:48 | And here's the file, drag it
over, and I have done that.
| | 01:52 | If I want to see where that file is I
just click on the magnifying glass icon
| | 01:56 | and it shows me where the file is.
| | 01:59 | Now that's one way to
communicate. Let's find another.
| | 02:04 | I can invite him to an
audio chat. He has to accept.
| | 02:09 | Nick Brazzi: Hello!
Chris: Hey Nick! I can hear you. Can you hear me?
| | 02:17 | Nick Brazzi: How are you doing?
| | 02:19 | Chris: I am doing just great.
| | 02:20 | So it was great texting you, but
you know, I want to see your face.
| | 02:23 | Chris: So I am going to get out of this audio chat.
Nick: Okay.
| | 02:25 | I click Close.
| | 02:29 | Buddies. Now I am going to
invite him to a video chat.
| | 02:33 | So he has to accept my invitation and
here's my preview and he is going to
| | 02:37 | respond in just a second.
| | 02:38 | Let me move my window open. There he is!
| | 02:46 | Nice to see you again.
| | 02:47 | I will just talk with you all day today.
| | 02:50 | So if you've looked at our FaceTime
movie, you will notice that the quality of
| | 02:54 | the video here is actually
better than the FaceTime video.
| | 02:57 | So if you happen to be on a
chat client, give this a try.
| | 03:02 | This setup is very similar.
| | 03:03 | So I can move my Preview window around
if I want, I can go to full screen, here
| | 03:09 | we are, I can collapse back. I
can mute if I like, just hit that.
| | 03:15 | And again it shows that I am muted.
| | 03:17 | He can't hear anything I am saying,
but again keep that smile on your face.
| | 03:21 | We will unmute and I am going to go
back to full screen to show you something.
| | 03:26 | You can add effects to how you look
to the person you're speaking with.
| | 03:31 | So let's say I will choose Comic Book.
| | 03:34 | Now when Nick sees me, he
sees me as this Comic Book look.
| | 03:39 | I can also go for kind of a
Rock Hudson, Doris Day 1950s look.
| | 03:45 | Then there are other
options as well. Thermal Camera.
| | 03:50 | I can do Mirror which is a little
creepy because I can make my head
| | 03:53 | disappear like that.
| | 03:55 | That's kind of cool.
My daughter loves this thing.
| | 03:57 | Fish Eye if you want to just look really big.
| | 03:59 | Anyway, lots of fun effects that you
can play with and much as you can do with
| | 04:06 | Photo Booth, you can add
motion effects in the background.
| | 04:08 | I am not going to do that here, because
it's cool in Photo Booth, but you don't
| | 04:13 | need to see this more than once.
| | 04:15 | Anyway, so that's the idea.
| | 04:16 | I am going to go back to Original and
that's the idea of effects and now we'll
| | 04:20 | just shrink back the window.
| | 04:23 | Nick, I want to show you something else.
| | 04:25 | So I am going to ask if I can share your
screen, if you don't mind.
| | 04:31 | Nick: Sure! Okay.
| | 04:32 | Chris: So again I am sending this request to Nick.
| | 04:35 | He will respond that it's okay for me to
look at his screen and this is Nick's screen.
| | 04:40 | Now if you looked through parts of the
other course, you'll see there's an area
| | 04:44 | about screen sharing.
| | 04:45 | You can also do this over iChat and a
big advantage here is that when you use
| | 04:51 | Lion's screen sharing,
it's for your local network.
| | 04:55 | However, if you set up an iChat
account with somebody else, you can use this
| | 05:00 | screen sharing to see their computer.
| | 05:02 | Here's where that
advantage lies and that's this.
| | 05:04 | I have people in my family who
are not terribly computer literate.
| | 05:08 | They're wonderful people, but they
often call me and say "Chris, I am having a
| | 05:12 | problem with my computer,
can you tell me what to do?"
| | 05:14 | Now in the old days I'd have to walk
through with them on the phone how to do
| | 05:18 | this and I'd say, "Well, could you
click on this command," and they go, "What
| | 05:21 | are you talking about?"
| | 05:22 | Now what I do is we both get onto iChat,
we share screens, and I say step away
| | 05:28 | from the computer and then I can
control their computer from my computer, move
| | 05:33 | things around, do what I need to do,
and get off of iChat and we're done.
| | 05:38 | So as a troubleshooting
technique, this is terrific.
| | 05:41 | All right, I am going to get out of
here by clicking on the Close box and now I
| | 05:45 | am no longer sharing his screen.
| | 05:47 | I want to show you one more
feature that you can use when you're
| | 05:52 | video-chatting with somebody.
| | 05:53 | So I go to Buddies. I am going to
invite Nick to video chat one more time.
| | 05:59 | Here I am in my Preview.
| | 06:01 | Nick is going to show up any second. Oh!
| | 06:02 | There he is. Great!
| | 06:04 | Nick, I want to show you this
presentation that I've done.
| | 06:06 | So what I will do is share
a file with iChat Theater.
| | 06:11 | I go to my Documents folder, I am going
to select a Keynote presentation, and I
| | 06:15 | will click on Share.
| | 06:18 | Now what this will do is Keynote is
going to launch and it will launch this
| | 06:23 | presentation which I will then
be able to show Nick remotely.
| | 06:27 | So it takes a little while for this
to start and here is the iChat window.
| | 06:35 | It's a little fuzzy right now,
but wait till I get this going.
| | 06:41 | So when I resize the window,
we got the proper look here.
| | 06:43 | So now I can page through my Keynote
presentation. Go from slide to slide.
| | 06:53 | So Keynote is running on my
computer, but he is seeing my Keynote
| | 06:57 | presentation remotely.
| | 06:59 | This is a really good way to conduct business meetings.
| | 07:02 | So if you can't fly across the
country to sit down and show somebody a
| | 07:05 | presentation, you can do it this way
and show them a Keynote presentation.
| | 07:09 | You can also do iPhoto slideshows
this way and show other files as well.
| | 07:15 | So I will quit out of this in Keynote.
| | 07:17 | We'll go back and you see that
we're back to a standard video chat.
| | 07:23 | Nick, I am going to say goodbye again.
| | 07:25 | Nick: All right! Talk to you later.
| | 07:27 | Chris: Okay.
| | 07:29 | So a few other things.
| | 07:30 | If you want to check your look, you can
check Video Preview and see how you look.
| | 07:35 | It isn't just to see how is my hair
and am I wearing the right shirt or
| | 07:39 | something, but you also want to
make sure that you're in frame.
| | 07:42 | Sometimes people don't pay attention to
where the camera is and you start your
| | 07:45 | conversation and you're over here or you're
over here or your head is way out of frame.
| | 07:51 | This is a way to focus and
see how you look on camera.
| | 07:56 | Now Nick isn't my only friend.
| | 07:58 | So I can add buddies if I want to.
| | 08:01 | To do that, I go to the Buddies menu,
Add Buddy and then again I can pull people
| | 08:07 | from my Address Book or I can add them here.
| | 08:12 | Also, if I suddenly decide Nick is no
longer my buddy, I can remove him and he is out.
| | 08:18 | Also, you can block people if you want to.
| | 08:21 | Sometimes, people will get a hold of your
iChat handle, they'll jump in and say, hey, how are you doing?
| | 08:26 | And you have no idea who these
people are, but they have your handle so
| | 08:29 | they know how to get in.
| | 08:31 | You can block them, if you want.
| | 08:33 | You can also set up white lists and
black lists, meaning these are the people
| | 08:37 | that are allowed in and these are
the people who are not allowed in.
| | 08:44 | So go into the Security tab of the
Accounts Preference and then you can
| | 08:48 | choose what you want.
| | 08:49 | You can allow anyone in, Allow people
in my Buddy List, Allow specific people.
| | 08:53 | So this is how to create a white list.
| | 08:55 | You can block everyone or you can block
specific people, if they're bugging you.
| | 08:59 | There's a lot happening in iChat, but
this should give you a good start on
| | 09:03 | messaging with your friends.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Shooting videos and pictures in Photo Booth| 00:00 | Do you have a child?
| | 00:02 | Better yet, do you have a squirmy child?
| | 00:04 | Perfect, then Photo Booth is for you.
| | 00:08 | Show it to any kid or anyone who is a kid
at heart, and they'll be sold on the Mac.
| | 00:13 | It works like this.
| | 00:13 | Go down to the dock, choose Photo Booth,
and here I am. Nice to see you again.
| | 00:20 | Just so you know you can't use Photo Booth
unless you have a camera attached to your Mac.
| | 00:24 | That can be a USB or FireWire camera,
or it can be the iSight that's built
| | 00:29 | into your iMac or your laptop for example.
| | 00:31 | So let's take a look at how this works.
| | 00:33 | You have three settings at the bottom.
You have the traditional Photo Booth
| | 00:38 | settings, so I can take four shots in
a row, and of course, when you do this,
| | 00:42 | you have to mug horribly at the camera.
| | 00:43 | So click the camera button, countdown,
and there I am in all my muggy goodness.
| | 00:57 | So if you want to look at your picture,
simply select it and there is your picture.
| | 01:02 | If I wanted to, I suppose I could
click the Share button and I could e-mail
| | 01:07 | this, I could add it to iPhoto, I could
set it as an account picture or I could
| | 01:11 | set it as my buddy picture in iChat.
| | 01:14 | I am not sure if that's a good idea.
| | 01:15 | So for now, I'm going to actually
delete this one. So you do that by clicking
| | 01:19 | on the little x there.
| | 01:21 | You also can take a single shot.
| | 01:23 | you've seen how to take your
traditional shot, so let's look at the effects.
| | 01:28 | And here is the normal effect that's me in
the middle, but I can add a different effect.
| | 01:32 | So this is a new one in Lion.
This is the Love Struck.
| | 01:34 | Gosh, I love lynda.com. And
there I am. Oh, that's good.
| | 01:42 | I'm going to send that one to lynda.
| | 01:45 | Okay, so that's that. Iow, let's
take a look at the movie feature.
| | 01:50 | So I click on movie, I click the
camera button, and I'm back live again.
| | 01:56 | Now you can shoot movies with this as well.
| | 01:58 | Let's click on Effects. If I want to
shoot a normal movie, I would just choose
| | 02:03 | Normal, but there are
other effects built-in as well.
| | 02:06 | Let's try Frog, and I'll
click Record. Ribbit, ribbit, ribbit. Very nice.
| | 02:21 | That's one I'm not going to be sending
to my family anytime soon, but I want to
| | 02:25 | see that --ribbit, ribbit, ribiit. You could see
I might want to trim the end of that one, so I will
| | 02:35 | click on Trim, move the yellow bar over
a little bit, so that I don't have me
| | 02:41 | looking down at the camera, maybe trim
that a bit as well, and then click on the
| | 02:46 | checkmark and then my movie is trimmed,
and again, I can share this out if I had
| | 02:52 | any reason to do so. So I could email
or add to iPhoto, and so on and so forth.
| | 02:57 | Let's bring me back live.
| | 03:01 | One other thing we can do is
you can have a motion effect.
| | 03:05 | So I click on Effects, I go a few more
pages, and here is a motion effect that
| | 03:11 | does a green screen like effect.
| | 03:13 | So I choose something like fish, I get
out of the frame and now I come back into
| | 03:21 | the frame when it tells me it's okay,
and now you can see that I have this nice
| | 03:25 | background behind me that is
totally real. I can swim here.
| | 03:28 | Once it's captured that, I can go
into Effects, and I can choose a
| | 03:32 | different motion background.
| | 03:34 | So here I'm in France. It is very
nice in France. They have very good bread
| | 03:38 | and wonderful cheese and
great wine, and very nice people.
| | 03:42 | Back to Effects, and before you leave,
I'm going you to take a trip to the moon.
| | 03:47 | So thanks very much for checking out
Photo Booth, and I'll see you later!
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. AutomatorAutomating complex tasks| 00:00 | Apple includes a tool with Lion called
Automator and as its name suggests it's a
| | 00:05 | toolkit for automating tasks on your Mac.
| | 00:07 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:12 | When you first launch Automator you
will be offered the opportunity to create
| | 00:16 | one of a variety of workflows.
| | 00:18 | For our purposes we're going to start
by choosing Workflow and click on Choose.
| | 00:25 | Workflow is simply a series of
actions that can be run within Automator.
| | 00:29 | The interface, you see first of all
under Library categories of actions.
| | 00:36 | So for example here are the actions
that you can undertake with Calendar.
| | 00:40 | Contacts, Documents, Files &
Folders, Fonts, so on and so forth.
| | 00:45 | The main part of the window is for
assembling your workflow and to do that all
| | 00:49 | you have to do is grab an action and
you drag it into the workflow and it will
| | 00:53 | add that action to your workflow.
| | 00:55 | So let's create a few workflows.
| | 00:57 | I am going to move the Automator window.
| | 00:59 | First thing I am going to do is
create a couple of folders on the desktop.
| | 01:02 | I am going to call this one Original and
the second one is going to be called Copy.
| | 01:08 | Now this is what I am going to do.
| | 01:10 | I am going to create a workflow that
will take any items within this original
| | 01:15 | folder and it will copy them to the copy folder.
| | 01:20 | First thing I will do is go to Files & Folders.
| | 01:22 | This is the category.
| | 01:24 | I will Get Specified Finder Items, I
will then Get Folder Contents, and then I
| | 01:32 | will choose Copy Finder Items.
| | 01:38 | So in the first action I will take my
Original folder and drag it in to add it.
| | 01:43 | Then I take my Copy folder and I move
that to the pop-up menu as the destination.
| | 01:49 | Now I go to my Documents folder.
I will take this About Stacks item.
| | 01:55 | I will Option+Drag it to the Original folder.
| | 01:59 | I open that folder and we
see here's About Stacks.
| | 02:09 | I open the Copy folder and
there's nothing in it yet.
| | 02:14 | Let's fire off this workflow.
| | 02:18 | Resize it so you can see what's happening.
| | 02:23 | So Original, Copy, Workflow, Run.
| | 02:29 | So what's happened?
| | 02:31 | The file that was in the Original folder
has now been copied to the Copy folder.
| | 02:36 | Now let's run through the
Workflow to see why that happened.
| | 02:43 | The first action says,
Get Specified Finder Items.
| | 02:46 | So I am defining that the original file is
the source for this workflow to take place.
| | 02:52 | It's then getting anything that's
inside this folder and it is copying those
| | 02:57 | items to my Copy folder. Pretty simple!
| | 03:02 | Now let's create a folder action.
| | 03:04 | The reason we want to do this is
because this workflow as it stands isn't
| | 03:08 | terribly helpful, because you have to
have Automator opened, you have to run it,
| | 03:11 | and then you accomplish your workflow.
| | 03:13 | However, how cool would this be if
instead of having to run it through Automator
| | 03:18 | I could simply take a file, drop it
on the Original folder, and then it's
| | 03:22 | automatically copied to the Copy folder?
| | 03:25 | And that's what we're going to do now.
| | 03:26 | First thing we'll do is we're going to
remove the first action and now I will go
| | 03:33 | to the File menu, choose Duplicate To,
and here we see the Workflow sheet again.
| | 03:41 | Now this time, I am going to choose Folder
Action rather than Workflow and click on Choose.
| | 03:47 | I need a Source folder for my action.
| | 03:50 | So I choose Original and drag it up to
the top of the window. Now I can save.
| | 03:56 | I will call it Copy items and click Save.
| | 04:04 | Now I right-click or Control+Click
on the Original folder and choose
| | 04:09 | Folder Actions Setup.
| | 04:10 | Here's my Copy items workflow.
| | 04:14 | I click Attach and I close the window.
| | 04:18 | Now let's take a look.
| | 04:25 | Here's Copy. Documents.
| | 04:29 | Let's take this PDF file here
and drag it to the Original folder.
| | 04:35 | When I do that, because of the folder
action, anything I have dragged to the
| | 04:39 | Original folder is now
automatically copied to the Copy folder.
| | 04:43 | Now, of course, this isn't doing me a
whole lot of good in that it's on the
| | 04:46 | desktop and I don't really need to
copy one file from one folder to another
| | 04:51 | folder that's on the same desktop, but
suppose that you have two drives.
| | 04:56 | You could have the original folder on
your startup drive and you could have the
| | 05:01 | other folder on your secondary drive.
| | 05:03 | So this is one way to easily make a
backup copy of any file that you drag into
| | 05:09 | the Original folder.
| | 05:12 | Now let's go back to Automator and now
let's create a new workflow and this will
| | 05:17 | be an application that you could drag files to.
| | 05:20 | So, New, this time I choose
Application and click on Choose.
| | 05:27 | We'll move to the Photos entry and we
select Change Type of Images and drag it
| | 05:34 | to the Workflow area.
| | 05:35 | Because this is going to change the
file type, Automator jumps in and says, "You
| | 05:39 | know, this is going to change the file.
| | 05:41 | Do you want to create a copy so that you
will have the original as well as this copy?"
| | 05:46 | We'll go ahead and choose Add so that we
do have that copy in place, if we needed.
| | 05:50 | We're going to choose Mail, scoot down,
and New Mail Message, and finally also
| | 05:58 | within Mail, Add Attachment to Front Message.
| | 06:06 | In the subject line of the mail message we
will say something like "Look at this picture."
| | 06:11 | We will have it sent from the default
account and we won't address it at this point.
| | 06:16 | We can put in the message body.
| | 06:18 | Let's explain what's going on.
| | 06:21 | When I drag in the image on top of this
application, it's going to covert that
| | 06:26 | image to a TIFF file.
| | 06:27 | It will then take that TIFF file, it
will open Mail, and it will add that TIFF
| | 06:32 | file to my mail message as an attachment.
| | 06:35 | The subject heading will automatically
be "Look at this picture" and the message
| | 06:39 | body will read, "Isn't this a
great picture! Love, Chris."
| | 06:44 | And here's the part about adding
the attachment to the front message.
| | 06:48 | So now we'll save this.
| | 06:49 | Let's put it on the desktop and we'll save it.
| | 06:57 | Go to the desktop and here is our application.
| | 07:01 | Let me open my Documents folder.
| | 07:04 | Let's find a JPEG image, make a
copy, and put it here on the desktop.
| | 07:11 | I take my image and I drag it on top of
the Automator application I created and
| | 07:18 | here it is. And it happened that fast.
| | 07:21 | So what's happened on the desktop?
| | 07:22 | Let's take another look.
| | 07:23 | Notice on the desktop is my original image.
| | 07:25 | It's there because that Copy action made
a copy and then converted the original.
| | 07:31 | The original has been
converted to this TIFF file.
| | 07:34 | It then took that TIFF file, it
opened a new mail message, attached that
| | 07:38 | TIFF file, and now here is my subject
heading and here is the message body that I added.
| | 07:44 | All I have to do at this point to mail
it is to type in the recipient and send
| | 07:48 | it and I am good to go.
| | 07:49 | I won't save that and we will quit.
| | 07:55 | Workflows, folder actions, and apps
are a great way to use on Automator.
| | 07:59 | Here's another and that's called Services.
| | 08:01 | You can create a workflow that you can
place in the Services menu and better
| | 08:05 | yet, you can trigger it
with a keyboard shortcut.
| | 08:09 | So we are back to Automator.
| | 08:10 | Let's close some of these windows and
I will create a new Automator action.
| | 08:16 | This time I am going to
choose Service and click on Choose.
| | 08:20 | This time I am going to go to
Calendar and choose New To Do Item.
| | 08:27 | From the first pop-up menu I am going
to select no input in any application.
| | 08:34 | From Options I will select Show this
action when the workflow runs and you'll
| | 08:39 | see why I am doing this in a second.
| | 08:41 | Now I will save this and we will
call it Make To Do and click Save.
| | 08:49 | Go back to the Finder.
| | 08:51 | Now in the Services menu we see
a new service called Make To Do.
| | 08:55 | I select it and here's my new to do item.
| | 09:00 | I am going to add that to my existing calendar.
Priority, well, the trash can is pretty stinky.
| | 09:05 | So we will do that.
| | 09:07 | And let's make that Due today.
| | 09:09 | I don't need to set an alarm for it.
| | 09:10 | And I click on Continue.
| | 09:12 | So did I really do that?
| | 09:13 | Well, let's find out.
| | 09:15 | Here's iCal and here is my To Do right
here, Take out the trash. So this is cool.
| | 09:23 | Whenever I am in any application, I can
now choose Services, and make a to do.
| | 09:29 | We can make it even cooler.
| | 09:31 | System Preferences > Keyboard >
Keyboard Shortcut > Services, go down to the
| | 09:41 | bottom and here is our Make To Do.
Click to the right and I am going to add
| | 09:46 | a keyboard command.
| | 09:47 | Let's make that Command+6.
| | 09:49 | Now when I do that, I have to make
sure that I reenable that service.
| | 09:53 | I have done that and I will close the window.
| | 09:55 | I go back to the Finder and I press
Command+6 and there's my new To Do.
| | 10:02 | I initiated that just by Command+6.
| | 10:05 | Again, I can enter a Title, Calendar I want
to add it to, Priority, so on and so forth.
| | 10:10 | So just using Automator now I have a
system-wide method for creating a new to do.
| | 10:16 | One last kind of workflow and
this is an iCal alarm workflow.
| | 10:23 | Back to Automator, New, iCal Alarm, Choose.
| | 10:33 | I am going to recreate that
Copy workflow that I had before.
| | 10:36 | So again I go to Files & Folders,
Get Specified Finder Items, Get Folder
| | 10:42 | Contents, and Copy Finder Items. Go to the top.
| | 10:49 | This is my source file.
| | 10:54 | My copy file will go to
the Copy Finder Items action.
| | 10:58 | Now I click Save and I add the
Copy folder to Copy Finder Items.
| | 11:04 | Now I Command+S to save.
| | 11:06 | I will call this Backup and click Save.
| | 11:13 | When I do this, iCal opens and today,
here is the Automator action I just created.
| | 11:21 | So at 4:55 the contents of the Original
folder will be copied to the Copy folder.
| | 11:27 | Let's change the time.
| | 11:28 | So let's make that 9 p.m.
| | 11:36 | So today at 9 p.m. anything that's
in the Original folder is going to be
| | 11:39 | copied to the Copy folder.
| | 11:41 | Now let's have it repeat.
| | 11:42 | I want to have this happen every single day.
| | 11:46 | When I do that, you notice that the
Backup item appears on every single day.
| | 11:50 | Now imagine the power of this.
| | 11:53 | At the end of the day, I've taken all my
work and I throw it into the Original folder.
| | 11:58 | At 9 o'clock, automatically, anything
that's in that folder is then copied
| | 12:04 | to the Copy folder.
| | 12:05 | Again, if that Copy folder is on
another drive, I have an automatic backup that
| | 12:10 | I've just created with Automator.
| | 12:12 | I think that is really cool and it's
not hard to do. And we'll quit Automator.
| | 12:20 | This is another one of those times when
I have to say, "and it does so much more."
| | 12:24 | You've got the idea of how to create
an Automator workflow and save it in
| | 12:28 | several varieties of helpful ways.
| | 12:31 | If this interests you, I urge you to spend
more time exploring Automator on your own.
| | 12:36 | To learn more, check out
www.macosxautomation.com, which is the best site on the
| | 12:43 | web for Automator information.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. Key UtilitiesMonitoring system performance| 00:00 | Now let me take you on a short tour of
the important elements of Activity Monitor.
| | 00:05 | Activity Monitor as its name implies is
a utility that allows you to peek into
| | 00:11 | what your Mac is doing in the background.
| | 00:13 | Let's see how that works.
| | 00:14 | So we'll go to Spotlight > Activity and
here it is, the Activity Monitor window.
| | 00:21 | Here you can see a series of things
called processes. These are things that
| | 00:26 | your computer is doing.
| | 00:28 | Some of these you're going to recognize.
For example Finder, you know what that is,
| | 00:32 | Dock, you know what that is, but
there's a lot of other stuff that's going on
| | 00:35 | the background that you have
no idea what its purpose is.
| | 00:39 | Now this is great for looking at
minutia but what you really want to do is find
| | 00:43 | out what's taking up your processor's
time. That's why we're in Activity Monitor.
| | 00:49 | If there's an application that's
eating up your processor that could cause
| | 00:52 | your Mac to slow down, so we want to
check in Activity Monitor and if there's
| | 00:57 | a problem we can quit the problem
application and then put your Mac back in
| | 01:01 | good working order.
| | 01:02 | So how do you tell us
something's eating up your processor?
| | 01:05 | Well, one way to that is to go the
%CPU column, click so that the most active
| | 01:10 | processes are at the top of the list.
| | 01:13 | Right now there's nothing much
going on that's a problem for Mac.
| | 01:16 | However, let's give this a shot.
| | 01:18 | I'll choose process name, I'll
organize alphabetically, and now I'm going to
| | 01:22 | plug my digital camera into my Mac.
| | 01:26 | When I do that iPhoto
launches and it finds my camera.
| | 01:30 | Now let's find iPhoto in Activity Monitor and
let's see what it does with the %CPU column.
| | 01:36 | Now check this out.
| | 01:38 | It's using 85% of the processes currently.
| | 01:40 | It's also using 15 threads, which you
don't need to be too concerned about. Also
| | 01:45 | the amount of RAM that it's using.
| | 01:47 | These all indicate that iPhoto is
taking up a lot of my Mac's attention.
| | 01:52 | Now that's not a big problem because we
know that iPhoto is going to finish the
| | 01:56 | job pretty soon and once it does then
the CPU is going to calm down again and
| | 02:02 | operate at a normal level for iPhoto.
| | 02:05 | But suppose you have an application
that keeps hitting the processor and won't
| | 02:09 | let go? Then you seem to have a problem.
| | 02:12 | Let's see how you deal with that.
| | 02:13 | So I'm going to launch Safari, which I'm
not saying is a problem application but
| | 02:16 | I just want to show you how to
quit a process that may be a problem.
| | 02:20 | So go to Safari, make this window
smaller, so we can see Activity Monitor and
| | 02:26 | we'll find Safari in
Activity Monitor, here it is.
| | 02:29 | See it's not doing very much, but if I
wanted to quit Safari all I have to do is
| | 02:34 | go to Quit Process and click on it.
| | 02:37 | The option you should choose is Quit.
However if you do that and you notice that
| | 02:43 | the item turns red it means
it's stuck, it can't quit.
| | 02:47 | In that case you choose Force Quit.
| | 02:50 | That will force it to quit and then
the process will disappear and hopefully
| | 02:55 | your problems clear up.
| | 02:56 | So now we'll just quit Safari by
clicking on Quit. Indeed it's gone.
| | 03:01 | It disappears from
Activity Monitor and we're set.
| | 03:04 | You can do lots of other stuff with
Activity Monitor. You can check out
| | 03:07 | your memory, and your disk activity, your
disk usage and also your network throughput.
| | 03:11 | But for our purposes we're really
here to look to see what you can do with
| | 03:15 | Activity Monitor to help your Mac run
better, and that's Activity Monitor.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up a Windows installation in Boot Camp| 00:00 | By now you're surely aware that
your Macintosh runs Mac OS X, which is
| | 00:05 | its operating system.
| | 00:07 | However you can also run Windows on
your Mac if you care to and you can run it
| | 00:12 | natively in its own partition.
| | 00:14 | I am going to show you how to do that now.
| | 00:15 | So we'll go to the Go menu and I
will select Utilities and I will launch
| | 00:20 | Boot Camp Assistant.
| | 00:22 | Now Boot Camp Assistant will create a
separate partition for Windows and then it
| | 00:28 | will walk through the
installation process on Windows.
| | 00:32 | Now if you've ever set up a PC before
and installed Windows on it, you are
| | 00:35 | actually going to find this easier
to do than it is on a Windows machine,
| | 00:39 | because Boot Camp takes care of answer all
the questions that Windows prompts you with.
| | 00:44 | In this case, all we have
to do is click on Continue.
| | 00:48 | Now we have two options here.
| | 00:50 | Either we can download the Windows
support software for this Mac or if you've
| | 00:54 | already downloaded those files, you
just have to click that option and proceed.
| | 00:59 | We need to download the Windows
support files, so we will click Continue and
| | 01:04 | the Mac goes off to the Internet, looking for
those files, and then it will download them.
| | 01:09 | So you may be wondering exactly
what this Windows support software is.
| | 01:13 | It's the stuff that allows your Apple
hardware to work with Windows, so for
| | 01:16 | example, support for your mouse
and your keyboard and your trackpad.
| | 01:21 | So at this point, you
would see a couple of options.
| | 01:23 | One is to burn a copy to a CD or a DVD
or you can save a copy of this Windows
| | 01:28 | support software to an external drive.
| | 01:31 | Now if your Mac doesn't have a CD burner,
you can just choose that second option.
| | 01:36 | Either way you decide to go, make sure that
you keep a copy of the software because
| | 01:39 | you're going to need it
after you install Windows.
| | 01:42 | Now we are going to go back, so you
can see what happens in this process.
| | 01:45 | Well say we've already downloaded the
Windows support software because indeed
| | 01:49 | we have and I will click Continue.
| | 01:53 | Now as I said, Windows needs its own
partition and this is where you tell the Mac
| | 01:58 | how much space to give Windows.
| | 02:01 | If you choose Divide Equally, I think
that's a little generous. You can take
| | 02:05 | this dot here and drag it to determine
the size of the partition. In our case, I
| | 02:10 | am going to give it 30 GB and then
all I have to do is click Partition.
| | 02:17 | This will create a separate volume for Windows.
| | 02:20 | Now don't worry that you are going to
be deleting anything. What's actually
| | 02:22 | happening here is OS X is
actually doing a little housekeeping.
| | 02:26 | So what it's doing is it's taking the
files that are on the part of a hard drive
| | 02:29 | that will become the Windows partition
and it's moving them to the part of a
| | 02:33 | hard drive that will be the Mac OS X partition.
| | 02:37 | And once it completes the partition,
you'll see that you now have a Boot Camp
| | 02:41 | volume as well as your Mac volume.
| | 02:45 | Now it will prompt you to do the
installation. As the Windows suggest, insert
| | 02:48 | your Windows disk and once you've done
that then you click Start Installation.
| | 02:54 | When you start the installation, it
will restart your computer and then it will
| | 02:57 | install Windows from that Windows disc.
| | 03:00 | And once your computer restarts, you
will see a window showing that Windows is
| | 03:04 | installing software.
| | 03:06 | And at this point, you're simply
going through a Windows installation.
| | 03:10 | So enter information as requested,
click the proper buttons, and eventually
| | 03:14 | Windows will be installed on
your Mac in that separate partition.
| | 03:19 | Once Windows is installed, you have
a couple of ways of getting into it.
| | 03:22 | One is through the
Startup disk system preference.
| | 03:26 | You will find that your Windows
partition is there, you can select that, restart,
| | 03:29 | and you will boot into Windows.
| | 03:31 | And don't worry, when you get into
Windows, there is going to be a special
| | 03:34 | control panel that you can use
then to boot back into your Mac.
| | 03:38 | Another option is you can restart
your Mac and hold down the Option key at
| | 03:42 | which point you can choose to boot into
your Windows partition. And that's Boot Camp Assistant.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting, partitioning, and repairing storage devices| 00:00 | One of the most versatile and powerful
tools included with Lion is Disk Utility.
| | 00:05 | You can use it to create and partition
hard drives, as well as diagnose a funky
| | 00:09 | drive and repair its disk permissions.
| | 00:11 | You'll find Disk Utility in the Utilities
folder and we can get there from the Go menu.
| | 00:15 | so Go > Utilities.
| | 00:19 | Here's Disk Utility and we'll launch it.
| | 00:22 | Along the left side, you will see any hard drives
and volumes that are attached to your Mac.
| | 00:26 | Those volumes that are grayed out are unmounted.
| | 00:29 | Now, if I were to mount a volume, I
simply select it and I click the Mount
| | 00:33 | button here at the top of the
window and here's my mounted volume.
| | 00:38 | Normally, when people launch Disk
Utility, they do so to use First Aid and you
| | 00:43 | use this for a couple of reasons.
| | 00:46 | one is that you want to repair disk
permissions and what does that mean?
| | 00:49 | The Mac OS is based on UNIX, which has
a system whereby specific user accounts
| | 00:54 | have a variety of powers or
permissions they could use on that Mac.
| | 00:58 | So for example, the root user can do
anything, whereas a standard user's
| | 01:03 | capabilities are much more limited.
| | 01:04 | Now sometimes these permissions can get
scrambled which can lead to situations
| | 01:08 | where you can't move or open a file,
because the Mac thinks that you have the
| | 01:12 | wrong permissions for example.
| | 01:14 | To check permissions, you just
select a volume and you can either verify
| | 01:17 | permissions or you can repair permissions.
| | 01:20 | Now, quite honestly, you can click
Verify Permissions, but if you find a
| | 01:24 | permission that's out of whack, you are
going to want to repair it anyway, so I
| | 01:27 | just simply click on Repair Disk
Permissions and we'll do that now.
| | 01:33 | This can take a few minutes. And lucky me!
| | 01:38 | I just had one warning and it
wasn't really something that needed to be
| | 01:41 | repaired, and that is often the case.
| | 01:44 | Sometimes, you will see a message time,
and time again no matter how many times
| | 01:48 | repair permissions. Don't worry
about it. They are not really a problem.
| | 01:52 | You also have the option
to verify and repair a disk.
| | 01:55 | When your start-up disk is selected,
you don't have the option to repair it.
| | 01:59 | You can only verify it, because you're not
allowed to repair a disk that you boot from.
| | 02:04 | However, if you select a different
volume, for example I will select this
| | 02:07 | external hard drive, I have the
option to then repair the disk as well.
| | 02:12 | Verifying this drive will take
a while, so I won't do it now.
| | 02:16 | Another option you have is to erase the drive.
| | 02:19 | So I will select the drive, I will
click on Erase, and you see that I have the
| | 02:23 | option to format the drive in a variety
of format. The one you want to use is
| | 02:27 | Mac OS Extended (Journaled) and
that's the one that's selected by default.
| | 02:31 | Here you can also name your drive if
you want to and then click on Erase.
| | 02:36 | When you click on Erase, you will be
asked to confirm that you really want to do
| | 02:39 | this, because this will wipe
all the data off the drive.
| | 02:42 | So you don't want to do this lightly.
| | 02:44 | One other thing to note here
is the Security Options button.
| | 02:47 | Click this and you'll see that you
have the option to erase the drive in
| | 02:52 | many different ways.
| | 02:53 | You can use Fastest which
simply deletes the data directory.
| | 02:57 | It doesn't remove the data from your
drive but it allows your Mac to overwrite
| | 03:00 | the data that's currently on
your hard drive with new data.
| | 03:03 | If you adjust this slider, you can
then choose to overwrite the data that's
| | 03:08 | currently on your drive with nonsense.
| | 03:10 | So the first notch is to overwrite it
one time, the second notch is to overwrite
| | 03:15 | it three times, and the last notch is to
overwrite it seven times. This is excessive.
| | 03:20 | It takes a really long time to overwrite data
seven times. Even three times as quite a bit.
| | 03:25 | If you want to be really secure, feel
free to choose one of these higher options
| | 03:29 | and let this happen overnight.
| | 03:31 | By the time, you get up in the
morning, your drive will be overwritten.
| | 03:34 | For most cases, you can simply leave
it to Fastest, click OK and you're good.
| | 03:40 | I want to keep the data that's on my
drive now, so I'm not going to erase it.
| | 03:43 | Now let's look at Partition.
| | 03:45 | Click the Partition tab and you see
you have the option to divide your drive
| | 03:50 | into multiple volumes.
| | 03:52 | Currently, this volume is divided
into two partitions, but I can choose a
| | 03:56 | different partitioning scheme.
| | 03:57 | I can have it divided into 10
partitions if I like, and each one of these is
| | 04:03 | treated as a separate volume and
would appear on my desktop as such.
| | 04:07 | While we're looking at
partitions, let's look at Options.
| | 04:10 | Click the Options button. Here you're going
to see a sheet with three different options.
| | 04:14 | In most cases you want to make sure
the GUID Partition Table is selected.
| | 04:19 | This is the formatting option you'll
use to create a recovery drive, as I will
| | 04:23 | discuss later when talking about
preventive troubleshooting measures.
| | 04:27 | For now, we'll cancel. And when
you're ready to partition your drive,
| | 04:30 | simply click on Apply.
| | 04:33 | Again, I don't want to partition this drive,
| | 04:35 | so I'll go back to First Aid, and I
will switch without partitioning the drive.
| | 04:39 | Now, one last thing
before we leave Disk Utility.
| | 04:43 | Using this application, you can
create virtual volumes called disk images.
| | 04:47 | To do this, you choose File >
New and then Blank Disk Image.
| | 04:55 | In the window that appears, you can name
your disk image. You can choose its size.
| | 05:01 | We will leave it at 100 MB for now.
| | 05:06 | You can also choose its encryption.
| | 05:08 | In this case, I am going to
choose 128 bit AES encryption.
| | 05:13 | Save it to the desktop and I will click Create.
| | 05:17 | Because I chose to use encryption on this
disk image, I have to supply a password.
| | 05:21 | I am choosing a weak password.
| | 05:24 | Please don't follow my lead.
| | 05:27 | Make sure that you uncheck Remember
password in my keychain, and click OK.
| | 05:34 | So here's my mounted disk image.
| | 05:36 | I open it and it looks just like another volume.
| | 05:39 | I will open TextEdit, I will save that, put
it on the desktop, and I will quit TextEdit.
| | 05:51 | Now, I will take my file and
drag it into my disk image.
| | 05:56 | Close the window and I will eject
the disk image. So where is it?
| | 06:03 | It's right here within this disk image.
| | 06:06 | To find my file, I double-click on it and
I'm prompted for my password. Click OK.
| | 06:15 | Here's the disk image, and here's
the file that I have saved in it.
| | 06:20 | So what's so good in this?
| | 06:21 | This is one way to create a protected
archive, so that nobody but you can open it.
| | 06:27 | So if you have documents that you want to
keep from prying eyes, this is one way to do it.
| | 06:31 | So I'll eject my image, toss out these
files, close Disk Utility, and there you are.
| | 06:42 | Disk Utility's greatest talents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Sharing Over the NetworkUnderstanding sharing| 00:00 | As they say, no Mac is an island, and
because this Mac of yours is likely to be
| | 00:05 | surrounded by other devices, you should
know how to configure it to communicate
| | 00:09 | with those other devices.
| | 00:10 | This is done through the Sharing
System Preference, which we look at now.
| | 00:14 | System Preferences and Sharing.
| | 00:18 | First thing, if you don't like the
name of your computer, change it at the
| | 00:22 | top of this window.
| | 00:23 | So, in this case, it says 15-inch MBP
for my MacBook Pro but I can also change
| | 00:28 | this to Chris' Mac, hit Return, and that
changes the name of my Mac as it's seen
| | 00:36 | through the network.
| | 00:37 | Now, the first option is DVD or CD Sharing.
| | 00:41 | If you have a MacBook Air or new Mac
mini that doesn't have a media drive, how
| | 00:46 | are you supposed to install
software from DVDs or CDs?
| | 00:49 | You do it using this option.
| | 00:52 | When you turn it on, on another
computer on your network, you will be able to
| | 00:55 | see disks inserted into this Mac's media drive.
| | 00:59 | So for example if I have the Mac Pro
on this network and I turn on DVD or CD
| | 01:04 | Sharing there, I can then access those
disks from this computer and install
| | 01:09 | software or copy information
from those disks to this Mac.
| | 01:13 | Next up is Screen Sharing.
| | 01:15 | We look at Screen Sharing separately in
another movie, so check out that movie
| | 01:18 | for that information.
| | 01:19 | Also, File Sharing is in another movie as well.
| | 01:23 | We will move down to Printer Sharing
and this is where you can share a printer
| | 01:27 | that's connected to your Mac with any
other computers that happen to be on
| | 01:30 | your local network.
| | 01:31 | So I will flip this on and now I can
choose the printers that I'd like to share
| | 01:36 | from this Mac out to the network.
| | 01:39 | By default, everyone has
privileges to print to the selected printer.
| | 01:43 | Then there is Scanner Sharing.
| | 01:45 | This is very much like Printer Sharing.
| | 01:48 | Idea is that if you have a scanner
connected to your Mac, you can turn this on
| | 01:53 | and then other computers on your
network can use that scanner as if it were
| | 01:57 | connected to their computer.
| | 01:58 | Web Sharing is for if you want to set
up a website on your computer. That's
| | 02:03 | beyond what we are going to do in this course.
| | 02:05 | Just know this option is here.
| | 02:06 | If you want to set up your Mac as a server
for your website, this is the option to flip on.
| | 02:11 | Remote Login is an option that
allows people using other computers on the
| | 02:15 | Internet to get into the contents of
this computer using something called SSH.
| | 02:20 | This is a secure way of getting
to the computer over the internet.
| | 02:24 | To use it, just click the Plus button,
add the users you like, and then they can
| | 02:28 | access that computer.
| | 02:30 | Remote Management is a little bit
like Screen Sharing which we look at
| | 02:34 | elsewhere in this course.
| | 02:35 | This allows other people across the internet
to see your Mac screen as well as control it.
| | 02:41 | Again, same idea. Click the Plus button and
decide who you're going to allow to do this.
| | 02:46 | Remote Apple Events is a similar idea.
| | 02:48 | The idea here is that people across
the internet can trigger events on your
| | 02:53 | Mac using Apple Events.
| | 02:55 | Again, Plus button allow
users and they can do it.
| | 02:58 | Xgrid Sharing is a very advanced preference.
| | 03:01 | This is the ability to gang together multiple
Macs, so that they act as one supercomputer.
| | 03:06 | Unless you're doing high-end video or
audio work, this would be an option that
| | 03:10 | you are unlikely to use.
| | 03:11 | The next option, Internet Sharing, is
something that you can use and here's an
| | 03:16 | example of how you might use it.
| | 03:17 | Suppose that you are in a hotel and
you've got an Ethernet connection.
| | 03:21 | You have plugged the
Ethernet cable into your Mac.
| | 03:23 | Well, your co-worker is staying in the
next hotel room over and they don't want
| | 03:27 | to pay for this expensive connection.
| | 03:29 | What they'd rather do is leech on
your connection, so that they can use the
| | 03:32 | internet connection as well.
| | 03:33 | You want to save the boss
some money, so, hey, why not?
| | 03:36 | So what you are going to do is share
your connection from Ethernet, then you are
| | 03:40 | going to choose to share
your connection over Wi-Fi.
| | 03:43 | Then turn on Internet Sharing.
| | 03:45 | So you really want to do that.
| | 03:48 | It tells you that Internet Sharing is on.
| | 03:51 | Now your computer is seen as a wireless
hotspot to other computers around you.
| | 03:57 | So you have one connection that
you're paying for, that's your Ethernet
| | 04:00 | connection, but now your Mac is a
wireless router and other people can use that
| | 04:05 | connection to use your ethernet connection.
| | 04:08 | It's quite possible that there are
more legitimate reasons for using Internet
| | 04:12 | Sharing but honestly this is what I use it for.
| | 04:14 | So check it out next time
you are staying in a hotel.
| | 04:17 | And finally, the very last option is Bluetooth
Sharing and this works a lot like File Sharing.
| | 04:24 | When you turn this on, then you can
share files between Bluetooth devices.
| | 04:28 | With normal File Sharing
you'll share files over the network.
| | 04:31 | If you can't set up a network, you can
rely instead on Bluetooth Sharing and
| | 04:35 | this is a wireless form of sharing and you can
share over a small distance, say 30 feet or so.
| | 04:41 | It's a slower way to transfer files.
| | 04:43 | But if you have two computers and they
both have Bluetooth turned on, this is
| | 04:48 | another way to share files.
| | 04:50 | That's the basics of sharing under Lion.
| | 04:52 | Elsewhere in this chapter, we're
going to look at File Sharing, Screen
| | 04:56 | Sharing, and AirDrop.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing files on a network| 00:00 | Like previous versions of Mac OS X, Lion
has an easy way to share files between
| | 00:05 | computers on a local network and it's
called File Sharing. We are going to
| | 00:09 | take a look at that now.
| | 00:10 | So I will go to System Preferences >
Sharing, and I make sure that File Sharing
| | 00:15 | is not only selected, but also the
little checkmark appears next to it.
| | 00:19 | You can tell it's on by the green
button here, indicating it's switched on.
| | 00:24 | Now the way this works by default is
that you will have one folder on your
| | 00:28 | computer that's shared.
| | 00:29 | This is called your Public folder
and I'll show you where that is.
| | 00:33 | So I will go to Finder window > Public and
inside there is something called the Drop Box.
| | 00:38 | The Drop Box is a folder that people
can copy files to, but can't see the
| | 00:43 | contents of nor can they pull files out of it.
| | 00:47 | So it's a way for people to transfer
files to you without seeing what else is in
| | 00:50 | there, which is helpful because let's
say you are in a work environment and lots
| | 00:53 | and lots of people are throwing
files your way in your Drop Box.
| | 00:56 | You don't necessarily want everybody
to see what else is in that Drop Box.
| | 00:59 | So that's for your eyes only.
| | 01:01 | Now you can add shared folders if you
like and to do that, create a folder
| | 01:06 | first, I am going to call this For
Ian, click the Plus button, and then
| | 01:12 | navigate to that folder.
| | 01:13 | You can see it's here.
| | 01:14 | If I actually wanted to drag that in
for the navigation, I could drag it here
| | 01:18 | and it would take us there.
| | 01:19 | I will click on the Add button and now
we have a folder that's ready for sharing.
| | 01:24 | Now I just have to assign people who
can access this folder, so I click on the
| | 01:27 | Plus button and I can assign anybody
that has an account on this computer or, and
| | 01:32 | this is pretty slick, click Address
Book and then assign the folder to someone
| | 01:36 | who you have in your Address Book.
| | 01:37 | So in this case, this Fleming character,
click on Select and then prompted for a
| | 01:44 | password which I will provide to
that person and then Create Account.
| | 01:50 | They are added to the list of
people who now can access this folder.
| | 01:54 | All I have to do now is
assign privileges to them.
| | 01:56 | Currently, it's set at read only, so
they can see what's in the folder, but
| | 02:00 | they can't do anything else with it.
| | 02:02 | If I give them read and write
privileges however, they can not only read files
| | 02:07 | that are in there, but they can add
files to the folder as well and we are going
| | 02:10 | to leave it at that setting.
| | 02:12 | Now it happens that Ian has set
up a folder for me on his computer.
| | 02:17 | So we are just connecting to that
folder and here's that folder for Chris and I
| | 02:21 | can see that file that's in there.
| | 02:23 | If I like to, I can just drag it to
my computer and now I've moved it to my
| | 02:27 | Mac by File Sharing.
| | 02:29 | If I want to write something to that
folder, however, I have to connect as a user.
| | 02:35 | So I enter a username and password and
it's the name of the account on Ian's
| | 02:39 | computer that I'm logging into.
| | 02:43 | Now again, I can see the contents of
the folder, but because I am logged in I
| | 02:46 | can also copy contents to it.
| | 02:48 | So I will take this for Ian folder, plus
sign indicates that I can copy items to
| | 02:52 | that folder and that's what I have done.
| | 02:54 | I can also see any other public folders
he has on there and because I'm logged
| | 02:58 | in as a user, I can also get
into his Ian office folder if I like.
| | 03:03 | And if I want to log off, all I have to
do is click Disconnect and that removes
| | 03:08 | the Ian Office folder.
| | 03:09 | However, I can still see those folders
that are being shared, but again, I can't
| | 03:13 | write to them until I log into that account.
| | 03:16 | So, I am going to clean up my
Desktop a little bit. And that is File Sharing under Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Screen sharing with a remote computer| 00:00 | Like the previous version of MacOS X,
Lion has a Screen Sharing future built in,
| | 00:05 | which is incredibly useful.
| | 00:07 | Let's take a look at how it looks.
| | 00:09 | I will open a new Finder window and
there's my buddy Ian outside the booth and
| | 00:14 | I'm going to share his screen.
| | 00:17 | So I click on Share Screen and I
will enter my name and password for that
| | 00:21 | computer, I have an account on
that computer. Click Connect.
| | 00:27 | Now we have two options here.
One is ask to share the display.
| | 00:31 | That means that I can go into Ian's
account and look at what he's doing.
| | 00:36 | The other option is I can connect to a
virtual display and this means that if I
| | 00:40 | have an account on that computer I can
log into my own account even though Ian
| | 00:45 | is using his account.
| | 00:46 | Let's look at the first option.
| | 00:49 | This is asking Ian permission, if I can
look at his display, and sure enough he
| | 00:54 | granted that permission,
because this is his display.
| | 00:57 | Now by default I am controlling this display.
| | 00:59 | So I am going to go over to the Apple
menu, choose System Preferences. Again I
| | 01:03 | am doing this, not Ian.
| | 01:05 | Look in Users & Groups
and here is Ian's name.
| | 01:10 | That indicates that he is the user
that's currently logged into this
| | 01:14 | computer. He's the admin.
| | 01:16 | My account is here, but
it's not active right now.
| | 01:19 | So I will close this out.
| | 01:21 | So again, I am controlling his computer.
| | 01:23 | However, I can just observe what he's
doing and I will do that by going to
| | 01:27 | View > Switch to Observe Mode and say Ian,
why don't you do something on your Computer.
| | 01:32 | So now Ian is in control, I am just
watching what he's doing, and he is
| | 01:36 | launching Photo Booth.
| | 01:47 | That's a really attractive look,
but I'm going to take over control of
| | 01:50 | that computer again.
| | 01:52 | It was great to watch
but now I'm back in charge.
| | 01:55 | So again I can launch things if I like
and be in complete control of this computer.
| | 01:59 | Now I am going to quite Screen
Sharing to show you another feature.
| | 02:04 | Yes I really do want to quit.
| | 02:06 | Now I am going to launch
Screen Sharing yet again.
| | 02:08 | I will enter my username on
that computer and my password.
| | 02:14 | Now note if I didn't have an account
on that computer, I can still get in but
| | 02:18 | what I have to do is enable the By
asking for permission option. This would then
| | 02:22 | send a message to Ian saying, do you
mind if Chris shares your computer screen?
| | 02:27 | He would then grant permission and even
though I don't have an account on that
| | 02:30 | machine, I could then screen share with him.
| | 02:32 | But in this case I do have an account,
I click on Connect and now I will select
| | 02:36 | the second option, Connect to a virtual display.
| | 02:39 | What happens here is I am presented
with a login screen because my account is
| | 02:43 | not yet logged-in on that computer.
| | 02:45 | I select my name, enter
my password, press Return.
| | 02:51 | And now I am logged into my account.
As you could see the desktop is
| | 02:55 | different than it was before.
| | 02:56 | And this is my account and I can
prove that by going to the Apple menu >
| | 03:00 | System Preferences > Users & Groups
and you will see here that I'm now the
| | 03:05 | admin of this computer.
| | 03:07 | My name is first. That
indicates that I'm in my account.
| | 03:10 | Next down is Ian and you can see that
he is in his account as well because you
| | 03:13 | see little orange circle with a
checkmark next to it indicating that he's
| | 03:17 | logged into his account.
| | 03:18 | So at this moment we are both using
the same computer working in our separate
| | 03:23 | environments. I will close this.
| | 03:26 | So what good is this?
| | 03:27 | Well that's a lot of fun for example, but it's
one-way sharing of resources of a single computer.
| | 03:32 | So if you have one computer that two
people normally work at you don't have to
| | 03:36 | force one-person to log out, so
another person can use it remotely.
| | 03:41 | In this case I can be at home, Ian can
be somewhere, he can be working on the
| | 03:45 | computer at one point.
| | 03:46 | I can then log into my account and I can
work on that same computer if I need to.
| | 03:51 | I think that this is really cool
feature and something that people are going to
| | 03:54 | find really valuable.
| | 03:55 | So I will quit Screen Sharing. Quit,
really quit, close this window, and there's
| | 04:03 | your look at Screen Sharing under Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sending files with AirDrop| 00:00 | Now we are going to look at a new
networking feature built into Lion and this is
| | 00:04 | called AirDrop and this is how it works.
| | 00:06 | I am going to open a new Finder window.
| | 00:09 | When I do you are going to see an
AirDrop entry here. I click on it and you
| | 00:15 | see the name of my computer
at the bottom of the window.
| | 00:18 | So what this is, it's a
replacement for something called sneakernet.
| | 00:22 | Back in the old days if you had a file
and you wanted to give it to somebody who
| | 00:26 | was across the room from you, what
you would have to do is you put it on a
| | 00:29 | floppy disk or you'd put it on a key
drive and you'd copy it there and you take
| | 00:33 | it over to the person and say, hey,
| | 00:34 | look here is the file that you wanted,
instead of e-mailing it or some other method.
| | 00:39 | Well Lion has its new method called
AirDrop and it makes all the sneakernet
| | 00:42 | stuff unnecessary, because now you can
easily copy files from one computer to
| | 00:47 | another computer if that
computer is within about 30 feet of you.
| | 00:51 | So I have my AirDrop window open. I am
going to ask Ian outside the booth to
| | 00:54 | open his AirDrop window and here he is.
So, I can see that he's ready to share.
| | 00:59 | Now note AirDrop works only if each
computer has the AirDrop window open.
| | 01:05 | I am going to copy a file over to Ian.
| | 01:07 | Open a new Finder window and I will find
a document, let's say this Finances file,
| | 01:12 | and I'll drop it on his icon.
| | 01:14 | I am then asked if I would like to
send it, yes I would, I click Send, and I'm
| | 01:18 | waiting for Ian to accept that.
| | 01:21 | When that goes away it indicates Ian
has accepted the file and it's been
| | 01:24 | copied to his computer.
| | 01:26 | Now let's see what it looks
like when he sends a file to me.
| | 01:29 | Here is file. You hear a little boip!
| | 01:32 | And here is the file that I need and I
can choose one or three things. I can
| | 01:37 | save it, if I do this, I will save
it will go into my downloads folder.
| | 01:41 | It was something I don't want, I just
click Decline or I can save and open.
| | 01:46 | I will click Save and Open.
| | 01:47 | It downloads and it opens up in
TextEdit because this is the host application.
| | 01:53 | Now I want to show you one other thing here.
| | 01:55 | Suppose Ian sends me a file that I can't
open. Well let's try that. Ian go ahead
| | 02:00 | and send me something that I
don't have a host application for.
| | 02:04 | Here it is. Again I could save it simply,
put into my Downloads folder, but I'm
| | 02:07 | going to try Save and Open.
| | 02:09 | It goes to my Downloads folder but a
dialog box appears that says there is no
| | 02:15 | application set to open the document Authors.kml.
This is a mapping document. So what do I do?
| | 02:22 | I could choose an application, if I
think I have an application on my Mac that
| | 02:25 | will open this, or, and I think this is brilliant,
| | 02:28 | I can click on Search Apps Store.
| | 02:32 | What would happen now is the Apps
Store application would open and it would
| | 02:36 | direct me to an application that can
open this. At that point I can download the
| | 02:40 | application. I might have to pay for
it or it might be a free application.
| | 02:44 | It's a very cool way to get documents
you can't open and then immediately find
| | 02:48 | an application that will open them.
| | 02:49 | In this case I am going to click
Cancel. And you would want to send that to me
| | 02:53 | one more time and I will just download it.
| | 02:56 | Here it is, I will just save it.
| | 02:57 | It is into my Downloads folder and
sure enough here it is. You notice
| | 03:04 | there are two copies because the
first time I saved it and then I was
| | 03:07 | prompted to find an application on the
App Store. Here's the second copy when I
| | 03:11 | just saved it. Normally you are
just going to get the single copy.
| | 03:15 | And to leave AirDrop all you have to
do is close the AirDrop window and your
| | 03:19 | icon will no longer appear in anyone
else's AirDrop window. And that's Airdrop in Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. Advanced System PreferencesModifying Language & Text settings| 00:00 | Lion is a multilingual operating system.
As such it provides you ways to not
| | 00:04 | only change the languages it uses, but
also the formatting for time and dates.
| | 00:09 | We'll look at just what this
powerful system preference can do now.
| | 00:13 | into System Preferences > Language & Text.
| | 00:17 | Now, Language tab is where you
choose the language you want to use.
| | 00:21 | By default, it's the language you chose
when you set up your Mac the first time.
| | 00:25 | You can rearrange the
order of languages by dragging.
| | 00:28 | So for example, I could take
Espanol and put it here at the top.
| | 00:33 | Now, the next time I log in, my
interface would be in Spanish instead of English.
| | 00:39 | Although I took six years of Spanish,
I'm not sure that all of you did.
| | 00:43 | So I'm going to put that back down
the list so we see this in English the
| | 00:46 | next time I log in.
| | 00:47 | Now the major languages appear here.
| | 00:50 | However, there are more languages that
you can use, and you do that by clicking
| | 00:54 | on the Edit List. Major languages here,
and then as you work your way down, you
| | 00:59 | see there are some languages
that aren't used quite so widely.
| | 01:04 | You can choose the sorting order if you like.
| | 01:09 | Next, is the Text tab.
| | 01:11 | On left, you see Use
symbol and text substitutions.
| | 01:14 | By default, if you were to type (c), it
would instead substitute the copyright sign.
| | 01:23 | Same idea with (r), becomes the
Registered Patent, and then you've got TM.
| | 01:28 | The shortcut for that is
Trademark but it makes it tiny.
| | 01:31 | Also, you can create fractions that way,
so that when you type 1/2, you get this
| | 01:38 | much nicer fraction which is smaller.
| | 01:41 | You can add your own keyboard
shortcuts if you like. Just press Plus.
| | 01:46 | Let's say SIG, which is
going to be short for signature.
| | 01:50 | I'll type-in what's going to appear
and we'll move over to TextEdit and I'll
| | 01:57 | show you how that works.
| | 01:57 | So I type SIG here, press Return, and it
automatically auto-fills the entry that
| | 02:04 | I put under that abbreviation.
| | 02:07 | For now, we get rid of that, and to
do that, just click the Minus button.
| | 02:11 | Lion has a new feature where it will
automatically correct your spelling if you allow it to.
| | 02:14 | This is another feature
that's taken from the iOS.
| | 02:17 | If you don't care for Lion correcting your
spelling, you can just simply turn this off.
| | 02:23 | When you do that you will no longer
have automatic spelling correction.
| | 02:26 | One thing to note here is if you have
an application open that is capable of
| | 02:30 | correcting your spelling, you turn
this off and you leave that application
| | 02:33 | open, it will continue to auto-correct until
you quit that application and start it again.
| | 02:39 | You have the option to correct spelling
here, but it depends on the language you use.
| | 02:44 | So Automatic by Language. It knows
that I'm using American English because
| | 02:47 | that's the way I set it up.
| | 02:49 | However, if I chose to use British
English instead, when I entered C-O-L-O-R for
| | 02:55 | color, it would auto-correct to C-O-L-O-U-R,
because that's the British spelling of color.
| | 03:02 | You can choose to have things auto-
corrected so that in supported applications
| | 03:06 | you get smart quotes, which are the
curly quotes instead of dumb quotes or
| | 03:12 | standard quotes, which is just
the two lines straight up and down.
| | 03:15 | You can also decide how you want the
smart quotes to be notated, so you can also
| | 03:19 | put double brackets in if you like and
here are the dumb quotes at the bottom.
| | 03:24 | Then there's Formats.
| | 03:25 | I'm recording in the US. We have a
certain way of notating dates and time, so we
| | 03:30 | have January 5th, 2011.
| | 03:33 | So there's month, date, and year, but in
other countries they may do it differently.
| | 03:38 | They may have day, month, and year for example.
| | 03:41 | So you can choose the region you want
to use and then it will change the way
| | 03:46 | things like date and time are formatted.
| | 03:49 | This is reflected not only in the
operating system but it's also changed in iCal.
| | 03:54 | So if you happen to be an American and
you're using a British laptop because
| | 04:01 | you've gone overseas, you can change
it to the US formatting so that you see
| | 04:04 | dates the way you prefer to see them.
| | 04:06 | If you were to click the Customize
button, you can customize the way these
| | 04:10 | things are formatted.
| | 04:11 | So for example, under Medium, you can
choose to show the full name, just the
| | 04:17 | initial, or the number of the month. And
you can show all regions, because again
| | 04:23 | this is a limited list and you could
see a much longer group if you like.
| | 04:26 | Then there is Input Sources.
| | 04:29 | The Mac supports a variety of
international keyboards and the way to initiate
| | 04:34 | those is simply to flip
on one of these settings.
| | 04:37 | So let's say I wanted to have a
Brazilian keyboard because they use different
| | 04:43 | characters than may be on my keyboard.
| | 04:46 | When I do this, you notice that
the American flag icon appears here.
| | 04:50 | This flag is going to differ depending on
which country your Mac is associated with.
| | 04:54 | In this case, it's America.
| | 04:55 | But if I wanted the Brazilian keyboard,
I simply select Brazilian and here's
| | 05:00 | the Brazilian flag.
| | 05:02 | So when I type, I'll now be
using the Brazilian keyboard layout.
| | 05:04 | Go back to U.S., turn this on so I
don't mistakenly type in Portuguese.
| | 05:10 | One other thing to note here is
the Keyboard and Character Viewer.
| | 05:15 | Turn that on and you'll see a couple of
options up here at the top of the window.
| | 05:20 | The first is Character Viewer.
| | 05:22 | If you're looking for little symbols
of some kind that you can't normally
| | 05:26 | produce with your keyboard, this
is where you find these things.
| | 05:29 | Here, Latin characters.
| | 05:31 | But here are some of the
alternate characters that you can use.
| | 05:33 | If you want to insert this into some
text, you can simply select that character
| | 05:37 | and then drag it into the text, much like that.
| | 05:45 | If you want those cute little smileys,
you can do that here, and this is
| | 05:50 | actually something that's new in
Lion, that Lion natively supports this
| | 05:55 | Emoji character. And one other viewer
that you should know about and that's
| | 06:00 | the Keyboard Viewer.
| | 06:02 | So this shows you a layout of the
keyboard that you're using with your Mac.
| | 06:06 | Now, what makes this helpful?
| | 06:07 | Well, you already know where these characters
are because they're printed on your keyboard.
| | 06:10 | However, if you hold down the Option
key for example, you can see what you can
| | 06:14 | type when you have the Option
key held down, or Option+Shift.
| | 06:19 | So if you're looking to make the
Apple symbol, that's how you do it.
| | 06:22 | So again, if you're looking for
alternate characters, this is one way to figure
| | 06:25 | out how to create them.
And we'll make that go away.
| | 06:28 | I'm going to turn that off, so that doesn't
appear in the menu bar any longer. There you have it,
| | 06:35 | the workings of language and text.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Optimizing Security & Privacy settings| 00:00 | The Mac OS is one of the most
secure computer operating systems around.
| | 00:04 | By default, the OS is installed so that
it's nigh even impossible for someone to
| | 00:08 | break into your computer
over a network or the internet.
| | 00:12 | But if they actually have your computer in
their sneaky little hands, that's a different story.
| | 00:17 | The Security & Privacy system
preferences help you maintain your Mac's
| | 00:20 | security when someone is using it.
| | 00:22 | You can additionally configure what
internet services you will and won't allow
| | 00:26 | as well as control applications
that ask for your Mac's location.
| | 00:29 | Let's take a look now.
| | 00:30 | Go to System Preferences and Security & Privacy.
| | 00:35 | now by default this system preference
is locked and for a good reason, because
| | 00:39 | well, it controls your security preferences.
| | 00:41 | So you need to click on it and
then enter an administrator's name and
| | 00:45 | password, and click unlock.
| | 00:49 | So this General tab is for protecting
your Mac from people who have physical
| | 00:52 | access to it, those who can sit down at your
computer when you're not there and do things.
| | 00:56 | Now here are the important ones.
| | 00:58 | You can require a password
immediately after the computer goes to sleep or
| | 01:03 | you've had a screensaver kick in.
| | 01:04 | I referred to this when I
was talking about screensavers.
| | 01:07 | That can be Immediate, 5 seconds, a
minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, an hour or
| | 01:11 | 4 hours for example.
| | 01:13 | This can be useful if you've set up a
hot corner for a screensaver, so you drag
| | 01:17 | your cursor down to the corner, the
screensaver kicks in, and then you can walk
| | 01:21 | away from your computer.
| | 01:23 | If somebody else were to sit down at
your computer and try to get into it,
| | 01:26 | the screensaver would be on, they try to get
in, and then they would be queued for a
| | 01:30 | password to get into the computer.
| | 01:32 | I'm going to turn that off for now.
| | 01:34 | Another important feature
is Disable automatic login.
| | 01:38 | Let's suppose that you have this unchecked.
| | 01:40 | Now, I've a laptop here.
| | 01:43 | I'll leave it alone.
| | 01:44 | Somebody comes in and they lift up that
lid and the computer comes on, then they
| | 01:49 | can automatically log in if I have
that option set in Users and Groups.
| | 01:53 | That's not such a great idea if
your Mac is out there in the public.
| | 01:57 | So it's a good idea to leave this on,
so that if you've logged out, nobody can
| | 02:01 | automatically get into your computer
without having a password to do that.
| | 02:05 | You notice at the very beginning of
this, I had to click this lock icon and
| | 02:09 | enter an administrator's password and
that's what this option is here, Require
| | 02:12 | an administrator password to access
system preferences with lock icons.
| | 02:17 | This system preference is different in
that by default it asks for that, but
| | 02:21 | other system preferences, if you turn this on,
they will all ask you to enter a password.
| | 02:25 | You can log out after a
certain number of minutes.
| | 02:28 | So again, step away from your
computer and five minutes after, it will log
| | 02:32 | you out and as long as you can't automatically
log back in, a person needs to know the password.
| | 02:38 | You can show a message when the
screen is locked, letting people know that
| | 02:45 | you're very serious about security.
| | 02:47 | This last option, Automatically update
safe downloads list, there are very, very
| | 02:54 | few problems with viruses and
malware and Trojan horses on the Mac.
| | 02:59 | However, recently there have been a
few Trojan horses that have appeared.
| | 03:03 | These are files that you download from
the Internet that appear to be okay, you
| | 03:08 | run them, and then they perform in some
way that you don't expect and some of
| | 03:11 | that is often bad where it will
even steal a password for example.
| | 03:15 | Apple keeps a list of websites and
files that can be harmful, and it will
| | 03:19 | automatically update that list.
| | 03:21 | This is a good option to keep enabled
so that when you go to a website that has
| | 03:25 | some of this stuff, you'll be warned about it.
| | 03:28 | FileVault is a way of
encrypting the data that's on your Mac.
| | 03:33 | This could be a really good idea
for a laptop because you're traveling
| | 03:36 | somewhere, you've left your laptop in
the bus station, somebody picks it up.
| | 03:40 | If they can get into your computer,
they can also get into your data.
| | 03:43 | However, if you turn on FileVault, all
your stuff is encrypted, so you have to
| | 03:48 | have a couple of passwords to get in there.
| | 03:49 | You can't get to it in some other way
because this stuff has been turned into a
| | 03:54 | format that can't be easily read.
| | 03:56 | Firewall is off by default.
| | 03:58 | What the Firewall does is it prevents
certain ports from being open on your Mac,
| | 04:03 | and a port is an avenue to the internet.
| | 04:06 | So by default common ports are open
so that you can get onto the World Wide
| | 04:11 | Web for example through your browser.
| | 04:13 | But there are other ports that are closed.
| | 04:16 | You can also turn on the Firewall and
when you do that then you can configure
| | 04:20 | certain applications.
| | 04:22 | As we see from this dialog, we can
deny that connection, or we can allow it.
| | 04:26 | I'm going to turn this off, so I
don't keep getting these things.
| | 04:29 | Worth noting is that
Lion's Firewall is really broad.
| | 04:32 | There is not a lot that you can tweak here.
| | 04:34 | If you want to do more tweaking,
you can using a third-party tool.
| | 04:38 | One that I use is called NoobProof and
this is from Hanynet. It's a free tool.
| | 04:45 | What it does is it gives you a long list
of the ports that you can open and close.
| | 04:49 | It's called NoobProof for newbie
because it really is fairly easy to operate.
| | 04:53 | If you're really concerned about using
a firewall with your Mac, I suggest that
| | 04:57 | you install this and give it a try.
| | 05:00 | Then there is the Privacy tab.
| | 05:01 | On the left side, it says, You can
help Apple improve its product and user
| | 05:04 | support by having your Mac
automatically send Apple information.
| | 05:08 | If you want to do this, if you want to
be a good person, go ahead and enable
| | 05:12 | this checkbox and every so often when
you do something on your Mac it may send
| | 05:17 | some anonymized information
to Apple that will help them.
| | 05:21 | Generally, I'm kind of a private person,
so I don't enable options like this.
| | 05:25 | I figured the company can figure it
out on its own without my help, so I
| | 05:29 | leave this unchecked.
| | 05:31 | On the right side you're going to
see an option about location services.
| | 05:35 | There are certain applications that
will ask permission to use your location
| | 05:40 | in their operation.
| | 05:41 | So for example, maybe in a maps
application of some kind, if you're looking
| | 05:45 | for directions or a local services application.
It will ask if it can use your location data.
| | 05:51 | When it does so, it will add the
application to this list of applications here.
| | 05:56 | At that point, you can select
one and you can turn that off.
| | 06:00 | So after a while, you say, yes,
it's perfectly fine for this restaurant
| | 06:04 | application to tell me where I can
find local restaurants but I don't want
| | 06:07 | to have that location data sent to that
website any longer, and you can turn it off.
| | 06:11 | And as it tells you at the bottom,
these are applications that have asked for
| | 06:15 | your location in the last 24 hours.
| | 06:17 | This is another feature that's been
added with Lion. And that's Security
| | 06:22 | & Privacy on the Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring access for for the disabled| 00:00 | One of the most powerful features of the
Mac OS is also a feature that few of us
| | 00:04 | rely on, Universal Access.
| | 00:07 | This is a group of features built into
the Mac OS that allows those with certain
| | 00:11 | physical limitations to use the Mac.
| | 00:13 | While it's designed primarily for those
with vision and hearing challenges, there
| | 00:17 | are a couple of features that those
without these issues can benefit from.
| | 00:21 | We'll go there through System
Preferences and Universal Access in the top row.
| | 00:27 | You see that there are four tabs.
| | 00:29 | Seeing, Hearing, Keyboard, and Mouse & Trackpad.
| | 00:32 | So let's walk through them.
| | 00:33 | The first entry is VoiceOver.
| | 00:36 | VoiceOver is the screen reader that's
built into Mac OS X. This is really,
| | 00:41 | really good software.
| | 00:42 | On a Windows machine you'd have to pay
thousands of dollars for this kind of
| | 00:46 | capability, but it's
thrown in for free with Lion.
| | 00:49 | Now when you turn on VoiceOver.
| | 00:51 | (Male Speaker/Computer: Welcome to VoiceOver.
| | 00:53 | VoiceOver speaks descriptions of items
on the screen and can be used to control
| | 00:57 | the computer using only your keyboard.
| | 00:59 | If you already know how to use
VoiceOver press the V key now.
| | 01:04 | If you want to learn how to use
VoiceOver press the Spacebar now.)
| | 01:08 | Chris: And we're not going to learn VoiceOver.
| | 01:10 | But that's to give you an idea
of this is how you initiate it.
| | 01:13 | If you'd like to learn more about
VoiceOver walk through that tutorial and it
| | 01:17 | will show you how to use it.
| | 01:18 | The gist is that when you put your
cursor over something it will tell you what
| | 01:23 | that is so that you know where you are
without being able to see your display.
| | 01:27 | And then there's the Zoom option.
| | 01:29 | The Zoom option lets you easily
zoom in and out of the Mac's display.
| | 01:33 | You don't have to be severely
visually challenged to use it, however.
| | 01:36 | Older people with weaker
eyesight and yes, I'm one of those people can
| | 01:40 | benefit from this, and you just use
keyboard shortcuts to initiate it.
| | 01:44 | So Command+Option+8 turns it on
and then if you want to zoom in,
| | 01:48 | Command+Option+Equals and to
zoom out, Command+Option+Minus.
| | 01:56 | Click the Options button and you'll
find that you have various magnification
| | 02:00 | settings that you can use to
adjust magnification in this feature.
| | 02:04 | Turn it off for now.
| | 02:06 | You can change the way the display looks.
| | 02:08 | For some people it's easier to see the
display if you turn on white on black.
| | 02:12 | This is kind of an X-ray effect.
| | 02:14 | To people with normal vision this
looks very odd but with people with visual
| | 02:17 | impairments this actually
makes it easier to see the screen.
| | 02:20 | Let's return to Black on white, the normal view.
| | 02:23 | You could also Use grayscale. That takes all
the color out, making things more monochrome.
| | 02:28 | You could also enhance the contrast.
| | 02:30 | This makes things look a little sharper,
colors are more clearly defined, and again
| | 02:35 | for some people using this setting
makes the display a little easier to read.
| | 02:39 | Now let's go to Hearing.
| | 02:42 | If you have difficulty hearing sounds then a
system beep isn't going to help you very much.
| | 02:46 | You can turn on an option to flash
the screen when an alert sound occurs.
| | 02:51 | It looks like this.
| | 02:55 | And again, you don't have to have
problems with hearing. If you're working in a
| | 02:58 | really noisy environment
and you need to be alerted,
| | 03:01 | you may not be able to hear a sound but when
the screen flashes you would be able to
| | 03:04 | tell something is happening.
| | 03:06 | If you've problems hearing with
both ears, this is a good option.
| | 03:09 | Play stereo audio as mono.
| | 03:11 | What this will do is take the two
stereo channels left and right and it will
| | 03:16 | play them through both headphones, so
you'll hear both sides of the stereo
| | 03:20 | mix in each headphone.
| | 03:21 | So if you can't hear with your right ear,
you hear all the sound with your left ear.
| | 03:27 | Now to Keyboard.
| | 03:29 | If you have a difficult time moving
your fingers, sticky keys can help.
| | 03:33 | What happens when you turn it on is
that you can press keyboard combinations
| | 03:38 | such as Command+Option+W for example.
| | 03:42 | You don't have to press them all at the
same time. You can press them in sequence.
| | 03:45 | When you do that it will treat them
as if you press them at the same time.
| | 03:50 | So let's see what that looks like.
| | 03:51 | I'll create a new document here.
| | 03:58 | Now I'm going to save this document.
| | 03:59 | When I do that, normally I would press
Command+S at the same time, but first
| | 04:04 | I'll press Command, shows me the
Command symbol on the screen and then S and
| | 04:09 | I've saved, and press S.
| | 04:14 | So again, a simple way to press keys
in series and have them treated as a
| | 04:18 | single keyboard shortcut.
| | 04:21 | And I'll turn that off, and that
sound indicates that it is indeed off.
| | 04:26 | Again, if you have a difficult time
pressing keys very fast turn on Slow Keys,
| | 04:31 | and this puts a delay between when you
press the key and when it's accepted.
| | 04:35 | So let's go back to
TextEdit and see how that looks.
| | 04:38 | So I'll type a word now the. So I
press and hold t, now h and now e.
| | 04:48 | Now normally if I press that long I would
see repeated characters, but in this case
| | 04:52 | I don't because I had this feature turned on.
| | 04:55 | Back to System Preferences and I'll turn
off Slow Keys. And now Mouse & Trackpad.
| | 05:02 | Mouse Keys is a feature for using
the keyboard to control your cursor.
| | 05:07 | This works best if you have a keyboard
that has a keypad on it, but you can use
| | 05:10 | it on a laptop keyboard as well.
| | 05:12 | I'll show you how that works. I'll turn it on.
| | 05:15 | Now I'm going to move the
cursor just using the keyboard.
| | 05:19 | So on the keypad I'm going to press
the number 8 and up goes the cursor.
| | 05:24 | Now I'm pressing on to 2
down. This is 3, 1, 9, and 7.
| | 05:32 | If I want to click something, say
Mouse Options for example, I've tapped down
| | 05:37 | here and I press 5 and
that initiates the button.
| | 05:43 | I've just turned that off.
| | 05:44 | Now on a laptop again it works differently.
| | 05:47 | You have different keys for this.
| | 05:49 | On a laptop you would hold down the
Function key and on the top row of numbers
| | 05:54 | you'd press 8 to go up, K goes down, O
goes to the right, U goes to the left, I
| | 06:01 | is that Select button for clicking
buttons for example, and you can also go down
| | 06:06 | and left using the nearby keys.
| | 06:08 | One thing to be careful about is
press the Option key five times to turn
| | 06:13 | Mouse Keys on and off.
| | 06:15 | Sometimes people will set this
option and they're working on a Mac doing
| | 06:18 | something and they're busily banging
away going ta, da, da and they don't realize that
| | 06:24 | in the background Mouse Keys is turned on.
| | 06:27 | When they are trying to use their keypad
they find that those numbers don't work
| | 06:30 | anymore because Mouse Keys is on.
| | 06:32 | So we'll turn that off so we don't
accidentally initiate that using the Option key.
| | 06:37 | And using Mouse Keys you can change the Delay.
| | 06:40 | You can change the Maximum Speed.
| | 06:43 | I'm now going to reveal a
little behind-the-scenes secret.
| | 06:46 | Notice our cursor size, it's kind of big
and the reason is because we want you to
| | 06:50 | be able to see what's going on here.
| | 06:52 | We've pulled a little trick on you, and
that is we've increased the cursor size
| | 06:56 | using this very setting.
| | 06:58 | This is our cursor size here.
| | 06:59 | the normal cursor size is here.
| | 07:02 | You can make it much, much bigger.
| | 07:04 | If you lose your cursor use the
Cursor Size slider and you'll find it
| | 07:09 | much easier to find.
| | 07:10 | We'll put it back where we
normally set it for these courses.
| | 07:15 | Again, Universal Access is not something
that everybody needs to use but even if
| | 07:19 | you don't have some kind of
disability you may find it helpful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Energy Saver| 00:00 | Over the years Apple has made
efforts to produce devices that are more
| | 00:03 | energy-efficient but the energy
efficiency of your Mac is only as good as the
| | 00:08 | energy settings that you use.
| | 00:09 | We look at configuring those settings in
the Energy Saving system preference, so
| | 00:14 | back to System Preferences > Energy Saver.
| | 00:18 | Now what you see in the Energy Saver tab
depends on the kind of Mac you are using.
| | 00:22 | If you have a desktop Mac you see one
set of settings as you don't have to worry
| | 00:26 | about battery settings.
| | 00:28 | On laptops-- I am recording this on a laptop--
| | 00:31 | you'll see settings for both
Battery and for Power Adapter.
| | 00:35 | You can figure in each separately
because with the battery you want to be
| | 00:38 | miserly with the power and not so
much when the Mac is plugged in.
| | 00:42 | So let's look through the options.
| | 00:43 | You have the option to
put your computer to sleep.
| | 00:46 | Currently I have this set to Never,
which is not energy-efficient.
| | 00:50 | If I were using a battery on this I
would probably set it to about 15 minutes.
| | 00:54 | You can also sleep the display separately.
| | 00:57 | So knock that down to say 5 minutes or so.
| | 01:00 | What will happen then is if you're
not doing something on your computer, the
| | 01:04 | display will go to sleep, which saves power.
| | 01:07 | After 15 minutes the entire computer
goes to sleep, which really save a lot of
| | 01:11 | power, but now we are going
to set these to about an hour.
| | 01:14 | And as you see it will warn you
for doing something that isn't
| | 01:16 | terribly energy-efficient.
| | 01:18 | You can also put your hard
disk to sleep when possible.
| | 01:21 | Again, this saves power but if you do
this and they go to sleep it takes your
| | 01:25 | Mac a little bit longer to boot back up
because the hard drive has to spin up.
| | 01:30 | You can also slightly dim the display.
Depending on how cheap you want
| | 01:34 | to be with your power,
| | 01:35 | this can or cannot be a good option.
| | 01:37 | I often find when I have this set that
I have to press the Brightness button
| | 01:41 | to increase the brightness on my
laptop because I find it dims down just a
| | 01:44 | little bit too much.
| | 01:45 | And you can automatically reduce the
brightness for the display it goes to sleep
| | 01:49 | at which is fairly intuitive.
| | 01:51 | And you can also automatically restart
your computer if the computer freezes.
| | 01:56 | If while you're away, your
computer freezes up, this will cause it to
| | 02:00 | restart automatically.
| | 02:01 | This can be helpful if you have a
computer at home and one on the road and you
| | 02:05 | need to communicate with that computer
at home and you have had some kind of
| | 02:08 | power failure or freeze.
| | 02:10 | That will bring it right back up.
| | 02:12 | Now at the top there's an
option that you may not see.
| | 02:15 | This laptop I'm using has two graphics cards.
| | 02:18 | One of them is a high resolution
graphics card and it uses more power.
| | 02:22 | It also has a low resolution graphics
card that doesn't use nearly so much power.
| | 02:27 | Using this setting it will choose which
one to use based on how much you want to
| | 02:32 | save your battery life.
| | 02:33 | So if I turn this off it will always
use the high-performance card instead of
| | 02:38 | switching between the two cards.
| | 02:40 | Now with Power Adapter because you are
plugged into power you can be much more
| | 02:44 | free with your power settings.
| | 02:45 | So you can have your computer sleep never ever.
| | 02:48 | You can change the display, so maybe it takes
an hour and 45 minutes before it goes to sleep.
| | 02:54 | If for some reason I have got to put
hard drive to asleep when possible.
| | 02:56 | What do I care? I am using power?
And I am going to turn that off.
| | 03:00 | Wake for internet access
is a reasonably good idea.
| | 03:04 | Let's say for example you have
walked away from your computer.
| | 03:06 | It's the middle of the night, the
computer has gone to sleep, and something's
| | 03:11 | happening on the Internet that your
computer needs to know about, let's say that
| | 03:14 | you've got that tweet for example
and your Twitter client needs to get.
| | 03:17 | It will wake to get that or you have
your e-mail client set up to automatically
| | 03:21 | download your e-mail every half hour or so.
| | 03:23 | So it will wake in order to do that and
we've gone through these other settings here.
| | 03:28 | It's possible that if you have an
uninterruptible power supply, also knows as
| | 03:32 | UPS, you will see an
option for that as well here.
| | 03:36 | If you have plugged that UPS into your
Mac via a USB cable. This lets you check
| | 03:41 | the status of the battery.
| | 03:43 | One other thing. Check Schedule at the
bottom and you see that you have the
| | 03:47 | option to start or wake your
Mac at a certain time every day.
| | 03:51 | Also you have an option to have it go
to sleep or shut down or restart at a
| | 03:57 | certain time every day.
| | 03:59 | This is a good power saving tip.
| | 04:01 | If you routinely work on your Mac from
say 9 in the morning until 6 at night and
| | 04:06 | then you walk away, there's no reason
to leave that Mac going all night unless
| | 04:10 | you need it to do something.
| | 04:11 | This can set up a schedule so that it
will say wake up at 7:30 in the morning.
| | 04:16 | It will automatically launch Mail, it
will grab your e-mail for you, maybe it
| | 04:20 | launches Safari and it will grab your
Safari pages for you, so that when you sit
| | 04:25 | down at your computer it's ready to go
and then at 10 o'clock that night maybe
| | 04:29 | it shuts itself off and you're
not using up power unnecessarily.
| | 04:33 | For now I will turn those off.
| | 04:35 | Click OK, quit System
Preferences, and that's Energy Saver.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding and changing users| 00:00 | In previous versions of Mac OS X you
created and controlled the powers of users
| | 00:05 | in the Account system preference.
| | 00:07 | Lion has renamed this preference to
Users & Groups and let's see how it works.
| | 00:12 | We go to System Preferences, down here in
System, that's the first entry, Users & Groups.
| | 00:18 | In order for us to modify this we are
going to have to click the lock icon.
| | 00:22 | I will enter my
administrator's password, and click Unlock.
| | 00:27 | Now by default you see two users.
| | 00:29 | The administrative user, and
that's me in this case, and guest user.
| | 00:33 | Now it happens that we have a couple of
other users accounts set up on this Mac,
| | 00:37 | because it's used for other lynda
authors, but on your Mac you should see only
| | 00:41 | these two entries, Admin and Guest User.
| | 00:46 | This Guest User account is there only
to allow guests accessing the Mac through
| | 00:50 | a network connection to
share files with this Mac.
| | 00:53 | Now in the Password tab
you see a number of items.
| | 00:55 | One is your user's picture.
| | 00:56 | If you like, you can change that by
clicking on the triangle and choosing
| | 01:00 | a different picture.
| | 01:02 | You can also change your
password by clicking on Change Password.
| | 01:05 | In order to do this you have to enter
your old password, so you need to know
| | 01:09 | that, and then enter a
new password and verify it.
| | 01:12 | If you like, put a password hint in there.
| | 01:14 | So should you forget the password,
maybe the hint will remind you what it is,
| | 01:18 | and then click Change Password.
| | 01:19 | You have your full name.
| | 01:21 | You can change that if you like to, but
you can't change your short name easily.
| | 01:25 | just your Full name, and if you like
you can set your Apple ID. Click Set.
| | 01:29 | It will ask you for your Apple ID and
your password, enter that and you're set.
| | 01:33 | Or if you don't have one,
you can create an Apple ID.
| | 01:37 | You can also look at your Address Book card.
| | 01:40 | Click there, Open, Address Book will
launch and then it will show you your card.
| | 01:44 | If you have one set. We don't
have that set up currently.
| | 01:48 | You can allow the user to
administer this computer.
| | 01:50 | Well, of course I am the Admin
user so that is going to be on.
| | 01:53 | You can also enable parental controls.
| | 01:55 | We are going to look at
parental controls in another movie.
| | 01:57 | So we'll worry about that later.
| | 01:59 | Login Items will show you any applications
that are configured to launch at startup.
| | 02:04 | You can add additional applications if
you like just by clicking on the plus
| | 02:07 | button, navigate to that.
| | 02:09 | So for example if I wanted iChat
to start when I launch my computer.
| | 02:13 | I simply select it and
click Add and that's done.
| | 02:17 | You can also remove items here.
iTunes Helper for example.
| | 02:20 | Not a good idea, because iTunes depends
on it, but if I wanted to get rid of it,
| | 02:24 | I could just by clicking on the Minus button.
| | 02:27 | Now let's take a look at login options.
| | 02:29 | When we talked about security, we
talked about not having automatic login,
| | 02:34 | because it's a security risk.
| | 02:36 | However, you can turn on here if you like.
| | 02:38 | Automatic login can log into me or if I
were one of these other users, I could
| | 02:42 | have it log into their account.
| | 02:44 | When you log in you can see a list of
users or you can see name and password.
| | 02:49 | What this means is it's not going to
show the name and password of that user,
| | 02:52 | but rather have a Name and Password field.
| | 02:54 | This too is a little more secure.
| | 02:56 | The Mac will boot up.
| | 02:57 | It will show you a name and password
field and you have to enter that information.
| | 03:01 | Also, on the login screen it can show
the Sleep, Restart, and Shutdown buttons.
| | 03:05 | You can turn that off if you like.
| | 03:06 | I like to have them on, because
sometimes when I get to that login screen, I
| | 03:10 | want to sleep the computer because I
need to go off and do something else.
| | 03:13 | And there are a bunch of other options.
| | 03:14 | The one I want to call to your
attention is Show fast user switching menu.
| | 03:19 | When you do that you can choose how to
show your username, plus once you do that
| | 03:24 | your name appears up in the menu bar.
| | 03:26 | You can then switch to another user
simply by selecting that user and then
| | 03:31 | entering the password for that user.
| | 03:33 | It's convenient, but we are not going
to have it on for right now. Great!
| | 03:38 | So we've got some users set up.
| | 03:39 | How about if we create a new one?
| | 03:41 | To do that click on the Plus button.
| | 03:43 | You have various kinds of accounts you can use.
| | 03:46 | An Administrator can install software and
do a lot of things that other users can't do.
| | 03:51 | You can throw things away for example
if you have Administrator passwords.
| | 03:55 | A standard account doesn't have the
privilege to install software and can't
| | 03:59 | throw some things away.
| | 04:01 | So if you're setting this up for
somebody else, maybe it's for your child for
| | 04:04 | example who's old enough to actually
control a computer, but you don't want them
| | 04:08 | installing software, maybe set
up a standard account for them.
| | 04:11 | Manage with Parental Controls, again
we are going to talk about parental
| | 04:14 | controls in another movie.
| | 04:16 | So I can tell you about that later.
| | 04:18 | Shared Only is for people who can
log into your computer and just use
| | 04:22 | the sharing services.
| | 04:23 | So they can go to a shared folder for
example, but they can't do other things on there.
| | 04:27 | And then you can create a group share.
| | 04:30 | What this says is-- let's say Joe, Mary,
and Bill all had accounts on this computer.
| | 04:36 | I could create a group for
Joe and Mary, but exclude Bill.
| | 04:40 | Joe and Mary could log into this group
account and then they could control the
| | 04:43 | computer there, but Bill couldn't
get into that group because I haven't
| | 04:46 | allowed that to happen.
| | 04:47 | So let's say I am setting up an
administrative user, I would enter the name.
| | 04:50 | The name of the account.
| | 04:51 | This is the short name.
| | 04:52 | So in my case full name would be
Christopher Breen, short name might be Chris,
| | 04:57 | Password, Verify, Password
hint, and then Create User.
| | 05:01 | When you do that, within the Users folder
here on your hard drive you would see a
| | 05:07 | folder that has the short name
of the users that you've created.
| | 05:12 | And we'll cancel out.
| | 05:15 | So let's take a look at that login
screen and see what it looks like.
| | 05:18 | By default you boot your Mac, you hit
the login screen, which is kind of this
| | 05:22 | cloth colored gray background, and you see
the name of every user account on the Mac.
| | 05:27 | At the bottom you see a Sleep button, a
Restart button, and a Shutdown button.
| | 05:33 | Click one of these and it
does exactly as it suggests.
| | 05:36 | To log into an account simply choose
that account and that icon goes to the
| | 05:41 | middle of the window.
| | 05:42 | Below it appears a Password field.
| | 05:44 | Just enter your password, press the
Return key, and you log into that account.
| | 05:48 | If you find that you've come to an
account that you didn't want log into, there
| | 05:51 | is a little left pointing arrow below that icon.
| | 05:55 | Click that and you move back to the login
screen where you can choose another user.
| | 06:00 | So now I am going to log into my account,
I'll enter my password, press Return,
| | 06:05 | and I move into that account.
| | 06:07 | And because by default Lion remembers
where you left off we are back to the
| | 06:11 | Users & Groups screen. Simple enough.
| | 06:13 | We'll quit System Preferences. And
that's what you need to know about Users & Groups.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring Parental Controls| 00:00 | I don't care how precocious your child
is. Allowing any young child, and some
| | 00:04 | older ones, unfettered access
to computer isn't a great idea.
| | 00:08 | Fortunately, Lion includes parental
controls which allows you to limit what
| | 00:12 | particular users can do to the Mac.
| | 00:14 | Here's how to set it up.
| | 00:15 | Go to System Preferences
and select Parental Controls.
| | 00:21 | When you do this for the first time,
you will be told that you need to create a
| | 00:23 | new user, because there isn't one
that has parental controls imposed.
| | 00:28 | So we'll click Continue to
create a new user account.
| | 00:31 | I need to unlock my account in order to do this.
| | 00:34 | So enter an administrator's password
and now I am going to create a new account
| | 00:39 | for my child. And we'll call this, the
kid's name is kid, because I am not a
| | 00:43 | very imaginative parent.
| | 00:45 | Account name is kid.
| | 00:46 | For our purposes we are
going to make the password kid.
| | 00:49 | But please make yours more secure.
| | 00:52 | And Password hint is another bad idea.
Don't write password is and then the
| | 00:58 | name of the password.
| | 01:00 | Now it will set about creating an account
with parental controls imposed. Here we are.
| | 01:05 | We are inside the Parental Controls
system preference, and here is what you do
| | 01:09 | to limit access to this account.
| | 01:10 | One of the first things you can do is
invoke Use Simple Finder, and what this
| | 01:16 | does is it creates a dock
that has limited options.
| | 01:19 | It also has fewer menu commands.
| | 01:21 | So fewer things that will confuse a young child.
| | 01:25 | You can also limit the
applications that the user can use.
| | 01:27 | So you'd click the downward pointing
arrow and you can decide, all right, they
| | 01:30 | can have Address Book.
| | 01:32 | Well, I'm not going to let him use any of
these Adobe applications. Automator, no.
| | 01:36 | Chess, I am going to let them play
chess because that's a good thing for a kid.
| | 01:40 | Let's say we will also give them access
to Excel, because they're kind of a geek
| | 01:46 | and they like spreadsheets.
| | 01:48 | You can also choose whether
they can use App Store apps.
| | 01:51 | You can have them use all of them.
| | 01:52 | Also, these apps are rated by age.
| | 01:55 | So if you want them to use just kids' apps
you might do 4+ or maybe 9+, but not up to 17+.
| | 02:03 | You can also control their access to the dock.
| | 02:05 | Do you want to allow them to modify
the Dock or not? They can or not.
| | 02:10 | Now let's flip that off. Let's go to Web.
| | 02:13 | You can also restrict
what they can do on the web.
| | 02:16 | So you can allow unrestricted access.
| | 02:17 | So if you have an older child, you can
let them go anywhere they want on the web.
| | 02:21 | Or you can try to limit them.
| | 02:24 | Now this is you can try to limit
access to adult websites automatically.
| | 02:28 | So Apple keeps a database of adult
websites and if they try to get onto one of
| | 02:33 | those websites, they will see a
warning that says, you do not have privileges
| | 02:36 | for this and you can't get here.
| | 02:38 | Click Customize, then you
can allow certain websites.
| | 02:41 | So this is creating a white list, and
do that by clicking the Plus button and
| | 02:45 | below you can click the Plus
button and deny certain sites.
| | 02:48 | Or you can allow Apple to choose for you.
| | 02:51 | Allow access to only these sites
and Apple has gone through to these
| | 02:54 | kid-friendly sites and
they've created a list of them.
| | 02:57 | Again, if you like, click the Plus
button and you can add bookmarks to
| | 03:02 | others that you like.
| | 03:04 | Now when configuring these web
restrictions keep in mind that this works
| | 03:07 | only for Apple Safari.
| | 03:09 | So if you have something like Chrome
or another web browser such as Firefox
| | 03:14 | on your Mac make sure that you add that to
the list of applications that are forbidden.
| | 03:19 | That way you'll have these web
restrictions in place, because you'll only be
| | 03:23 | allowed to use Safari.
| | 03:24 | Then there is People.
| | 03:27 | You could limit who your
child communicates with.
| | 03:29 | One way to do that is Limit email, so
you can allow them to communicate with
| | 03:34 | just certain people.
| | 03:35 | Click the plus sign, add the first name,
last name, and the email address of the
| | 03:40 | person you're allowing your child to
communicate with, and then click Add.
| | 03:45 | You can also limit iChat.
| | 03:47 | So if you want your kid chatting
with their best friend, no problem.
| | 03:50 | All you do is click the Plus button
and you choose the person you want to
| | 03:54 | allow them to chat with. Now Time Limits.
| | 03:59 | You can limit the amount of time that
your child is working on the computer.
| | 04:03 | First option is Weekday time limits.
| | 04:05 | So for the weekday, all right, we are
going to let him use the computer for
| | 04:09 | about 2 hours a day.
| | 04:10 | That's enough time for them to get
their homework done and play a little game.
| | 04:13 | You can also access the Weekend.
| | 04:15 | You're going to give them even more
time, because hey, it's the weekend.
| | 04:18 | So 5 hours a day is fine.
| | 04:20 | You can impose Bedtimes.
| | 04:22 | So on school nights, you can say,
sorry, after 8 p.m. no computer for you
| | 04:26 | until -- 6 is a little early for me
-- until 7 a.m. and on Weekends you can
| | 04:32 | stay up a little bit later.
| | 04:33 | So 10 o'clock until, but we all sleep in.
| | 04:37 | So until 10 in the morning.
| | 04:40 | And then there is other.
| | 04:41 | You can hide profanity in the Dictionary.
| | 04:43 | The dictionary has some words that
some people might find objectionable.
| | 04:46 | You can hide those words if you like.
| | 04:49 | You could limit printer administration.
| | 04:51 | That means that the user can't change
printer settings, they can't add printers,
| | 04:55 | and they can't remove printers.
| | 04:57 | Limits CD and DVD burning
is exactly what it says.
| | 05:01 | If your child got into the habit of
burning mixed CDs and you feel like that's
| | 05:05 | not a proper way to use music, you can
limit it so they can't burn DVDs and also
| | 05:10 | disable changing the password.
| | 05:12 | Honestly, if you're administering a
computer and you don't want your kid to
| | 05:16 | be able to do a lot of stuff on it, you don't
want to allow them to change their passwords.
| | 05:20 | So don't allow them to change their password.
| | 05:23 | We'll go back to the People tab so
that you can see logs. This is important.
| | 05:27 | Click the Logs button and here you're
going to be able to see what your kid has
| | 05:32 | done on the computer while you were away.
| | 05:34 | So you can see a list of
the websites they visited.
| | 05:37 | The websites that have been blocked,
your child tried to get to this website,
| | 05:40 | but Parental Controls said, nah.
| | 05:43 | Applications that the
child has used and also iChat.
| | 05:46 | Who has been chatting with your child?
| | 05:49 | You can show activity for a Week, a
Month, Three Months, Six Months, a Year, or
| | 05:54 | all of it if you care to or you can
group these logs by contact or by date.
| | 05:59 | When you're finished looking
at the log just click Done.
| | 06:01 | One other option I want to show
you is down in the Tools menu.
| | 06:04 | If you look at the very bottom you
see this option to Allow Remote Setup.
| | 06:09 | This means you don't have to be sitting
down at the computer that your child is
| | 06:12 | going to be using. Instead you can
be on a computer on the local network.
| | 06:15 | So your child has a computer
in their room, you have your own
| | 06:19 | computer elsewhere.
| | 06:20 | You can set up Parental Controls from
that remote computer. And that's one way so
| | 06:25 | that the child doesn't feel like you're
bursting into the room and playing with
| | 06:27 | their computer, but instead you can
configure Parental Controls as you like.
| | 06:31 | One of the nice things about this is, also
you can change these settings if you like.
| | 06:36 | So if your child gets a little bit older,
remotely you can say okay, you're old
| | 06:39 | enough now to use older apps from the
Apps Store or we can allow you to use
| | 06:45 | Photo Booth whereas you
weren't allowed to use it before.
| | 06:48 | So that's one of the
advantages of doing this remotely.
| | 06:50 | Now as a parent I can tell you that
Parental Controls are helpful, but a good
| | 06:54 | parent doesn't rely on them.
| | 06:56 | It's always a good idea to explain why
you're limiting the child's access to the
| | 06:59 | Internet, email, and iChat
without scaring them too much.
| | 07:03 | As children grow older, you can
lighten up on the controls while at the same
| | 07:06 | time you can let them know that if necessary
you can monitor anything they do on the computer.
| | 07:13 | It may seem intrusive and a little creepy,
but it's important to protect your kids.
| | 07:17 | And that's parental controls under Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. TroubleshootingPreventive measures: Creating a Lion boot drive| 00:01 | As they say, an ounce of prevention
is worth a pound of cure and no truer
| | 00:05 | words were spoken when speaking of
preventing the bad thing from happening to your Mac.
| | 00:10 | While I hate to be the voice of gloom and
doom, the bad thing will eventually happen.
| | 00:15 | A hard drive will die, a rambunctious
pet will knock your laptop off a counter,
| | 00:20 | or you will spill a fizzy
libation into the guts of your computer.
| | 00:24 | Now, while you can't prevent the bad
thing from happening, you can be prepared
| | 00:28 | so that when it does you have some recourse.
| | 00:31 | The primary thing to keep in mind
is that you must backup your data.
| | 00:35 | Use Time Machine, make an additional
backup, store your backups offline, upload
| | 00:40 | the most important files
to an online backup server.
| | 00:43 | It doesn't matter how you do it,
but you must have a backup.
| | 00:46 | That way when the bad thing happens,
you don't lose your precious data.
| | 00:50 | Some of which, your photos for
example, you can never ever recover.
| | 00:55 | Now, let's talk about some recovery tools.
| | 00:57 | First of all, we are going to go Safari.
| | 00:59 | Disk Assistant creates a tiny version
of the Mac OS along with Disk Utility and
| | 01:03 | some other helpful tools.
| | 01:05 | You install this on a USB drive and then
you can use it to boot your Mac and run
| | 01:10 | Disk First Aid, or if necessary
install a new copy of Lion on your Mac, if
| | 01:15 | you're connected to the Internet.
| | 01:17 | So to do that, I click on
Download and it downloads.
| | 01:22 | Go back to the Finder, go to the
Downloads folder, and here it is.
| | 01:30 | So we double-click to open the disk
image and I'll drag the Utility to the
| | 01:35 | Desktop so that we can see it.
| | 01:41 | Now I run the utility.
| | 01:42 | I'll agree to the license agreement.
| | 01:49 | And then it asks for a USB stick.
| | 01:52 | So I'll insert a 1 gigabyte stick
into my computer, and here it is.
| | 01:59 | I select it and click on Continue.
| | 02:02 | I enter my password, click OK, and now
it sets about building my recovery disk,
| | 02:11 | and this takes several minutes.
| | 02:15 | Now I have the recovery
tools on my bootable flash drive.
| | 02:18 | Now, in the future if I can't access
the Recovery HD Partition that's installed
| | 02:23 | along with Lion on my startup drive and
to boot from this drive, just insert the
| | 02:27 | Flash drive into your Mac, restart
your Mac, hold down the Option key, and in
| | 02:31 | the startup window select
this drive to boot from.
| | 02:35 | So quit this, I can throw this tool away,
and we'll throw this installer away.
| | 02:43 | I can inject that USB stick.
| | 02:46 | Now, this is a fine tool if you have an
Internet connection and you can download
| | 02:53 | another copy of Lion.
| | 02:54 | But what if you don't have that
connection or the connection you have is
| | 02:57 | really slow or metered?
| | 03:00 | In this case you want to have a
complete installer on another drive.
| | 03:03 | So I'll be showing you how to make that.
| | 03:04 | The first thing you need is a copy of
the Lion installer that's on your Mac.
| | 03:09 | If you didn't heed my earlier advice
to keep a copy of this installer, you're
| | 03:12 | going to need to download another copy
from the App Store, but there is a trick
| | 03:15 | to it, and I'll show you that trick now.
| | 03:18 | So from the Apple menu I choose App Store.
| | 03:22 | Featured. Now I'll click on Purchases
and I've purchased a copy of Lion, so it
| | 03:26 | should be available here.
| | 03:29 | But look what happens. Here is Lion
and it tells me that it's installed, and
| | 03:34 | indeed it is, because I'm
running Lion on this Mac.
| | 03:37 | Well, how do I get another copy of the installer
if it tells me it's installed? Here's the trick.
| | 03:42 | Go back to Featured, hold down the
Option key, and keep holding Option until
| | 03:48 | the page fully loads.
| | 03:49 | If you don't wait for to it fully load,
this trick won't work. Note what happens.
| | 03:56 | It now shows me that I can install a
copy of Lion and that's because I held
| | 03:59 | down the Option key when I clicked on Purchases.
| | 04:03 | At this point all I have to do is
click on the Install button and then the
| | 04:07 | nearly 4 gigabyte file will download to my Mac.
| | 04:10 | I'm not going to do that now, because
it's going to take an awfully long time.
| | 04:13 | I just wanted to show
you how this trick is done.
| | 04:16 | So I'll quit the App Store and we'll move on.
| | 04:21 | So now we want to create a full installer.
| | 04:22 | So how do I do that?
| | 04:24 | Let's find that copy of Lion
that I have on my hard drive.
| | 04:26 | I've actually hidden one
away in the Documents folder.
| | 04:31 | I had to compress a copy, because if I
didn't the App Store would have seen my
| | 04:34 | installer on there, and even with the
Option key held down would not allow me to
| | 04:38 | download another copy.
| | 04:40 | So I'll grab this and I'll move it to the
Desktop, and we will proceed with the technique.
| | 04:45 | Now, I am going to take an 8 gigabyte flash
drive and I am going to plug that into my Mac.
| | 04:51 | Now, 1 gigabyte flash drive was fine
for the Recovery Assistant, but for a full
| | 04:55 | installation I need an 8
gigabyte or larger hard drive.
| | 04:59 | Now, note that this drive must be
formatted in the GUID format, which I showed
| | 05:03 | you how to do when I discussed Disk Utility.
| | 05:07 | We go to the Lion installer and I am
going to Control+Click on it and choose
| | 05:11 | Show Package Contents.
| | 05:13 | Now I'm going to follow this path,
Contents/SharedSupport, and we're looking
| | 05:20 | for this InstallESD.dmg file.
| | 05:20 | I'll move this down to the bottom here.
| | 05:27 | And now I'll launch Disk Utility.
| | 05:30 | So I'll select my flash
drive and click on Restore.
| | 05:34 | I then select the InstallESD.dmg file and I
am going to move that to the Source field.
| | 05:41 | I'll then take my Flash drive and
move it to the destination field.
| | 05:47 | To finish the procedure all I
have to do is click on Restore.
| | 05:50 | So what's happened?
| | 05:51 | This InstallESD.dmg file is
the full installer for Lion.
| | 05:57 | So what I'm doing is asking to take
the source from this disk image file and
| | 06:01 | copy it completely to my flash drive.
| | 06:04 | When I do that and I want to reinstall
Lion without downloading it again, all I
| | 06:09 | have to do is insert the Flash drive,
restart my Mac while holding down the
| | 06:13 | Option key, and then selecting
that flash drive to boot from.
| | 06:17 | When I do that, up comes
the usual Recovery Options.
| | 06:20 | One of which is to Reinstall Lion.
| | 06:23 | When I select that, it will
install from this flash drive rather than
| | 06:27 | downloading the Lion installer.
| | 06:28 | Now, you can also burn this installer to a DVD.
| | 06:31 | And to do that, first insert a blank
DVD disk, select your image, and then
| | 06:36 | click on the Burn button.
| | 06:39 | You'd be prompted to insert a DVD, and
when the DVD is mounted, simply click on
| | 06:46 | the Burn button to burn that DVD.
| | 06:51 | We won't do that now, instead I'll
quit out of Disk Utility and we will
| | 06:58 | eject the flash drive.
| | 06:59 | Here's one last tip.
| | 07:00 | Go to alsoft.com and
purchase a copy of DiskWarrior.
| | 07:05 | DiskWarrior is $100 disk
repair and recovery utility.
| | 07:08 | Now, I know $100 sounds like a lot of
money for a utility, but believe me, if it
| | 07:13 | saves your data just once,
it's completely worth it.
| | 07:16 | It can repair low-level directory
damage that Apple's First Aid can't touch.
| | 07:20 | If your Mac's hard drive is deeply
corrupted, there's a good chance that
| | 07:23 | DiskWarrior can cure its ills.
| | 07:25 | And if it can't, it has the ability
to recover your data from the drive.
| | 07:29 | So absolutely worth having.
| | 07:33 | Remove the installer.
And that's about it.
| | 07:35 | The preventive measures you
can take to prepare for disaster.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding and configuring permissions| 00:00 | Mac OS X is based on the UNIX operating
system and one of the beauties of UNIX
| | 00:04 | is that it does its best to prevent you
from around from mucking around with the
| | 00:07 | more intimate portions of the operating
system, by assigning certain powers or
| | 00:12 | permissions to each user.
| | 00:13 | Lion is a little sterner about these
permissions than previous versions of the
| | 00:17 | Mac OS and there may be times when
you want to change information to make
| | 00:21 | something easier and this is how you do it.
| | 00:23 | By way of demonstration we'll go to the
Applications folder and we are going to
| | 00:27 | find the Chess application.
| | 00:29 | Now in past versions of the Mac OS I
could take this Chess application and I could
| | 00:33 | drag it to the trash to throw it
up because maybe I don't like Chess.
| | 00:38 | In this case the Mac tells me Chess
can't be modified or deleted because it's
| | 00:42 | required by Mac OS X. This is nonsense.
| | 00:46 | It's not required; it's just that Apple
has not given you permission to throw
| | 00:50 | away any Apple applications that
appear in the Applications folder.
| | 00:54 | So how do I get rid of this thing if I
choose to, you select it, press Command+I,
| | 01:01 | and you look here under Sharing and
Permissions. If you don't see that listing
| | 01:05 | just click on the triangle.
| | 01:07 | The permissions appear here under
Name: their system, wheel and everyone.
| | 01:12 | System has read and write privileges,
now the system account is essentially the
| | 01:17 | Mac, wheel is the root account, this is
an account that can do anything it wants,
| | 01:22 | and everyone is well, everyone.
| | 01:24 | So let's change permissions
so we can throw this away.
| | 01:27 | I click on the lock icon, enter my
password, and now I'm going to change the
| | 01:32 | everyone permission.
| | 01:33 | It's Read Only now but I am
going to change it to Read & Write.
| | 01:37 | This means that not only can I look
at this application and open it, but I
| | 01:41 | can move it around.
| | 01:42 | I will close that window and now I'll
throw out Chess and it's gone. I will
| | 01:49 | bring it back by pressing Command+Z to
undo that. We will take one more look at
| | 01:54 | permissions. Again you
have to unlock this. Return.
| | 02:01 | One other thing you can do is click
the plus button and then you can add users,
| | 02:06 | so for example I could add all
Administrators or I could add me because
| | 02:10 | I've user account here, I am not going to do
that in this case and then you click Cancel.
| | 02:16 | One other thing you may want to look is
the ability to change the permissions on
| | 02:20 | a folder and then apply those
permissions to everything else in that
| | 02:24 | folder. So I'll go to my documents folder,
I'll chose this Tax Documents folder, Command+I,
| | 02:32 | unlock. I have read and write privileges
here. I can apply the same privileges to
| | 02:40 | everything within this folder simply
by selecting Apply to enclosed items.
| | 02:45 | This is useful if you have a folder
full of stuff, you go into a folder, and
| | 02:49 | you're trying to move files or throw
them away, and you're told you can't.
| | 02:53 | If you apply your permissions from that
folder to all the enclosed items, then
| | 02:57 | you have complete control
over the contents of that folder.
| | 03:03 | And that's editing permissions on Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Troubleshooting techniques| 00:00 | Except for you and me, dear viewer,
nothing is perfect. No, not even your Mac.
| | 00:05 | There will be times when that Mac
misbehaves in confounding ways, and it won't
| | 00:09 | start up, it freezes or shows an error
when you're trying to boot up, or when
| | 00:13 | it does boot up, applications won't
launch or they spontaneously quit, or your
| | 00:17 | Mac runs very slowly.
| | 00:19 | Fortunately, there are things you
can do to help your Mac and yourself
| | 00:22 | when things go wrong.
| | 00:23 | So let's talk about those things right now.
| | 00:27 | First of all, if you walk into your
room, you press your Mac's power button
| | 00:32 | and nothing happens, the first thing you
want to do is take a look at power connections.
| | 00:37 | I can't tell you how many times people
have called me on the phone or emailed me
| | 00:41 | and said, "My Mac won't start up,"
and I say, "Well, is it plugged in?"
| | 00:44 | And they look at the power
cord, they go, oh yeah, sorry.
| | 00:49 | So you want to make sure that
your Mac is plugged into power.
| | 00:52 | Also, if it's plugged into a power strip,
make sure the power strip is turned on.
| | 00:56 | If it's plugged into a wall socket,
make sure that the switch on the wall is
| | 01:00 | switched on so that
everything is connected to power.
| | 01:03 | Also check your cable connections.
| | 01:05 | It's possible that the power cord in the
back of the Mac or in your laptop isn't
| | 01:09 | seated properly, so it's
not getting power that way.
| | 01:13 | You also want to scrutinize
recently installed memory and hardware.
| | 01:18 | So for example, you start up your Mac
and you see this bunch of gibberish appear
| | 01:23 | on the screen, and that's called a kernel panic.
| | 01:25 | If you see this kind of thing and you
have recently installed memory or some
| | 01:30 | kind of hardware, shut off your Mac,
disconnect it from power, reseat that
| | 01:35 | memory, or try moving it to different
slots, or take it out all together and
| | 01:39 | go with the original memory, put it
back together, restart your Mac, and see
| | 01:44 | if it operates properly.
| | 01:45 | If so, it's possible that the memory
you've put in was either incompatible or
| | 01:51 | bad or it simply wasn't seated.
| | 01:53 | Sometimes you have to press
really hard to get memory in.
| | 01:56 | Don't press so hard that you're going to
break something, but make sure it's well seated.
| | 01:58 | There are also issues with adding new hardware.
| | 02:01 | Sometimes you'll have a crash or you'll
have a kernel panic if you've attached
| | 02:05 | an incompatible device.
| | 02:07 | So what you want to do in that case is
shut down the Mac, disconnect everything
| | 02:12 | except your keyboard and your mouse and
your monitor, if you use one with your
| | 02:16 | Mac, and then restart.
| | 02:18 | If it seems to be starting okay,
that's an indication that there's a
| | 02:21 | problem with this hardware.
| | 02:23 | In that case, go to the
manufacturer's site and see if there's some kind
| | 02:27 | of driver that you can use that's an
update of whatever driver it's currently using.
| | 02:32 | It may be that the driver that you
originally had was incompatible with Lion.
| | 02:36 | You have a new driver and it will work okay.
| | 02:40 | As I said, disconnect non-essential peripherals.
| | 02:44 | This can be a problem, not only
because of startup, but you may have already
| | 02:47 | started off your Mac, and it still
seems to be working in kind of an odd way.
| | 02:51 | Shut down, disconnect the
nonessential stuff, start up, see how it works.
| | 02:55 | If it works better, shut down again and
start adding in peripherals one at a time.
| | 03:00 | Add it in once, see how it works. If
it's okay, shut down, add another one,
| | 03:05 | start up, is it okay? Great.
| | 03:08 | And so keep repeating until
you find the problem peripheral.
| | 03:13 | You can also disable startup items at startup.
| | 03:16 | Oftentimes when you install a software,
it will install startup items, and these
| | 03:19 | are little programs that
launch as your Mac is booting up.
| | 03:23 | Most of the time these things are very,
very helpful, but sometimes there can be
| | 03:27 | a conflict and this can
cause a problem with your Mac.
| | 03:30 | If you want to disable startup items at
startup, just hold down the Shift key as
| | 03:34 | you startup and you'll boot into
something called Safe Boot Mode.
| | 03:37 | If your Mac is working perfectly
under Safe Boot but not otherwise, go into
| | 03:42 | Users and Groups, unlock the System
Preference with your username and your
| | 03:46 | password, and then go into
Login items and take a look there.
| | 03:49 | Remove the items there and then start up again.
| | 03:51 | If it starts up okay, just like with
peripherals, add the startup item, see
| | 03:56 | how your Mac runs, add another one, see how
it runs, until you can isolate the problem.
| | 04:00 | If your Mac is still misbehaving, there
may be something corrupt on the hard drive.
| | 04:05 | In that case, you want to restart your
Mac, hold down the Option key, and then
| | 04:10 | when you have the option to choose
Volumes, choose the Restore HD Partition.
| | 04:15 | A shortcut to this is to hold down
Command+R when you start up and it will boot
| | 04:19 | into that partition.
| | 04:20 | Once you've done this, run Disk Utility.
| | 04:23 | This will be one of the options in the window.
| | 04:25 | Once you run Disk Utility, launch
First Aid, and choose Verify Disk.
| | 04:30 | If it finds a problem, choose Repair
Disk and hopefully that fixes your problem.
| | 04:36 | Disk First Aid is pretty good, but
it's really not a miracle worker.
| | 04:40 | If you need a stronger repair
tool, there are others out there.
| | 04:44 | Elsewhere in the course I've talked
about Alsoft's DiskWarrior. This is a
| | 04:47 | utility that I swear by. It's $100.
| | 04:49 | It can fix low-level corruption
that other utilities can't touch.
| | 04:53 | I think it's absolutely worth having.
| | 04:55 | You may only use it one time, but it
may save your data, and therefore your
| | 05:00 | bacon, so worth getting.
| | 05:02 | It's also worth your
while to update your software.
| | 05:05 | It's not the case that Apple goes to
every software vendor in the world and
| | 05:09 | says, oh, by the way, we're going to be
coming out with a new version of Mac OS
| | 05:11 | X in the next six months, so why don't
you please update your software so it's
| | 05:15 | going to be compatible
with our operating system?
| | 05:18 | Sometimes a new operating system will
come out and software vendors need to
| | 05:21 | catch up and make their
software compatible with the Mac OS.
| | 05:26 | In this case, if things don't seem
to be working right, you launch an
| | 05:29 | application and it's crashing,
see if there is an update for it.
| | 05:33 | It's possible that update will help any
problem you're having with the software.
| | 05:38 | Check Activity Monitor. If your Mac
is churning along, go into Activity
| | 05:43 | Monitor, as I showed you in one of our
other movies, and see what's taking all
| | 05:46 | that processor time.
| | 05:48 | It's possible there's some background
process that you can do without, that
| | 05:52 | you can get rid of that won't eat up your
processor and therefore slow down your Mac.
| | 05:56 | If you're having a real problem
with a piece of software, you've done
| | 06:01 | everything you can, delete it, get rid
of it, and reinstall it, because it's
| | 06:06 | possible that it has become
corrupted, and with a fresh install of that
| | 06:10 | software, then it will work perfectly.
| | 06:12 | If everything seems to be going wrong
and you just can't figure out what the
| | 06:17 | problem is, there is no
shame in restoring from a backup.
| | 06:21 | Of course, you've backed up. I've told you
to backup and you've done it. Good for you.
| | 06:26 | So restart your Mac, hold down the
Option key, boot into the Restore HD
| | 06:32 | Partition, and when you do, you'll
see an option to restore from the
| | 06:35 | Time Machine Backup.
| | 06:37 | Choose that option, restore your
data, and everything should be okay.
| | 06:41 | If not, you can go as far back as
reformatting the drive using Disk Utility and
| | 06:46 | then reinstall Mac OS X and
then restore your software.
| | 06:51 | And court of last resort, if you've done
all these things or if any one of these
| | 06:57 | things seems too difficult
for you, give Apple a call.
| | 07:00 | They made the software, they made
the hardware, they know the answers.
| | 07:04 | If you have a local Apple Store, you
can make an appointment with a Genius.
| | 07:08 | Take your computer in
there and they'll help you out.
| | 07:10 | If you have AppleCare, which I think is
a good idea, this extends your warranty
| | 07:14 | to three years instead of one.
| | 07:17 | You can give Apple a call on the phone,
oftentimes they'll tell you to take your
| | 07:20 | hardware down to an Apple Store, if
there is one nearby, or if there isn't, you
| | 07:23 | can ship your stuff to Apple free of charge.
| | 07:26 | Also, many towns have Apple
Authorized Service Centers.
| | 07:30 | These are technicians who
have been trained by Apple.
| | 07:32 | They know Apple stuff backwards and
forwards and they can fix your Apple
| | 07:36 | gear for you as well.
| | 07:38 | Now this may seem like a long
list, but it's a logical one.
| | 07:40 | If you follow these steps, chance are
that your Mac is going to be back in the
| | 07:44 | pink in no time at all.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionTechniques for using the Mac efficiently| 00:00 | Throughout this course I've tried to
provide you not only with, as the course
| | 00:04 | title suggests, Lions essentials but
toss in a few helpful hints along the way.
| | 00:09 | But a few hints remain.
| | 00:10 | Allow me to offer them to you now.
| | 00:12 | Should some one ask you for some of the
more intimate details about your Mac, and
| | 00:16 | this could be a repair person or
an ISP representative, for example,
| | 00:20 | you may not know where to look.
| | 00:22 | So let me help you with that.
| | 00:23 | Go to the Apple menu and choose About
this Mac. Here you are going to find not
| | 00:27 | only the version of the software you're
running, but the build if you should be
| | 00:32 | that information, but
also your Mac serial number.
| | 00:35 | Every so often if you are talking to
somebody at Apple Support you may need to
| | 00:39 | provide this information and
this is where you can find it.
| | 00:42 | You will also find the kind of processor
you have and the speed, in this case we have
| | 00:46 | 2.4 GHz Intel Core 2 Duo, and the amount
of memory that's installed in your Mac.
| | 00:51 | I will close that, now hold on the
Option key and again click on the Apple menu
| | 00:55 | and this time choose System Information.
| | 00:59 | At one time this application was
called System Profiler, but with Lion they
| | 01:03 | have changed the name.
| | 01:04 | This provides even more granular detail
about your Mac. Again select Hardware and
| | 01:10 | you can see the overview of
the map but you can go much deeper.
| | 01:13 | For example click USB, you can find
the kind of devices that are connected to
| | 01:17 | the USB port, click on Printers if
your printers installed, you'll see which
| | 01:21 | printers are installed on your Mac,
and you can check other settings such as
| | 01:25 | Bluetooth, your memory which slots,
they are installed in, and so on.
| | 01:33 | When I talked about recording with
QuickTime, I mentioned that you can capture a
| | 01:35 | movie of the screen.
| | 01:37 | But you can also capture still images on
your Mac screen and this can be helpful
| | 01:41 | if you need to send some of the
details of your Internet connection from the
| | 01:43 | Network system preference for example.
| | 01:45 | So speaking of that let's just go to
the Network system preference and I'll
| | 01:50 | take a screenshot of it.
| | 01:52 | Hold down Command+Shift+3 and that
takes a still image of whatever's on the
| | 02:00 | screen and here's our still image.
| | 02:04 | By the way I brought that up by
selecting the image and pressing the Spacebar
| | 02:09 | and that invokes Quick Look,
which allows you to preview files.
| | 02:14 | There's another way to capture the
screen and this time just a portion of the screen.
| | 02:17 | Hold down Command+Shift+4 and I
can select just a portion of the screen,
| | 02:24 | let go and it creates an image
of the selection and here it is.
| | 02:31 | Finally if you want to capture
just a menu or a window, hold down
| | 02:35 | Command+Shift+4 and then press the
Spacebar and then you can take a shot of
| | 02:40 | just a menu or a window.
| | 02:42 | So for example if I wanted to capture
this Edit menu, I select it then I press
| | 02:47 | Command+Shift+4 and then press the Spacebar.
| | 02:51 | Once I've done that all I have to do is move my
cursor over the object that I want to capture.
| | 02:57 | Click the mouse and there's your image.
| | 03:01 | So there is my screenshot of the menu.
I can also do that with this window.
| | 03:05 | I will click on the window, Command+Shift
+4 Spacebar, I click, and here is the
| | 03:13 | image of the window, plus notice they
draw the shadow around it so it's a very
| | 03:17 | nice looking image.
| | 03:19 | If you like typing, you can move to
locations on your Mac very easily. Just
| | 03:23 | press Shift+Command+G and up
pops the Go to Folder window.
| | 03:30 | At this point I can then type in
the path for a folder I want to visit.
| | 03:33 | The shortcut way to get to your user
folder is to press Shift+~. The tilde key
| | 03:38 | is next to the one key near the top of
the keyboard. And then a slash and then I
| | 03:44 | want to go to the Library folder inside
my User folder and then we'll go to the
| | 03:49 | Preferences folder. Go and here
I am and I can show you the path.
| | 03:56 | So I Command+Click on that folder and
here's the path. Preferences within the
| | 04:01 | Library folder inside my User folder,
inside the Users folder, and finally the
| | 04:06 | hard drive on this Mac.
| | 04:09 | This could be more efficient than just
double-clicking on the hard drive and
| | 04:13 | digging down. And finally using
the Option key with Finder menus.
| | 04:17 | I have got a couple of menus up here in
the menu bar. One is the Airport menu.
| | 04:21 | Now if like click on the Airport menu, it
shows me all the wireless networks nearby.
| | 04:26 | However, if I click while holding
the Option key, I see some more information.
| | 04:31 | I can see not only the channel that
this airport network is on, but I can also
| | 04:36 | check out the signal strength. This
RSSI is an indicator of signal strength.
| | 04:40 | Also if I want to know what kind of
protection is on that network, I just
| | 04:44 | look under security.
| | 04:46 | And then there's the Sound menu.
| | 04:47 | If I click on that I can adjust
the sound up-and-down if I like.
| | 04:52 | However if I hold on the Option key and
click on the Sound icon, I can see which
| | 04:57 | devices I have configured for the
output device and for the input device.
| | 05:02 | Currently, we just have one line out
and one in. However, if I had multiple
| | 05:07 | devices connected to sound I could then
from here select what I want to have for
| | 05:11 | my input and which I want to have for my output.
| | 05:15 | And there you have it.
| | 05:16 | Some of the Finder's less well-known
powers that you can put to good use to have
| | 05:20 | a more efficient Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Next steps| 00:01 | Thanks for joining me for Mac
OS X Lion Essential training.
| | 00:03 | I've had a terrific time talking to you
about Apple's latest operating system.
| | 00:08 | And while I have covered Lion fairly
thoroughly, there's always more to learn.
| | 00:12 | For example, I work for Macworld and so
naturally I think the content we produce
| | 00:16 | is pretty remarkable.
| | 00:17 | But there are other great
Apple focused web sites too.
| | 00:20 | And of course lynda.com is an
invaluable resource. You will find training here
| | 00:25 | on Lion Server, we have courses about
iTunes '10, iMovie '11, iPhoto, GarageBand
| | 00:37 | and of course if you have an iPad, my
very own iPad Tips and Tricks course.
| | 00:41 | And more! lynda.com will continue to
offer the best Apple training anywhere.
| | 00:46 | Thanks again watching. Happy computing!
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
